Λ> •,\ ^ "4 — ^ % ' ' ' <*** • ϊο χ S ,<3 ?ϊ* •*, e* \ -ν . ο • ^ *ν ο Ν • - '■... *, <* C> V .-Α - ν •V Λ -0 -^ ' κ ο χ fe ^ν S* \ ν \ ,ν * Λ GKEEK LESSONS ADAPTED TO GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR, AND INTENDED AS AN INTRODUCTION TO HIS GREEK READER. PREPARED BY R. P. LEIGHTON, A. M., MASTER OF ΤΗΈ MELROSE HIGH SCHOOL. BOSTON: GINN BROTHERS. 1874. -?κ^ V** Entered according to Act of Congress > in the year 1871, BY R., F. LEIGHTON, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. University Press : Welch, Bigelow, & Co., Cambridge. PREFACE. These Lessons have been prepared to accompany Good- win's Greek Grammar, and are intended as an introduction to his Greek Reader now in press. They consist of about hundred 3 (both Greek and English), select] from Xenophon's Anabasis, notes, additional exei be translated into Greek, and vocabularie The Lessons present a progressive series of exerc! designed to ground the pupil thoroughly in grammatical forms, inflections, and the principles of syntax. They are so arranged that the pupil can use them from the very out- set in his progress through the grammar, thus furnishing him with the means of applying the knowledge he is ac- quiring. They have been mainly selected from the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis, thus presenting a uniformity of style, and enabling the teacher to examine the connec- tion from which they have been taken. The number of different words introduced has been greatly diminished by selecting words for practice on the inflections from the same sentences which are used to illustrate the principles of syntax ; and, again, by repeating a sentence w T ith ad- ditions, instead of introducing a new one. By this m< the transition to the selections for reading is rend \ as the pupil has already acquired considerable miliarity with the vocabulary, style, and subject-matter, and has translated in detail a great part of the first chap- The objection against detached, isolated sen: thus somewhat obviated, by making these same sentei reappear in a connected narrative. IV PREFACE. The English exercises to be translated into Greek have been based upon the preceding reading lessons, and contain only words and principles already familiar. In this way the pupil is afforded the best aid in respect to the construc- tion and arrangement of the sentence. \ The selections for reading comprise the text of the f second, eighth, and tenth chapters of the first book of Anabasis, fully illustrated by notes and grammatical refer- ences. It is believed that the additional sentences to be trans- lated into Greek, together with those in the lessons, if thoroughly mastered, will be a sufficient preparation in Greek composition for entrance to any American college, at the present standard of admission. A few words are printed in italics or enclosed in brackets, either to indicate the Greek idiom or to show that they are not to be rendered into Greek. Full Vocabularies are given at the end of the book. The leading signification of each word is generally given first, and the distinctions in meaning which follow are given with special reference to their use in these Lessons. Some English words (preceded by Eng.), derived directly from the Greek, others (preceded by Cf. Eng.), from a kindred form of the Greek word, are given. Occasionally a Latin, a Greek, and an English word, all kindred forms of a simi- lar root, are given, to indicate to the pupil the common origin of them all. When there is no apparent connection between the two words, the Latin is preceded by the sign of equality. In conclusion, I would avail myself of this opportunity to express my great obligations to Professor W. W. Good- win, who has very kindly read over the manuscript and revised the proof. Melrose, June, 1871. PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. BEFORE printing this edition many mispril have been corrected. About half a dozen pa. con- nected narrative to be translated into Greek, the Exami- nation Papers in Greek Composition used for t' twelve years for admission to Harvard College, and Qi tions for Examination and Review have been added Vocabularies have been recast and considerably enlarj difficult passages in the text translated, and numei references to the grammar added. But slight chai have been made in the text, except in the notes on the prepositions ; now only the radical meaning is given in notes. For fuller definitions the general Vocabulary should be consulted. R. F. L. Melrose, Mass., September, 1873. < < ) \"π•: \ί 1 1 INFLECTION OF NOUNS. 1 'Λ ADJECTIVES. 1 1 1 I MS .... . nenle PRONOl Μ VERBS. V"i• •*....•• < 18 89 EtBfl IN MI. Vlll CONTENTS. Verbs ΐημι, φημ£, Κ€ΐμαι 40 Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the ju-form . 41 SYNTAX. Subject ami Predicate 42 Syntax of Adjectives 43 Syntax of the Article 43 Syntax of Pronouns • . 45 CASES. Nominative and Vocative ..•.•... 46 Accusative 47 Genitive 48 Genitive (continued) # , 49 Dative 51 Dative (continued) 52 SYNTAX OF VERBS. Voices 54 Tenses of the Indicative 55 THE MOODS. Final and Object Clauses after ϊνα, ώ$, tfircos, μ.ή . . . • 57 Particular Suppositions ........ 58 General Suppositions . . . . . . . . .60' Conditional Sentences (General and Particular) . . . . 63 Relative and Temporal Sentences 65 Indirect Discourse (Simple Sentences) 68 Indirect Discourse (Compound Sentences) 69 The Particle "AN 71 Causal Sentences 72 Expression of a Wish 74 The Imperative and Subjunctive in Independent Sentences . . 75 The Infinitive ' . 76 The Participle 77 Xenophon's Anabasis, Chaps. I., II., VIII., and X. . . 80 Notes 99 Additional Exercises to be translated into Greek. . 116 Miscellaneous Exercises 135 Examination Papers 143 Questions for Review 155 Miscellaneous Questions 172 <>reek-English Vocabulary 1 FVglish-Greek Vocabulary 51 GREEK LESSONS Before beginning these Lessons the pupil is expected to have learned the large type of Part I. of the Grammar. The sections of the Grammar to which each lesson refers are designated at the head. In the Vocabularies, each noun is followed by its genitive to mark the declension, and by the article to mark the gender. LESSON I. Vocabulary• Τέλβυτη, -ης, (rj), 1 end. Θάλασσα (later Attic 0a- Ό, η, το, the. λαττα), -ης, (ή), sea. Χωρά, -ας, (ή), territory. ΊΖατράπης, -ου, (ό), satrap. Χυλλογη, -ης, (ή), levying Γη, -ης, (η), land. (of troops). Πηγή, -ής, (η), a spring, 'Αρχή, -ης, (ή), government. source. Translate into English. 1. TeXevrff. 2. Της τέλβυτής. 3. Ai τέλευταί. 4. Έξ αρχής. 2 5. Trj άρχτ). 6. Είς την γήν. 7. Της γης. 8. 'JE/c 3 της χώρας. 9. Είς 3 την θάλασσαν. 10. Συλ- λογής. 11. Τί) συλλογή. 12. Ταΐν θαλάσσαιν. 13. 2α- τραττου. 14. Χωρά. 1 The article is used in Greek to indicate the gender of substan- tives, and its declension should be learned at the outset. — See Gram- mar, § 78. 2 Account for the circumflex accent (§ 25, 2). 1 2 GREEK LESSONS. s The preposition ck, ίξ before a vowel (Lat. ex, e), means from, out of, and is followed by the genitive. In like manner ds (Lat. in with the accusative) means into, to, among, and is followed by the accusa- tive. LESSON II. FIRST DECLENSION, § 35 - 39. Vocabulary. Βασιλεία, -ας, (η), kingdom. 'Οπλίτης, -ου, (ο), heavy- Olfcla, -ας, (??), house. armed soldier. Καί, and. 'Από (prep, with gen.), Στρατιώτης, -ου, (ό), sol- from, by. dier. 'Επίβουλη, -ής, (η), plot. 'Ayopa, -ας, (η), market- Μνάα {μνα), -ας, (ή), mhia. place. 'Αρετή, -ης, (ή), goodness. 'Ημερα, -ας, (??), day. Βία, -ας, {η), force. Translate into English, 1. 'Επίβουλης. 2. Tfj επίβουλη 3. -ΕΣ? 1 την βα- σίλεια». 4. Άπο 2 της αρχής» 5. Των στρατιωτών? 6. Εις την των στρατιωτών^ οΐκίαν. 7. Εις την ay ο ράν. 8. 'Etc 1 τής αγοράς} 9. Έκ της χώρας. 10. Στρατίώτα. 11. Τους οπλίτας^ ορώ (jT see). 12. Της αρετής. 4 " 13. Η του στρατιώτου βία. 14. ΤοΙν στρατίωταίν. 15. Τής ημέρας? 16. Βία και αρετή. 17. Τ ας μνας ορώ. 1 See Lesson I. Note 3. 2 The preposition από (Lat. a or ab) usually means from, away from; it means by, when used with a verb, to express the means by which something is done. 3 For the Vocative, see § 37, 2, Note 1. 4 Account for the circumflex accent (§ 25, 2). 5 § 37, 2. lessons m., IV. 3 LESSON III. Translate into Greek• 1. The government. 2. From 1 the government. 3. I see the land. 4 Into 2 the kingdom. 5. Into the market- place. 6. Out of the market-place. 7. Away from the sea. 8. I see the land and sea. 9. To the government. 10. From the territory. 11. I see the soldiers. 12. The plot. 13. The food of the soldiers. 14. Into the sea. 15. The levying of the soldiers. 1 See Lesson II. Note 2. * See Lesson L Note 3. LESSON IV. SECOND DECLENSION, § 40 - 42. Vocabulary. Δαρείος, -ου, (ό), Darius, Φίλος, -ου, (ό), friend. king of Persia. Στρατηγός, -ού, (ό), gen- Βίος, -ου, (ό), life. eral. 'Αδελφός, -ού, (ό), brother. Πεδίον, -ου, (τό), a plain. Χρυσίον,-ου,(τό), gold. Κύρος, -ου, (ο), Cyrus. Ποταμός, -ού, (ό), river. Σκηνή, -ης, (ή), tent. Μάχη, -ης, (η), battle. Πελταστης, -ού, (ό) ? tar - Μίλητος, -ου, (η), Miletus, geteer. a city of Caria. 'Οδός, -ού, (ή), way, road. Translate into English. 1. Ό Δαρείου αδελφός. 1 2. Του βίου. 3. Είς την οδον. 4. Προς 2 τον άδελφόν, 5. 'Εν τω ττεδίω. 6. Προς 4 GREEK LESSONS. τον Κύρον. 3 7. 'Etc Μίλητου. 8. Πέλτασταί. 9. Trj μάχρ. 10. Προς τον Δαρείου άΒέλφόν. 11. Το χρυ- σών όρω. 12. Ό του στρατηγού φίλος} 13. Ο φίλος 6 του στρατηγού. 14. Προς τον ποταμόν. 15. Έν ταΐς των στρατηγών σκηνοίς. 16. Κύρος ην (was) προς Μίλητω. 17. Προς τας τού ποταμού πηγας. 18. Την τού στρα- τιώτου άρβτην θαυμάζβν [he admires). 1 The vocative sing, of αδελφό* is αδελφέ with irregular accent, §25,2. 1 The preposition προς is followed by the genitive, dative, or accu- sative : with genitive implying motion from a place ; with dative, abiding at a place ; with accusative, motion to a person or place. * § 141, Note 1 (a). * When a noun qualified by the genitive has the article, the geni- tive is usually placed between the article and that noun, as in the example above. But see § 142, 1 and 2. LESSON V. Translate into Greek• 1. The life. 2. The 1 life of the brother. 3. I see the river. 4. To 2 the river. 5. To the sources of the river. 6. At Miletus. 7. I see the brother of Cyrus. 8. I see the battle. 9. To the brother of the general. 10. The gold of the soldier. 11. In the plain. 12. The end of life. 3 1 See Lesson IV. Note 4. 2 Observe that the preposition els means to a position in something, and corresponds to the Lat. in with the accusative, while προς with the accusative signifies to (to the front of). 8 Arrange this in two different ways. See Lesson IY. Note 4. LESSON VI. 5 ' LESSON VI. SECOND DECLENSION, §42-43. Vocabulary• Χβρρονησος, -ου, (77), the Δασμός, -ου, (ο), tribute. Chersonesus. Ήμβ'ρα, -ας, (ή), day. Μισθός, -οχ), (ό), pay. Νόος [νους), -ου, (6), mind. Φρυγία, -ας, (ή), Phrygia. Λαγώς, -ω, (ό), a hare. Νβως, -ω, (ό), temple. Πλόος (πλους), -ου, (6), Θβος, -ού, (ό), God. voyage. Kaveov {ονν), -ον, (το), α θάλασσα, -ης, (77), sea. basket. Κιλικία, -ας, (η), Cilicia. "Αγγελος, -ου, (6),messenger. Βάρβαρος, -ου, (6), bar- 'Ιωνία, -ας, (ή), Ionia. barian. Translate into English. 1. 'Ο 1 των στρατιωτών μισθός. 2. Του νου. 3. *0 των βαρβάρων δασμός. 4. Οι των θβών 2 ν€ω. 5. Προς τον ν€ων. 6. Άπ 'Ιωνίας εις Κιλικίαν. 7. Έκ Φρυγίας €ΐς Κιλικίαν. 8. Ό πλους προς την Χερρονησον. 9. Εκ του ν€ω προς την θάλασσαν. 3 10. Ό Κυρου άγγελος. 11. Διωκζι {he pursues) τον λαγών. 12. Ττ) ημ€ρα. 13. Έκ της χωράς. 14. Τον λαγών* όρω (I see\ 1 See Lesson Ι Υ. Note 4. * Account for the circumflex accent (§ 25, 2). 3 For the accent see § 22. For the quantity of final a, see § 37, 2, Note 2. 4 See § 42, 2, Note. 6 GREEK LESSONS. LESSON VII. Translate into Greek• 1. The pay of the soldier. 2. The mind of Cyrus. 3. From x Ionia to Cilicia. 4. To 2 the sea. 5. The messen- gers of the Gods. 6. They build (κτίζονται) temples to the Gods. 7. The tribute of the barbarians. 8. From the sea. 9. A voyage to Ionia. 10. From the market-place. 11. The friend of Cyrus. 12. To 3 the river. 13. To the brother of Darius. 14. Ο Cyrus! 15. The friends of the soldiers. 1 See Lesson I. Note 3. s See Lesson IV. Note 2. 8 To is translated by a preposition when there is motion to a place ; by προς when it means to, towards ; by els when it signifies to, into; otherwise by the dative case. LESSON VIII. THIRD DECLENSION. —Uncontkacted ISTouns, §45-50. Vocabulary. Φυγάς, -αΒος, (6), fugitive, Μην, μηνός, (ο), month. exile. Χρήμα, -ατός, (τό), thing; Πράγμα, -ατός, {το), thing. (in pi.) resources, money. 'Aywv, -ωνος, (6), public Συν (prep, with d&t.), with. games. Παις, παώος, [ο or η), boy, 9 Εν (prep, with dat.), in. child. ΦαΧαγξ, -αγγος, (rj),phalanx. "Ονομα, -ατός, (το), name. Προ (prep, with gen.),before. "Ε\\ην, -ηνος, (6), a Greek. 2τράτ€υμα,-ατος,(τό),αηη7/. Σκηνή, -ης, (η), tent. Φρην, ~€νός, (η), the mind. Αιμην, -ενός, (6), harbor. "Αρμα, -ατός, (το), chariot. Δαίμων, -όνος, (6), divinity. LESSON IX. 7 Translate into English. 1. To Κνρου στράτευμα. 2. Χυν 1 τοις φυγασί. 3. Είς 2 την σκηνην. 4. ΧυνεΧεξε {he collected) στρά- τευμα άπο 3 τούτων {these) των χρημάτων. 5. Εν τω πεΒίω. 6. Το των ΈΧλ,ήνων στράτευμα. 7. *Εν ttj χωρά. 8. Ό Δαρείου παΐςϊ 9. Προς Κυρον προ 1 της μάχης. 10. "Εθηκε {he established) αγώνα. 11. Χτη- σας {having stopped) το άρμα 5 ττρο της φάλαγγος. 12. Τω παϊδε. 6 13. Αϊ τών 'ΕΧληνων φρένες. 14. Των μηνών. 15. *Εν τΐ) Κνρου άρχτ). 16. Ή Βαιμον.' 1 The preposition συν (Lat. cum) means with, that is in company with ; πρό (Lat. pro, prae) means before, for, and & (Lat in with the ablative), in. % See Lesson I. Note 3. • See § 46, 1. 8 See Lesson II. Note 2. β See § 33, 1. * § 25, 3, Note ; § 48, 2 (c). T For the vocative, see § 48, 2, (a). LESSON IX. Translate into Greek. 1. To the army. 2. The chariot of Cyrus. 3. With 1 the exiles. 4. The two months. 2 5. The name of the Greek. 6. Before the phalanx. 7. The property of the exile. 8. The two boys of Darius. 9. Into the tent. 10. In the territory of the Greeks. 11. In the plain before the phalanx. 12. With the army of Cyrus. 13. The army of the Greeks and that of the barbarians. 1 See Lesson VIII. Note 1. * See Lesson VIII. Note 6. 8 GREEK LESSONS. LESSON X. THIRD DECLENSION. — Contract Nouns, § 51 - 55. Vocabulary• Τισσαφέρνης, -εος, -ους, (6), "Ορος, -εος, -01/9, (™), mowi- Tissapliernes. tain. Δυραμις, -εως, (η), force, ΠοΧις, -εως, (η), city. power. Βασιλεύς, ~εως, (6), Jang. Πρόφασις,-εως,(η), pretext. Εύρος, -εος, (τό), breadth. Έξετασις, -εως, (η), review. Παράδεισος, -ου, (6), α Τάξις, -εως, (η) , order, coJiort. park. Translate into English. 1. Ή του βασιλέως Βυραμις. 2. Έρ ταΐς πόλεσιρ. 1 3. Προς top βασιλέα. 4. Εποιεϊτο (he made) τηρ πρό- φασιρ? 5. Έ /c τωρ πολεωρ? 6. Το του ποταμού εύρος. 7. Έποίησερ (lie made) εξετασιρ τωρ ΈΧΧ,ηνωρ. 8. Ή του στρατεύματος τάξις. 9. Αι του βασιλέως τριήρεις. 10. Χυρ τω στρατεύματι. 11. 'Ιππείς τωρ Έλληνωρ και τωρ βαρβάρωρ. 12. * Ερ τω Τισσαφερρους^παραΖείσω. 1 See § 13. 3 For the accent, see § 22, Note 2. 1 See § 53, 1. 4 See general vocabulary. LESSON XI. Translate into Greet. 1. In the cities. 1 2. From the cities. 3. The pretext of the king. 2 4. To the park of the king. 3 5. To the moun- tain. 6. The park in the city. 3 7. The review of the sol• LESSON XII. 9 diers of Cyrus. 8. AYith the army of Tissaphernes. 9. I see the review in the park. 10. To the tent of the Greeks. 11. From Phrygia into Cilicia. 1 Observe carefully the use of ν movable, § 13. * Arrange this in two different ways. * See £ 142, 1. LESSON XII. THIRD DECLENSION. — Syncopated Nouns, §57. Vocabulary. Μητηρ. μητρός, (η), mother. 'Ιδιώτης, -ου, (ό), a private Αριθμός, -ού, (ό), ην ι κ- son. her. Άιη\ρ, ανδρός, (ό), man. Ήγβμων, -όνος, (β), ;//'>' Ναύς, ν€ως, (τ;), ship. Δήμος, -ου, (υ ). /» > Ί Τβιχος, -€ος, (το), WO& Ψελιον, -ου, (το ί /. Xeip, χειρός, (ή) η hand. Χιτών, -ωνος, (ό Μτ}κος, -€ος, (τό), length. Κβ'ρας, -ατος,(-αος) -ω?, (τό), Αργύρων, -ου, (τό), si/rrr. tin- wing of m army. Βούς, βοός, (ό or η), ox or Δόρυ, δόρατος, (τό), BpeOT. COi'\ Translate into English. 1. Συν τι/ Κυρου 1 μητρί. 2. Kal Κύρος έξβτασιν καΐ αριθμόν των 'Ελλήνων εποίησβν (made) ev τω παραδβίσω. 4. 'Στρατηγού 2 καΐ Ιδιωτου. 3 5. Κύρος δίδωσιν (gives) ηγβμονα. G. Αι νη€ς Α ωρμουν (were moored) κατά την Κυρου σκηνην. 7. Τα τείχη καθή /cei (reaeh) eU την θά- λασσαν? 8. Κύρος τας ναύς μ€Τ€ΤΓ€μψατο (sent for)* 10 GREEK LESSONS. 9. Μ να apyvplov. 10. To του στρατβυματος κ€ρας β 6 ρω. 11. Εξε'τασιν 1 iroiel {he makes) ev τω 7Γ€δ/ω των Έλλη- νων καΐ των βαρβάρων. 12. Boolv. 13. Τα? χεφα? 8 ορώ (I see). 1 Account for the acute accent. 1 Why perispomenon (§ 25, 2) ? 8 For the vocative, see § 37, 2, Note 1. 4 Observe that vavs is contracted only in the accusative plural. 6 Account for the accent, see § 37, 2, Note 1. 8 Kepas drops τ in the genitive and is contracted like γέρας, see § 56, 2. ' § 53. 8 Dative plural χιρσί, see vocabulary. LESSON XIII. Translate into Greek• 1. I see the mother of Cyrus. 2. I see the review of the Greeks ija the park. 3. I see the mina of silver. 4. The people of the city. 5. With the two hands. 1 6. I see the bracelet of the king. 7. I see the length of the spear. 8. I see the number of ships. 9. In the park before the wall of the city. 10. To the temple of the Gods. 11. I see the spear and the bracelet. 1 For the use of the dual, see § 33, 1. LESSON XIV. 11 ADJECTIVES. LESSON XIV. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS, §62-64. Vocabulary. Μέσος, -77, -ov, middle. Λβξως, -ά, -ov, right, on the 'Ασπίς, -ιΒος, (η), shichl. fight* Λευκός, -η, -ό*/. wh Κραυγή, -^9, (η), shout. *Αξιος, -ία, -ων. WWthfJ. "Ανθρωπος, -ου, (ό), man. ΚβφαΧη, -ης, (7;). head. ΒυΧινος, -η, -ον, 100θώ Αγαθός, -η. -όν. Ψιλός, -η, -όν. //" ΝεΌς, -ά, -ον, young. "ΑΧΧος, -η, -ο, another. Φόβος, -ου, {&) y fear. Translate into Kntjllsh. 1. Συν ταΐς ψίΧαΊς κβφαΧαις. 2« Ό etc των 'ΕΧΧηνων €ΐς τους βαρβάρους φόβος. 3. ΑΧΧη λ πρόφασις. 4. Η των βάρβαρων κραυγΐ). •>. Οπλίται συν ξυΧιναις ασπι- σιν. 0. Ποιούντβς τάξεων. 1 ί. .Ει> μεστ; ττ} πόλει. 14. Ό «Vi/p ό αγαθός.* 1 I that πλλο? has άλλο in the nominative, accusative, and 2 The 1 . δια prim .md is followed by with tin• Lenitive it means through : with live, during, on accou: tl 12 GREEK LESSONS. 8 Through the middle cf the city, while ή μέση πόλις would mean the middle city, in contrast with other cities. See § 142 Note 4. 4 For the position of the article, see § 142, 1 and 2. LESSON XV. Translate into Greek• 1. I see the worthy man. 1 2. I see the right wing of the army. 3. With the wooden shields. 4. Through the city. 5. With the other Greeks. 6. From the shout of the barbarians. 7. I see the two 2 hands of Cyrus. 8. Through the middle 3 of the king's park into the city. 9. I see the young soldier of the king. 10. I see another review of the Greeks. 11. I see the shield and spear of Cyrus. 12. With the wooden shields of the citizens. 4 13. I see the battle before the city. 14. Through the middle 3 of the city. 15. The middle 3 city. 1 For the position of the article, see § 142, 2, also § 62, 2. For the quantity of final a, see § 37, 2, Note 1. 2 See § 33, 1. See Lesson XIV. Note 3. 4 See § 142, 2, Note 4. LESSON XVI. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. — Contracts, § 65. Translate into English. 1. Kara 1 του τβίχους. 2. Κατά της 7τετρα?. 3. Κατά τον ρουν. 4. "Ayec (he leads) το στράτευμα κατά το μέσον των πο\€μιων. 5. Ιττττον χρυσοχαΧινον και στρβπ- LESSON XVII. 13 τον χρυσούν και ψεΧια καΐ άκινακην χρυσούν eBcotce {lie gave). 6. ΆνδρΙ βκάστω δωσζι (he ivill give) 7reWe αργυρίου μνας. 7. Ή πάροδος ην (was) στενή. 8. 'Τττερ 2 της γης. 9. *Ύπ\ρ του Χοφου. 10. Ή δεξιά χειρ. 3 11. Έκ του νεω εις την OLtccav. 12. Εν τι) ττρωτη συνοδω. 13. ΤηΧοφος υπέρ της κώμης. 14. Το βασιΧειον ση μείον ο ρω (I see). 15. Ol ayaOoi τοις αγαθοίς ευνοι* εισιν 5 (are). 16. Κατά την όδόν. 17. Κατά του ουρανού. 1 The preposition κατά primarily signifies dozen, and is followed by the genitive and dative; with the genitive, it means down from; with the accusative, down. 2 The preposition imep (Lat. super) signifies over ; with the genitive, over • with the accusative, over, beyond. 8 For dative, see vocabulary. 4 See § 71, Note 3. 6 For the accent, see § 28, 2. LESSON XVII. Translate into Greek. 1. I see the golden bracelet. 1 2. The man worthy of death. 3. Through the city with the other soldiers. 4. Through Greece. 5. Over our head. 6. I see the hill above the village. 7. Through the middle of the city. 2 8. Death in behalf of Greece. 9. I see the well-disposed man. 10. Above the earth. 11. Into the palace of the king. 1 See Lesson XIV. Note 4. • See Lesson XIT. Note 3. 14 GREEK LESSONS. LESSON XVIII. THIRD DECLENSION", §66. Translate into English. 1. ΤΙαραδβισος αγρίων θηρίων πΧηρης ην (was)• 2. Oi "ΕΧΧηνες συν γβΧωτι επί 1 τας σκηνας ηΧθον (went). 3. e T7ro 2 ττ) ακροποΧβν. 4. Τα αθΧα ήσαν (ivere) στλεγ- γίδες χρυσαϊ. 5. 'Επί ταΐς πη<γαΐς του Μαρσύου ποτα- μού. 6. Κατά νΧας καΐ κατά τάξεις. 7• '.Εφ 3 άρματος. 8. Δια της φυΧίας* χώρα?. 9. Ήσαν {they were) αφα- νείς. 10. Κατά πρανούς γηΧοφου. 11. Ή ευδαίμων 5 ποΧις. 12. Επί του Ιππου. 13. Επο ttj θαΧαττη. 14. 'jBttI του ποταμοί). 15. ' Επί τω ποταμω. 16. *Τ7Γ0 το?? Βίφροις. 17. '-Επ^ 6 τήυ βασϊΧεα le'vav (to march.) 1 The preposition eVi primarily signifies upon ; with the genitive and dative, upon (at or near)\ with the accusative, upon (to or 2 The preposition νπό (Lat. sub) signifies under; with the genitive from under ; with the dative, under ; with the accusative, to express motion to a position, under an object. 3 See § 12 and § 17. * See § 142, 1. 5 See § 48, 2 ; for nom. neuter, see vocabulary. 6 To march upon y i. e. against the king. LESSON XIX. Translate into Greek, 1. Upon the sea. 2. I see the golden prizes. 3. Upon the mountain. 4. In the barbarian army. 5. The last town of Cilicia (situated) upon the sea. 6. A 1 country full of wild beasts. 7. Down a steep hill. 8. In company with the wealthy citizens. 9. To the wealthy city. 10. From LESSON XX. 15 under the wagon. 11. Down from the rock. 12. Under the seats. 13. Upon the horse. 14. To mount 2 upon a horse. 1 The Greek has no indefinite article, and our " a " is not to be translated, unless it means a particular person or thing, in which case the pronoun τις (enclitic) is used. § 78, Note 1. 1 To mount, ανάβαιναν. 8 § 202 and 1. LESSON XX. FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS, §67-70. Translate into English• 1. Πάρα 1 πάντων. 2 2. Ψιλή ην (was) απασα η χωρά. 3. Πάρα τον τον Κνρου πατέρα. 4. Πάρα την όδον. 5. Οΐνος γλυκύ? 5 εστίν (is). 6. Εν ττ} σκηνή τον στρα- τηγον 6 ρω. 7. Ό νεανίας έχει (has) ταχυν ΐππον. 8. Την μέλαιναν νεφε\ην θαυμάζομεν (tre admire). 9. Έν ελπίσι μεηαλαις. 10. Προς βασιλέα μέγαν εις Βαβυλώνα. 11. Το άλλο 3 στράτευμα ορώ. 12. Πάντες ol τών αρί- στων Περσών παίδες επί ταϊς βασιλέως θύραις παιδεύονται (are educated). 13. Μετ 4 ανθρώπων είναι (to be). 14. Παρά του μεγάλου βασιλέως. 15. Προ της μάχης. 16. Κραυγή πολλή. 17. Άνδρες άξιοι της ελευθερίας. 5 18. Περί 6 το στρατοπεδον. 19. Παρά του βασιλέως. 20. Παρά τω βασιλεΐ. 21. Παρά τον βασιλε'α. 22. Μετά πολλών κίνδυνων. 23. Μετά την μάχην. 24. Πλέων (sading) μετά χαλκόν. 25. Περί τΐ] κεφαλή. 1 The proposition παρά signifies beside; with the genitive, from beside : with dative, by the side of; with the accusative, to the side of 1 See § 25, 3, Note. 8 See Lesson XIV. Note 1. * The preposition μ*τά (cf. Lat. medius) signifies in the midst of; 16 GREEK LESSONS. with the genitive, in the midst of {with in the sense of participation with) ; with the dative, not used in prose ; with the accusative, into the midst of (from the desire to be in the midst of something comes the derived meaning, after). 6 § 141, Note 1 (b). • The preposition περί (cf. Lat. per) signifies around (on all sides of), and is followed by the genitive, dative, or accusative. LESSON XXI. Translate into Greek. 1. I see the black horse. 2. Through the city. 3. Through the whole 1 country. 4. Every city. 5. With the swift horses. 6. All the children of the king. 7. I see a worthy man. 8. I see the rest 2 of the country. 9. Near the great king. 10. To a large and rich city. 11. Before the battle. 12. After the battle. 1 § 142, 4, Note 1. 2 Without the article αΚλος means another; but 6 άλλος, the rest. § 142, 2, Note 3. LESSON XXII. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS, § 71 - 74. Translate into English. 1. Ο ανηρ βασιλικωτατος και αξιωτατος εστίν. 2. Mera Κυρον τον αργαιον. 3. Ή θανμασίωτατβ αν θρωπε. 4. Κύρος 6 νεώτερος. 5. Ό βασιλεύς ατταρα- σ κενότατος εστίν. 6. Δια της φιλίας 'χωράς. 7. Χρν~ ματα 7Γο\\α εΒωκεν {he gave). 8. %οφία πλούτου 1 τιμιω- LESSONS XXIIL, XXV. 17 τερα εστίν. 9. Ή 68ος μακρότατη εστίν (is). 10. Χαλβ- ττωτατος εχθρός εστίν (he is). 11. "Εχων (having) ττοΧυ στράτευμα. 12. Ό ττατηρ Χεηει (speaks) τα βεΧτιστα. 2 13. Ή μητηρ γαριεστερα της θυγατρός εστίν (is). 14 # Είς Ίσσους, τ^9 Κιλικίας εσγ/ιτην ττοΧιν, επι τη θαΧατττ), μεγαΧην καϊ ενΒαίμονα? 15. ' Αληθώς λεγβέ. 16. Ό τταράΒεισος αγρίων θηρίων ττΧηρης εστίν (is). 17. v HBlov καϊ προθυμοτερον συνεττορευοντο (they ivent IVlth him). 1 § 175, 1. ■ § 75. 8 § 77, Note 4. LESSON XXIII. Translate into Greek. 1. The man is worthy of liberty. 2. To a friendly city. 3. Through the whole country. 4. In the presence of Cyrus the younger. 5. In the greatest fear. 6. Into a park full of wild beasts. 7. The cloud is blacker than night 8. lie is a most worthy man. 9. He speaks wisely. 10. Into a most wealthy city. 11. The father is wiser than the son. 12. Near the great king. 13. Into the tent of Cyrus. 14 With the swiftest horses. LESSON XXIV. IRREGULAR COMPARISON, §73. Translate into English. 1. Τα κρεα ηΰιστα ην (tOOs\ 2. ΜαΧα κατά ττ φα- νούς γ/[Χοφου. 3. Πάντων εστί κράτιστος. 4. *Ι2ς ι 2 18 GREEK LESSONS. τάχιστα. 5. Λαμβάνει {he takes) άνδρας Πελοποννη- σίους οτι 1 ττλείστους καΐ βέλτιστους. 6. Το άρμα του βασιλέως κάλλιστον εστίν. 7. Δια μέσης της πόλεως. . -4fi> αμεινοσιν ανορασιν. υ. ti οοος ευρεία βστιν. 10. Ή %ωρα μεγάλη καΐ καλή βστιν. 11. Πρεσβύτερος μεν 2 'Αρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δε Κύρος. 12. 2υζ/ το?9 «/>/- στο^9 #α2 ευδαιμονεστατοις. 13. Κακίους εισΐ των βαρ- βάρων. 14. Παράδεισος ττάνυ μέγας και καλός εστίν. 15. Ό ποταμός πλήρης Ιχθύων μεγάλων καΐ ττραεων^ εστίν. 16. Συν ολίγοις. J.7. Ό αζ/^ρ κακός εστίν. 18. 0£ ^7Γ7Γ06 ταχείς είσιν {are). 19. 5W μάλλον* φί- λοις. 20. Κύρος εττορεύετο {proceeded) ημελημενως μάλλον. 1 The particles ως and on are often joined with superlatives to strengthen them or increase their force. 2 The particles μεν and de stand in contrasted clauses and serve to form a connection like our indeed, but; on the one hand, on the other ; but in many cases the contrast is so slight that it either cannot be rendered at all in English, or at most by but alone. In this place be is continuative, so that the force of μεν cannot well be given in English. 3 § 70, Note. 4 The comparative and superlative of adjectives and adverbs may be formed by means of the positive and μάλλον, more, μάλιστα or πλείστα, most. LESSON XXV. Translate into Greek• 1. With the best men. 2. As quickly as possible. 1 3. I see a rich and beautiful city. 4. With the swiftest 2 horses. 5. I see the bravest man. 6. I see the richest LESSON XXVI. 19 city. 7. I see a very large park. 8. Into the last city of Phrygia. 9. The shortest road into Cilicia. 10. Into a large and beautiful plain. 11. I see the rest 3 of the army. 12. To the great king. 13. Through the middle of the city. 4 14. To a river full of large and tame fish. 15. With the best soldiers of the king. 1 Use the particle ως. 8 See Lesson XXI. Note 2. 1 See Lesson XIV. Note 4. * See Lesson XIY. Note 3. LESSON XXVI. NUMERALS, § 76. Translate Into English. 1. Εντεύθεν εξεΧαύνει {he marches) σταθμούς δύο, παρασά^ηας δέκα, επι τον Ψαρον ποταμον. 2. Ήμε'ρας τρεις εμεινεν {he remained). 3. ' Ενα σταθμον εξεΧαύνει. 4. Καϊ Κύρω παρησαν ((tmveel) al εκ ΠεΧοποννησου νηες 1 τριάκοντα καϊ πέντε. 5. Εγει {he has) ναύς έτερα? Κυρου πέντε καϊ εικοσιν. 6. Εν τω τρίτω σταθμω. 7. Εγει χιΧιους όπΧιτας. 8. Ην {was) παρά τον Ευ- φρατην πάροδος στενή μεταξύ του ποταμού καϊ της τάφρου ως 2 είκοσι ποδών το εύρος. 9. ΤΙαρεηενοντο {tverc pres- ent) ev Tjj μάγτ) ενενηκοντα μυριάδες και άρματα δρεπανη- φορα εκατόν και πεντήκοντα. 10. Δέκα ταΧαντα εδωκεν. 11. Χυν αΧΧοις τρισιν ητετταρσιν. 12. 'Ενταύθα δη εν ττ} εξοπΧισία αριθμός βγ ενετό {teas) των μεν 'ΕΧΧηνων άσπις^ μυρία καϊ τετρακόσια, πεΧτασταϊ δε δισχιΧιοι κα\ πεντακόσιοι, των δε μετά Κυρου βάρβαρων δέκα μυριάδες καϊ άρματα δρεπανηφόρα άμφϊ* τά 5 είκοσι. 13. Άμφϊ 20 GREEK LESSONS. τα έξηκοντα. 14. ΑμφΙ τα Ορη. 15. Tlepi τον ποταμον ούκοΰνται {they dwell). 16. ΆμφΙ τους μύριους. 6 17. Μαχόμενοι {fighting) υττβρ 1 Κυρου. 1 §54. 2 The proclitic (§ 29) ως, with words denoting number, means about, not far from. 3 Lit. 10,000 shield, i. e. 10,000 heavy-armed men. 4 The preposition άμφί signifies about (i. e. on both sides of cf. nepi) ; with the genitive, about ; with the dative, only used in poetry ; with the accusative, about. 5 The article is used before a numeral depending on άμφί, and is not to be translated. 6 See 77, 2, Note 3. 7 Over, i. e. in defence of LESSON XXVII. Translate into Greek. 1. "With three vessels. 2. About four days. 3. With six soldiers. 4. I see forty-five vessels. 5. I see five thou- sand soldiers. 6. With ten thousand soldiers. 7. About twenty-five. 8. With four men. 9. Three days. 10. With four thousand soldiers. 11. Upon 1 one mountain. 12. Thirty-seven furlongs. 13. With one army. 14. Two by two. 2 15. About twenty feet wide. 16. With three or four others. 17. One furlong. 18. In the third day's journey. 19. With sixty vessels. 1 See Lesson XVIII. Note 1. 2 Use the preposition κατά. LESSONS XXVIII., XXIX. 21 PRONOUNS. LESSOX XXVIII. PERSONAL PRONOUNS, fcc., §79-80. Translate into English. 1. Προς €μ€. 2. *Τπ * εμού. ο. Παρ εμού. 4. Περί ε με. 5. Αυτός 2 6 άνθρωπος. 6. Ό αύτος 2 άνθρωπος, 7. Προ αυτού 3 βασιλέως. 8. Προς αυτόν. 9. Προς εαυτόν. 10. Ό εμαυτού* πατήρ. 11. Χυν εαυτω. 12. '-4μφ αυτόν. 13. Ή ισχι/9 αυτών. 14. £ίγ αυ- toV. 15. Κύρος αυτός. 1G. -4υτο9 3 σιί. 17. Hepi αυτιών. 18. Ζύι/ ύ/χΓι/. 10. ΙΙ/κ>? η/χα?. 20. -4υτο9 ό βασιλεύς, ΟΓ ό βασιλεύς αυτός. 21• Ό εμαυτού* πατήρ, ΟΓ ό πατήρ 6 εμαυτού. 22• Ό πατήρ μου/* ΟΓ /χοΰ ό πατήρ. 23. ίίρο? /xe. 24. ΙΤρο? CfftC• ia 1 When αϊτοί standi .rtiele and noun, or after them se(/J but when 3 | l. W>N. 1 (3). 1 1 17 iod • § 14-1 and Ν L Ε -SON XXIX. Translate into Greek. 1. To me. 2. En 3. From the king himself. 1 4. Near me R Near oa 6. With ua 7. To him. 8. I see the it v. 9. I see the city itself. 2 10. I see my father. 1 11. To us. 12. I see the same man. 13. To 22 GREEK LESSONS. the same war. 14. You yourself. 15. Cyrus himself. 16. Into their tent. 17. Away from his tent. 18. Near his own tent. 4 19. To the same king. 20. With you. 21. From you. 22. Near himself. 1 See Lesson XXVIII. Note 2. 2 § 79, Note 1. 3 Express this in as many different ways as possible. 4 Observe that own is translated by the genitive of the reflexive pronoun ; his or their by the genitive singular or plural of αυτός. LESSON XXX. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, &c, §81.83. Translate into English. 1. Ούτος 1 6 άνηρ, or ο άνηρ ούτος. 2. * Εκείνος 6 άνηρ. 3. "HSe η γνώμη. 4. Αυτός 2 ό Σωκράτης. 5. Ό εμος 3 πατήρ. 6. Ό εμος αδελφό'?. 7. Οι του εμού αδελφού φίλοι. 8. Τω εμω αδελφω πολέμιος, εμοι δε φίλος και πιστός. 9. Κλέαρχος είπε (spoke) τάδε} 10. Κλέ- αρχος είπε ταύτα. 11. Άντ 5 εκείνου. 12. Δια τού- του του πεδίου. 13. Μετά τούτον. 14. Προς ταύτα, 15. Κακίους^ είσί {they are) περί ημάς, η ημείς περί εκεί- νους. 16. * Απ αλλήλων. 17. Ό εμος πατήρ και ό 7 του φίλου. 18. Οί αγαθοί. 19. Ό βασιλεύς αυτός. 8 20. Ό αύτος βασιλεύς. 21. Ό σος φίλος. 22. Ή εμη μητηρ, ΟΓ η μητηρ μου. 1 § 141, Ν. 1 (c), and § 142, 4. 8 § 142. 2 § 79, Note 1. 4 § 148, Note 1. 5 The preposition αντί (Lat. ante) means before, for, instead of 5 § 73, 2. 7 § 141, Note 5. 8 See Lesson XXVIII. Note 2. LESSONS XXXI., XXXII. 23 LESSON XXXI. Translate into Greek. 1. I see this man. 2. I see the king himself. 3. I see the same king. 4. To my brother. 1 δ. With this man. 6. Through that plain. 7. To this city. 8. Into this city. 9. By us. 10. Before you. 11. I see your brother. 12. A brother of yours. 13. My brother and my friend's. 2 14. Before the king himself. 15. I myself. 16. Hostile to my army. 17. From his government, 18. Through the middle of the city. 3 19. Every 4 city. 20. The whole city. 21. The rest 5 of the country. 1 Tran>' in two different wi 1 | 111. XXT. Ν 1 Sa to 3. « Lesson XXI. Note 2. LESSON XXXII. IXTKKKOC.ATIYK PBONOUH8, fca, §84-8β. Translate into English• 1. Επί την εαυτού σκηνην. 2. Ανθρωπος 1 τις. 3. Ανδρες τίνες. 2 4. Τ Ives άνθρωπου; 5. ΠοΧΧα καΐ άηαθα εν ttj οικία μου εχω (/ Itucc). 0. Την ημετεραν ποΧιν. 7. Οι εμοι παι8ες. 3 8. Παίδες εμοί. 9. Παις τις. 10. Ανηρ ον πάντες φιΧούσι (luVe\ 11. Τι προς έμε Χέζεις ; (Do 1/OU say ?) VI. Οι στρατιωται ούτοι. 13. Τρόπω τινί. 1-4. Έή> ου. Ιο. Οι άμφΐ βασιλέα. 16. Μέχρι κώμης τινός. 17. Ταύτης ουν της ημέρας τούτο το τεΧος εγενετο (<Υ7/ν). 18. Οι αΧΧοι στρατηγοί. 19. Γα υπέρ του Χόφου. 20. Ό παΙς ος Χεγει (sjica/cs). 24 GREEK LESSONS. 21. Πας Τ6?. 4 22. Ol συν τω βασίΚβί, 23. Μβ'ση η χωρά, 6 ΟΓ η χώρα μβ'ση. 24. Ή μβστ; χώρα. 25. Άφίπ- TreveL {lie rides) €ττϊ την βαντού σκηνην δ*α τοί> Μβνωνος στρατβνματος συν oXiyois τοϊς ire pi αυτόν. 1 For the accent see § 28, 2. * Everybody. 2 See § 28, 3. 5 See Lesson XIV. Note 3. 8 See Lesson XXX. Note 3. LESSON XXXIII. Translate into Greek• 1. I see a certain soldier. 2. What soldiers do I see ? 3. I see my soldiers. 4. I see my own * army. 5. A cer- tain city. 6. Those in the city. 7. Those soldiers. 8. Those things 2 in the city. 9. Everybody. 10. To his own tent. 11. What men do I see? 12. With certain men. 13. Into a certain city. 14. Under whom ? 15. By whom. 16. I see the same man. 17. To the man himself. 18. Before the king himself. 19. With us. 20. To me. 21. With -my father. 3 22. By these men. 3 23. With those slaves. 24. Under the good king. 25. With his soldiers. 1 See Lesson XXIX. Note 4. * Use the article. 1 Express this in two different ways. LESSONS XXXIV., XXXV. 25 VERBS. LESSOX XXXIV. IHTRODU C Τ I Ο X, § S3-95, and § 96. Translate Into English. 1. Κύρος πέμπει 1 τον ayyeXov. 2. Βασιλεύω, βασι- λεύσω. 3. Λύει αυτόν. 4. ΙΙεμπουσι Κΰρον. 5. Οί όπλιται Οπλα εχουσι. 6. Μη" λύε αύτον, ω στρατιώτα. 7. Οι νεανίαι την των πολιτών αρετην Οαυμαζουσιν. 8 # Κα\ πεμπουσιν αυτόν. 9. Οι πολΐται πιστεύσουσιν. 10. Παις 3 την επιστολην πέμψει. 11. Κύρος θηρία θηρευσει. 12. θαυμαζομεν ου αυτόν. 13. Θηρεύομεν TovXaya)v. i 14. Βουλεύω, βουλεύσω. 15. Πιστευομεν, πιστεύσω. 16• Jfi| φε^ε, ω στρατιωτα. 17. Το ι/ βασιλέα βουλευομεν. L8. Ot πολιται τους παιΒας παι- δευσιν. 19. θηρεύσετε. 1 Fo » See§ 25, 3, Not LESSON XXXV. ACTIVE VOICE, § 96 and § 1 Tr:m*l:it•• into I n-lish. 1. Λυω, λύσω, έλυομ. 2. Γράφω, ypayp -ω, Ζγραφον. 3. Λέγω, λε£ω, eXeyov. 4. Οί πολιται εις νεως εφευγον. 5. Κύρος αυτόν έπεμψε. Ι τΛνσε αι/τ' εκείνου. 7. Ot ΕΧΧηνες επεμπον κήρυκας. 8. Έβουλεύσαμεν. 9. "Ελυσε, ελυσατε, ελυσας. 10. Πλοία ουκ εχομεν. 11. Μ?) 2 λέγετε. 12. Τισσαφέρνης Βιαβαλλει τον 3 Κύρον προς τον άέεΧφόν. 13. διττοί/ άποπεμπεμπει πάλιν επί 26 GREEK LESSONS. την αρχήν. 14. Λνωμβν. 5 15. Ανσωμβν.® 16. Οι Εκ. Χηνβς ττίμιτονσι κήρυκας. 17. Ερχωμβν €ΐς την ττοΧιν. 1 In parsing the verb, the pupil should be required not only to give the principal parts (§ 92), and the synopsis and inflection of the tense, but to distinguish the stem (§ 94), the connecting vowel (§ 112), and the personal ending: thus, λύω is a verb of the 1st class (§ 108), simple stem, λν-; principal parts λύω, λύσω, ίλνσα, λελνκα, λελνμαι, ελύθην : present tense, indicative, active : synopsis, λύω, λύω, λύοιμι, λνε, λύειν, λύων: present tense; inflection λνω, λύει?, λύει, λύετον, λύετον ; λνομεν, λύετε, λύονσι : formation, λν simple stem, ω connect- ing vowel (§ 114), no personal ending (§ 112, and Note) : singular number, first person, agreeing with the pronoun εγώ understood (§ 134, Note 1) : Rule, Λ verb agrees with its subject nominative in number and person. 2 The use of μη shows that λέγετε is in the imperative. The indica- tive you do not speak would be expressed by ου λέγετε. For the use of ov and μη, see § 283, 1, 2. 3 § 141, Note 1 (α). 5 See § 253. * § 141, Note 2. β § 202 and 1. LESSON XXXVI. Translate into Greek. ί . They are loosing him. 2. I write. I was writing. I will write. 3. I was loosing. I loosed. I have loosed. ■*&• 4. To loose. To have loosed. 5. You two are speaking. 1 6. Do not loose 2 him. 7. You do not loose him. 3 8. Let us loose him. 9. Let us go into the city. 10. Let us go 4 to the sea. 11. Cyrus sends him to his government. 12. Let us rule instead of him. 13. The boy writes the letter. 14. The Greeks send soldiers. 15. Clearchus sends forty vessels. 1 Use the dual. 2 § 254. 8 Observe carefully the distinction between ov and μη. See § 2S3. 4 § 253. LESSONS XXX VII., XXXVIII. 27 LESSON XXXVII. MIDDLE VOICE, § 96 and § 199. Translate into English. 1. Λύομαι, Χυσομαι^ εΧυσάμην, ΧεΧυμαί. 2. Λυεσθαι,, Χυσεσθαι, Χυσασθαι, ΧεΧυσθαι. ο. Λυόμενος, Χυσομενος, Χυσάμενος, ΧεΧυμενος. 4. Λυώμεθα, Χυσώμεθα. 5. Λύ - eraL, Χυονται, εΧυετο. 2 C. Τον πόΧεμον επαύσατε. 7. -Κ5- ρον μεταπεμπεται 3 άπο της αρχής* 8. Λαμβάνει άνδρας ΠεΧοποννησιους otl a πΧείστους καΐ βεΧτιστους. 9. Ουκ αισχυνεσθε ούτε θεούς ουτ ανθρώπους. 10. Ερχεται, προς τον° Κύρον. 11. ΈπΙ την ημετεραν χωράν έρχεσθε. 1-!. Λέγει αύτω. Ιο. * Αηουσιν αυτόν πάρα τον ΚΧεαρ- χον, και φράζουσιν α Χεγει. II. Ο Χυων^ ό Χυσων. 15- Ο ΧεΧυκως. 1ΰ. ΟΙ Χυοντες. 1 Λι•σ-, • .... end! 1 1 1 rmation of tl. • 01 ween the active and middle oft: . The force of peril • Β • §111, Note 1 (a). • § 27G, 2. LESSON XXXVIII. Translate nto Greek. 1. I sends Clearchra 2. Let as loose him. 3. The Athenians deliberated 3 in regard to the war. 4. Il•* sends for Cyrus from his government 5. They lead him to Clearchus. 6. 1I<- s rus. 7. And he speaks to 28 GREEK LESSONS. him. 8. He stops the war. 9. Let us send about 2 five hundred soldiers. 10. Let us consult together. 11. Cyrus writes a letter, and sends it 3 to Clearchus. 12. The boy sends three talents. 13. Cyrus sends for forty talents. 14. Are you not going into the city ? 4 15. I see him who looses. 1 Use the middle voice. 2 See Lesson XX VI. Note 3. 3 The pronoun, when not emphatic and readily understood from the context, is usually omitted. 4 In interrogative sentences ov expects an affirmative answer, μη a negative answer. See § 282, 2. LESSON XXXIX. PASSIVE VOICE, § 96 and § 196. Translate into English• 1. Αυεται, Χυονται. 2. 'ΕΧυετο* εΧυοντο. 3. EXv- θην, εΧυθησαν. 4. Αυθεις. 5. Ό Χυθείς. 2 6. ΑεΧυ- μενος, ο ΧεΧυ μένος, οι ΧεΧυμενοι. 7. ΈπΙ τον άδεΧφον Αρταξερξην εστρατευετο. 8. 5υ 3 Χεγεις. 9. ΠΧοϊα ημείς ουκ εχομεν. 10. Απόπεμπε ημάς. 11. ΑΧΧο στράτευμα αύτω συνεΧε<γετο εν Χερρονησω. 12. Κύρος επαιΒευετο συν τοΐς αΧΧοις παισιν. 13. Αυεται υπο των ποΧιτων. 14. Πάντες yap ol των άριστων Περσών παί- δες επί ταΐς βασιΧεως θύραις παιδεύονται. 15. 2υν τω Χυθεντι, συν τοΐς Χυθεΐσιν. 1 G-ive the formation. 2 Translate Tie who was loosed. § 276, 2. 4 § 197, 1. 8 § 134, 2 f Note 1. 5 In company with. LESSOXS XL., XLI. 29 LESSON XL. Translate into Greek. 1. He is loosed. 2. They were loosed. 3. They are sent, 4. He will be loosed. 5. Let us be loosed He wrote three letters to Cyrus. 7. They sent for me, 8. They have no vessels. 1 9. He is taught by Cyras. 1Ό. He sends one vessel. 11. He speaks. 12, We have forty vessels. 13. He sent for til• 'things. 2 14. We¥ taught. 15. I have been taught. 1(3. I am taught. 17. I was taught. 18. Ι ΘΘ6 him who was loosed. 19. lie was 3 in company with those men 4 who were loosed. 1 Have not vessels. 8 ην. BOO XXVIII. * Use the masc. article. LESSON XLI. muti; VF.KBS. Translate Into English. 1. Ταύτα ye'y ραφα. 2. Αίπε. 3. Τίωμεν. 4. '.Ελε- yero. 5. Αίπωμεν. 6. ΛεΧοιπα. 7. ΛεΧοιπατε. 8. Ό παϊς τα. Τι ποιησομεν ; 1(>. Δια μέσου τού παρα- δείσου ρει 6 Μαίανδρος ποταμός. 17. Ρει και ουτο< της πόλεως. 18. Δηλώμεν. 19. Δηλούσιν. 20. Άξι- ούν. 21. ' Αξιούμεν. 22. Ήξίου. 23. &. απιεναι. 2. Οι στραηωται άπη- εσαν. 3. Συν νμίν el μι. 1 4. ^ Ι ω μεν επί τον βασιλέα. 5. Ουδείς 2 άπτ]ει προς βασιλέα. 0. Δοκει τ\μιν απιεναι ή$η. 7. *Απιθι ηόη. 8. Προβαλλόμενοι τα όπλα επτ^ 40 GREEK LESSONS. €σαν. 9. Ταύτην την χωράν επέτρεψε Ζιαριτάσαι ζ τοις f ΕΧλησιν, ώ? 4 ποΧεμίαν ουσαν? 10. ^Ύττωτττευον ηδη εττο βασιΚεα ιεναι. 11. Ήσαν, φεσαν, εστίν, εισιν, είναι, * ' 6 Levat. 1 See § 200, Note 3. * § 277, Note 2. 2 See § 77, Note 2. 5 § 277, 2. 8 §265. 6 The stem? LESSON LVIII. Translate into Greek. 1. Let us go. 2. I will go in company with you. 3. Let us go into the city. 4. The soldiers went to the king. 5. Already it seemed expedient to depart. 6. Let us go into the presence of the king. 7. They went against the king. 8. He was wise. 9. I was going. 10. We were wise. 11. We were going. 12. The men went into the city. 13. The soldier is brave. 14. The brave soldier went into the presence of the king. LESSON LIX. THE VERBS Ιημι, φημ,ί, Κ€Ϊμαι, § 129, III. IV. V. Translate into English. 1. f Ιησι το Bopv. 2. ΑΧλος το δόρυ ϊησιν. 3. *Ίετο ι εττί τον βασιλέα. 4. *Ιασιν, Ιεσαν, εισίν, εστίν, είσιν. 5. Αυτός ουκ εφη ιεναι. 6. ΑΧλ 2 εγώ 3 φημι ταύτα φΧυαρίας είναι. 7. Μισθωθηναι ουκ εττΐ τούτω εφασαν. 8. Καί κραυγή ttoWtj ετΓΤ)εσαν. 9. r Ιετο εττ αυτόν, 10. ΦησΙν* LESSONS LX., LXI. 41 ό Ιατρός. 11. Κύρος αυτός απέθανε^ κα\ οκτώ οι άριστοι \ > ν ν ι > > « ΤΟ '17» ' ό Ν των περί αυτόν εκειντο επ αυτω. ΙΔ. &ν τούτω Kay βασιΚευς δ^λο? 6 ην προσιων πα\ιν, ως εδοκει, όπισθεν. 13. 01 άριστοι των ανδρών αποθανόντες εκειντο ' επι 1 "Ιτ7/ζι in the mid. means to throw one's self, to hasten, to rush. 1 § 24, 3. ' s< 28, Note 1. 6 ! 280, Note 1. 3 { 28, 1. δ During thus time. 1 The stem? LESSON LX. Translate into XD PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE ju-FORM, §130. Translate into Kn^Ii-h. 1 C IT» 5 * fi f ' Ο XT'* v 1 Ο 'IT» v Ι. ϊ^στασιν. εστωμεν* εστως. 1. Κυ ιστέ. ο. &ηω υμάς ει&ως 8ι8άξω. 4. Και είδε τας σκηνας, ου οι ΚιΧικε* 42 GREEK LESSONS. εφυΧαττον. 5. ' ϋιΒεσαν? rjaav, ϊσασιν, ιασιν, εισιν, ιασιν. Ο. Ισί/^ 6c/^ ^σέ/^ £€£., ειοεναι, ιεναι, είναι, είναι. 7. ΈπεΙ Be elBov αυτόν οϊπερ πρόσθεν προσεκύνουν 3 καί τότε προσεκυνησαν 3 καίπερ εΙΒότες οτι επι θανάτω αγοιτοϊ 8. *Ρίψαντες yap τους πορφυρούς κανΒυς, οπού ετυ-χεν έκαστος εστηκως^ ίεντο, ωσπερ αν Βράμοι^ τις 1 περί νίκης f κα\ μαΧα κατά πρανούς γηΧοφου, έχοντες τούτους τβ τους ποΧυτεΧεϊς χιτώνας, καί τ ας ποικίΧας άναξυρίΒας* 9. Και πρώτον εΒακρυε ποΧυν χρόνον εστως. 1 § 200, Note 6. δ § 279, 2. 2 § 3, and fine print e § 224, and § 226, 2. 3 § 200, Note 5. 7 § 28, 3. * § 243. 8 For victory, i. e. for a prize at the games. SYNTAX. LESSON LXII. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE, § 133 - 137. Translate into English. 1. c O άνηρ ηΧθεν. 2. Αεγουσι τους ανΒρας άπεΧθεΐν. 3. ΕβουΧετο τω παϊΒε άμφοτερω παρεΐναι. 4. Κΰρον μεταπεμπεται απο της 1 αρχής, ης αυτόν σατράπην εποί- ησε. 5. Κατέστη εις την βασιΧειαν Αρταξέρξης, 6. Την ΕΧΧηνικην Βυναμιν ηθροιζεν. 7. Αεγουσιν, κηρύσσει, νει. 8. Αεί ημάς άπεΧθεΐν. 9. Οι ανΒρες Χεγουσιν. 10. ' Ημεΐς Χεγομεν. 11. Χοφοϊ εγω καί συ ημεν. 12. Ταύτα εγενετο. 13. 'Εστί 3 μεγαΧου βασιΧεως βασίΧεια? 14. Ούτος 8 εστί βασιΧεύς, 15. Αεηουσι τούτον γενέσθαι βασΐΧεα. 16. 'Ο πατήρ βουΧεται είναι LESSONS LXIII., LXIV. 43 σοφός} 17. Κλέαρχος Λακεδαιμόνιος φνγας ην. 18. Κύ- ρος άττεκτεινεν avhpa Περσην, Μεγαφε'ρνην, φοινικιστην βασιλέων. 1 | 141, Xote 2. 8 Account for the accent. ■ I 166. 4 ! 138, Note 8. LESSON LXIII. SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES, § 138. Tr;m»l:it«' Into English. 1. Οίνος <γ\νκνς εστίν. 2. Δια της φίλιας χωράς. 3. 'Ο νεανίας είχε ταχύν Ίπττον. 4. Είχον τταντες κράνη χαλκά. 5. Δια μέσης της πόλεως 1 ρεΐ ποταμός. G. Ο άνηρ αναθός εστίν. 7. Ό Κύρος υπολαβων τους φενγον- τ ας, συλλεξας στράτευμα, επολιόρκει Μίλητον καΐ κατά yyjv και κατά θαλατταν~ και tirciparo καταγειν τους εκπεπτωκο- τας. 8. Πρώτος Κλέαρχος τους αυτού στρατιωτας εβια- ζετο Ιεναι. 1 9., Ούτοι ύστεροι 1 άφίκοντο. 10. Έβούλετο τω παιδε αμφοτβρω παρεϊναι. 11. Καλείται αγα#ο?. 1 2. Αναβαίνει ούν 6 Κύρος λαβών Τισσαφερνην ως φιλον. 13. Διώκω μεν τα καλά. 14. Καίτοι εχω ye αυτών και τέκνα και γυναίκας εν Τραλλεσι φρουρουμενα. 1 Account for the accent 3 Bee § 37, 2, Not LESSON LXIV. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, §140-143. Tranelate into English. 1. Ούτος 6 ανηρ. 2. Περί της ημετέρας πόλεως. 3. Ό Κύρος Βιδωσιν αυτω εις τετρακόσιους και εξ μηνών 44 GREEK LESSONS. μισθόν. 4. Γα της πόλεως. 5. Τα εμά. 6. Οί εν αστει. 7. Οί συν τω βασιλεΐ. 8. Οί τότβ άνθρωποι. 9. Χω- κρατης 6 Αχαιός. 10. Ο εμος πατήρ καΐ 6 του φίλου.. 11. Ό σοφός άνηρ. 12. Άνηρ 6 σοφός. 13. Ό άνηρ 6 σοφός. 14. 'Εντεύθεν 1 Κύρος την Κιλισσαν είς την Κιλικιαν αποπέμπει την ταχιστην όδον. 15. ΚαΙ αύτη αυ άλλη πρόφασις ην αύτω 2 του άθροίζειν στράτευμα. 16. Ψιλή ην απασα η χωρά. 17. Ήν η πάροδος στενή. Ιο. Αλλ εστίν ημιν, ω ανορες, η αρχή η πατρώα. 19. "Ωιετο ταύττ) ttj ήμερα μαχεΐσθαι βασιλέα. 20. Έν τω καιρώ τούτω Κλέαρχος ηρετο τον Κΰρον. 21. Εενιας μεν δη τους εκ των πόλεων λαβών παρεγενετο εις Χαρδεις. 22. Είχε δε το μεν Βεξιον Μένων και οί συν αυτω, το δ' ευωνυμον Κλέαρχος και οι εκείνου, το 8ε μέσον οι άλλοι στρατηγοί. 23. Λέγεται καΐ τους άλλους Πέρσας ψιλαΐς ταΐς κεφαλαϊς εν τω πολεμώ ΒιακινΒυνενειν. 24. Ταύτα ειπών, εις την εαυτού 4 " χωράν απηλαυνε. 25. Τους μεϊ αυτών άπεκτεινε, τους δ' εξεβαλεν. 1 § 61. 3 § 28, Note 1. 3 § 184, 4. * § 142, 4, Note 3. LESSON LXV. Translate into Greek• 1. Cyras marches through the friendly country. 2. Clear- chus speaks first. 3. He receives those who are fleeing. 4. The man is wise. 5. The wise man. 6. Those with the king. 7. Those in the city. 8. I see that man. 9. Before the king himself. 10. Into the large city. 11. He is called good. 12. Cyrus gave pay for six months. 13. I LESSON XL VI. 45 see our city. 14. You have my property. 15. A river Hows through the middle of the city. 16. He despatched Clearchus by the shortest road into Cilicia. 17. The road is narrow. IS. You and I are wise. 19. The men speak. 20. These things happened 21. ΛΥβ speak. 22. This man is king. 23. This meat is delicious. 24. There are many wild animals. 25. There are many prosperous cities. 26. The prizes were golden hV pers. 27. The wine is sweet. 28. The park is full of wild animals. 29. This I is steep. 30. The road is exceedingly steep. 31. is reviewed his army in the plain. 32. They went as as they could LESSON LXVI. SYNTAX OF PBONOUN8, §144-150. Tran*l;it«• into Kngligh. 1. Εντεύθεν εξεΧαυνει σταθμούς τρεις. 2. 'Ενταύθα Χέζεται ΑπόΧΧων 2 εκοεΐραι^ Μαρσύαν, νικησας ερίζοντά' 1 οι περί σοφίας. ο. Κύρος Be αυτός τ€ απίθανε, καί οκτώ οι αρίστου των περί αυτόν εκειντο επ αύτω. 4. Αυτόν σατραττην εποιησε. 4 Ο. Τισσαφέρνης, προαισθόμενος τα αυτά ταύτα (τινας) βουΧευο μένους , τους μεν αυτών άπε- κτεινε* τους δ εξεβαΧεν. 0. Καί ούτος οη, ον ωετο ττιστον ol° είναι, ταχύ αυτόν εύρε Κυρω φιΧαίτερον η εαυ- τω. 7. Τα εν μέσω τούτων πάντα σατραπευουσιν οί τού εμού αοεΧφού φιΧοι. 8. Ην ημείς νικήσω μεν, ημάς Βε2 τους ημέτερους φιΧους τούτων ε Γ /κρατεϊς ποιήσαι. 9. Καί Χε^ει ταδβ. Κ). Τίνας ανΒρας ε'ώον ; 11. Λεηουσί τίνες. 12. Κύρον μεταπεμπεται απο της αρχής, ης αύτον σατρά- 46 GREEK LESSONS. πην εποίησε. 13. ' Ελαβεν α εβονλετο. 14. Έ /c των πόλεων, ων Τισσαφέρνης ετνηγανεν έχων. 6 1 § 120, 2.• 4 § 166. 2 § 48, Note. 6 § 185. 8 Account for the accent. β § 279, 2. LESSON LXVII. Translate into Greek• 1. Cyrus spoke as follows. 2. Thus Clearchus spoke. 3. Let us go into the city. 4. The king appointed him commander. 5. He does these things. 6. Certain men speak. 7. What men are speaking ? 8. My brother speaks. 9. Let us go into the city which Cyrus has. 10. Let us conquer the army which the king has. 11. Cyrus himself spoke. 12. Let us go to the king himself. 13. Let us ap- point Cyrus commander. 14. What does he wish ? 15. He banished those who were plotting these things. 16. They sent for me. 17. I will send for Cyrus from the govern- ment of which I made him satrap. 18. I admire him. 19. He plotted these same things. CASES. LESSON LXVIII. NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE, § 157. Translate into [English. 1. Αναβαίνει ovv 6 Κΰρος λαβών Τισσαφερνην ώ? φίλον. 2. ΕπειΒη δβ ετελευτησε Δαρείος, και κατέστη LESSON LXIX. 47 εις την βασιΧειαν 'Αρταξέρξης, Τισσαφέρνης διαβαΧΧει τον Κύρον προς τον αδεΧφόν. 3. ΚΧεαρχος Λακεδαιμό- νιος φυγά? ην. 4. Ή άνδρες r ΕΧΧηνες. Ο. Και μην, ω Κύρε, Χεγουσι τίνες, οτι ποΧΧα ύπισχνι) νυν, δια το εν τοιούτω είναι 1 του κινδύνου προσ ιόντος/ 6. Μετά ταύτα, εφη, ω Όρόντα, εστίν οτι σε ηδίκησα ; 7. ΚΧεαρχε καΐ Πρόξενε, κα\ ol αΧΧοι οι παρόντες 3 "ΕΧΧηνες, ουκ ϊστε* οτι ποιείτε. 1 | 141, Note 6. * s | 129, Ι. 1 §129, II. 130, 2, LESSON LXIX. Λ - -166. Tr:m*I;itr into l.n^IUh. 1. Την 'ΕΧΧηνικην δυναμιν ηθροιζεν. 2. Ταύτα ποι~ ούμεν. ο. Γράφει την επιστοΧην. 4. Μάχην εμάχοντο. 5. Πρώτον yap ετι παις ων, 1 οτε επαιδεύετο και συν τω αδεΧφω και συν τοις αΧΧοις παισ\, πάντων πάντα κράτιστος ενομίζετο. C. Δια μέσης της πόΧεως ρεΐ ποταμός, Κυδνος όνομα, εύρος δύο"πΧεθρων. 7. Εντεύθεν Κύρος την Κι- Χισσαν εις την ΚιΧικιαν αποπέμπει την ταχιστην όδον. 8. ΑΧΧο στράτευμα αυτω συνεΧεγετο εν Χερρονησω ττ) καταντιπερας Αβύδου τονδε τον τρόπον. 9. 'Ενταύθα έμεινε τρεις ημέρας. 10. ΕξεΧαύνει δια Φρυγίας σταθμον ενα, παρασάγγας οκτώ. 11. Ν η Δι , εφη 6 Κύρος. VI. Κύρον αΐτει πΧοια. 13. Αυτόν σατράπην εποίησε. 14. Και στρατηηον αύτον απέδειξε. | 129, Ι. 1. 48 GBEEK LESSONS. LESSON LXX. Translate into Greet. 1. Tissaphernes accuses Cyrus to 1 his brother. 2. He was an exile. 3. He made the levy in the following man- ner. 4. Ο Cyrus, you do not know what you are doing. 5. He did these things. 6. Cyrus remained here thirty days. 7. Cyrus made a review of the Greeks in the park. 8. First- he reviewed the Barbarians. 9. Here Cyrus and his army remained twenty days. 10. Through the middle of the city runs a river called the Cydnus, the breadth of which is two plethra. 11. They asked Cyrus for their pay. 12. When Cyrus had entered 2 the city, he sent for the gen- eral to come to him. 3 13. Cyrus appointed him com- mander. 14. Yes, by Jupiter, he will fight. 1 Use the preposition. 3 To come to him, προς εαυτόν. 2 Use the aorist. LESSON LXXI. GENITIVE, §167-171. Translate into English. 1. Έστι και μεγάλου βασιλέως βασίλεια. 2. Ό φό- βος των 'πολεμίων. 1 3. Έξετασιν ποιείται εν τω πεΒιω των * Ελλήνων και των βαρβάρων. 4. Τούτον το εύρος &υο πλεθρα. 5. Και μην, ω Κύρε, λεγουσι τίνες, οτι ττοΧλα νττισγνΎ}" νυν, $ιά το ev τοιουτω είναι του κίνδυνου ττροσιόντος. 6. 'Εστί 3 και μεγάλου βασιλέως βασίλεια εν Κελαιναις ερυμνα, επί ταΐς ττηγαις του Μαρσυου ποτα- μού. /. Και των 'Ελλήνων ε-χων οττλιτας ανεβη τρια- κόσιους. 8. Ευθύς έλαβε τα τταλτα εις τας χείρας, καυ LESSON LXXII. 49 συν τοις τταροΰσι* των ττιστών ηκεν εΧαυνων εις το μέσον. 9. Kai ήσαν αι ' Ιωνικοί ττόΧεις Τισσαφέρνους το άρ- χαιον, 5 εκ 6 βασιΧεως ΒεΒομέναι. 10. Διφθέρας, ας είχον στεηάσματα^ εττίμττΧασαν χορτού κουφού, είτα συνηηον και συνέσττων, ώ? 8 μη ατττεσθαι της κάρφης το υΒωρ. 11. Μετά ταύτα, κεΧεύοντος Κύρου, 9 εΧαβον της ζώνης τον Όρόντην εττϊ θανάτω. 12. Δαρείου και ΠαρυσατιΒος yiyvovTat τταιΒες Βυο. 1 Translate this as subjective and objective genitive. * See Catalogue < Ύπισχνέομαι. β § 197, Note 1. 1 Account for the accent T § 137, Note 4. 1 129, 1. 8 | - to 1. L60, 2. 9 J I LESSON LXXII. GENITIVE (oontfaned), § 172-183. Translate into Kn^llsli. 1. Ταύτα Χε^ων, θορύβου ηκουσε 1 Βια των τάξεων ιόν- τος. 2. Και των τταρ' έαυτω 1 βαρβάρων εττεμεΧεΐτο. 3« ΒασιΧευς ττ}? ττρος εαυτόν 2 εττιβουΧης ουκ γσθάνετο. 4. ΟυΒεν 3 ηχθετο αυτών ττοΧε μουντών. 5. Προς βασιΧεα ττεμττων ήζιου, αΒεΧφος ων αυτού, Βοθήναί* οι ταύτας τας ττοΧεις μαΧΧον η Τισσαφερνην άρχειν αυτών. G. Ω άν- δρες ΕΧΧηνες* ουκ ανθρωττων αττορών βάρβαρων συμμα* '\ους υμάς αγω, αΧΧα νο μιζών αμεινονας και κρειττους ττοΧΧών βάρβαρων υμάς είναι , Βια τούτο ττροσέΧαβον. ι . Ενταύθα Βιεσχον αΧΧηΧων βασιΧευς τ€ και οι ' ΕΧ- Χηνες ως τριάκοντα σταΒια. 8. Εττει Βε ταχθείς, ως εφη αυτός, υττο τού εμού αΒεΧφού, ούτος εττοΧεμησεν εμοι, έχων 4. 50 GREEK LESSONS. την εν Χαρδεσιν ακροποΧιν, /ecu εγω αυτόν προσποΧεμώρ εποιησα 6 ώστε δόξαι τούτω τον προς εμε ποΧεμου παυ- σασθαι. 9. Κρειττων εστί* τούτων. 10. Ό πατήρ μεί- ζων εστίν η 6 υΙος. 11. *Τπερεφανησαν του Χοφου. 12. Ό δούΧος πέντε μνών τιμάται. 13. ΒασιΧευς ου μαγειται δέκα ήμερων. 14. Κύρος yap έπεμπε βίκους οίνου ημιδεεΐς ποΧΧακις, οπότε πάνυ ηδυν Χαβοι, Χεγων, οτι ούπω δη ποΧΧοΰ χρόνου τούτου ηδιονι οινω επιτυγοι. 15. ' * Ενταύθα Κυρω βασιΧεια ην και παράδεισος μέγας άγριων θηρίων πΧηρης. 16. Ταύτης ένεκα της παρόδου Κύρος τας ναύς μετεπεμψατο, όπως οπΧίτας άποβιβασειεν εισω καϊ εξω των πυΧών. 17. Εμάγρντο αξιως Χογου. ] 8. 'Τμων δε ανδρών όντων, καϊ εύτοΧμων γενομένων, εγω υμών τον μεν οϊκαδε 1 βουΧομενον* άπιεναι τοις οίκοι ζηΧω- τον ποιήσω άπεΧθεΐν. 19. Ειποντος του Οροντου, οτι ούδεν Β αδικηθείς, ηρωτησεν 6 Κύρος αυτόν. 1 § 104. 4 Account for the accent 2 § 142. δ § 175. 8 § 160, 2. β I caused it to seem good to Mm to cease from the war against me. See § 266, 1. — δόξαι, see § 259 (end). 7 § 61. 8 § 139. LESSON LXXIII. Translate into Greek• 1. There is a palace of the great king in the park 2. Cyrus makes a review of the Greeks and Barbarians. 3. The city belongs to Tissaphernes, having been given by the king. 4. There is a palace of the great king (situated) near the source of the river 1 Marsyas. 5. Cyrus sende LESSON LXXIV. 51 away some 2 of the Greeks. 6. After these things, at the command of Cyrus, 3 they took Orontes by the girdle. 7. Of Darius and Parysatis were born two sons, the elder Artaxerxes, and the younger Cyrus. 8. He hears the noise. 9. He thought that he was worthy to rule the cities. 10. The Greeks were braver than the Barbarians. 11. These things happened on that day. 12. The army proceeded three days' march. 13. Hero Cyrus and the army remained twenty days. 14 When we 3 were present, Cyrus spoke. 1 | 168 and 142,2, ■ §183 and 277. ■ j 170. LESSOR LXXIV. DATIVE, §184-187. Tranftlate into Kiigllth* 1 Διΰωσι μισθον τω στρατβνματι. 2. ΤοΙς νόμοις 7Γ€ίθ€ται. 3. Ούτος Κυρω βιπεν. 4. Τοις στρατιωταις ωφβιΧ€το μισθός. 5. Επ^ι rrj ηΧικία €πρβπ€, και φιΧο- θηροτατος ην, και προς τα θηρία μβ'ντοι φιΧοκιν&υνότατος. G. Επ€ΐ δ eSoK€i αυτω 7)&η πορευ^σθαι ανω, την προ- φασιν €7Toi€lto, ώς ΠισίΒας βουΧομβνος €κβάλ€ΐν ι παντά- ιτασιν etc της 'χωράς. 7. Παρυσατις 8η η μητηρ νττήρχβ τω Κι/ρω, φιΧουσα αυτόν μαΧΧον" η τον βασιλεύοντα Αρταξερξην. 8. Και αυτή αυ αΧΧη πρόφασις ην αυτω του αθροιζειν 3 στράτευμα. 0. TlyveTai τούτο βμοι βου- \ομ€νω. 10. Πάρα βασιΧβως ποΧΧοΙ προς Κύρον άπηΧ- θον, €π€ΐοη ποΧ^μιοι αΧΧηΧοις eyevovTO. 11. 'Ενταύθα XeyeTai ΑπόΧΧων* €K8eipai b Μαρσύαν, νικησας ίριζοντά 52 GREEK LESSONS. οι irepi σοφίας, και το 8βρμα κρβμασαι ev τω αντρω, οθβν αϊ τττ)ηαι. 12. Και ούτος 8η, ον ωβτο πιστό ν οι elvai, ταγυ^ αυτόν evpe Κυρω φιΧαιτερον η ίαυτω. 13. Κύρος yap έπεμπε βίκους οίνου ημι8εεϊς ποΧΧακις, οπότε πάνυ ήδυν Χάβοι, Χεγων, οτι ουπω 8η ποΧΧού χρόνου τούτου η8ίονι οινω επιτυχρι. 1 § 202. 4 § 48, Note. 2 § 75, Note 2. δ § 203. 3 § 141, Note 6. β § 72. LESSON LXXV. DATIVE (continued), § 188 - 190. Translate into English. 1. Φοβω απήΧθον. 2. To yap πλήθος (εστϊ) ποΧυ, και κραυγή ποΧΧτ) επιασιν. 3. Ακοντίζει τις 1 αυτόν παΧτω ύπο τον οφθαΧμον βιαίως. 2 4. *Τμϊν, ως μόνοις πειθομενοις, πιστοτατοις χρησεται και €ΐς φρούρια κα\ Χοχαγίας. 5. ΠοΧις αυτόθι ωκεΐτο μ€<γάλη καΐ ευ8αίμων, Θάψακος ονόματι. 6. To ττ) επιμεΧεια π€ρΐ€ΐναι των φί- Χων και τω προθυμεΐσθαι χαριζεσθαι, ταύτα εμοιγε μαΧΧον 8οκεΐ αγαστά είναι. 7. Ήνίκα 8ειΧη έγιγνετο, εφάνη κο- νιορτος, ωσπερ νεφεΧη Χευκη • χρονω 8e συχνω ύστερον ωσπερ μεΧανία τις ev τω πε8ίω επι ποΧυ. 8. Ενόμιζεν, οσω θαττον εΧθοι, τοσουτω^ απαρασκευαστοτερω βασιΧεΐ μαχεϊσθαι. 9. Πανθ^ ημϊν πεποιηται. 10. Ταύτα ημϊν ποιητεον εστίν. 11. Ποταμός 8 ει μεν τις και αΧΧος αρα ημϊν βστι 8ιαβατεος, ουκ ol8a. 12. Εγω yap οκνοι- ην αν εις τα πΧοια βμβαινβιν α ημϊν δο/?;, 6 αη ημάς αύ- LESSON LXXVI. 53 ταϊς ταϊς τρυφεσι καταΒνση. 13. Ty νστβραια ηκβν ayyeXos. 14. "Ωίβτο 1 yap τανττ) rfj ΐ]μερα μαγάσθαι βασιλέα. 28, 3. 6 § 12 and 17. 1 | 74. _. 4. * To a great extent. τ § 3. 4 § 188, 2. LESSON LXXVI. Translate Into Greek• 1. I tin* army. 2. They speak to Cyrus. 3. When it set to him to march up, he made this pretext. 4. He had 1 this pretext for raising 1 an army. 5. Many I from the king after they be- Ile found him more faithful s than to himself 7. They advanced with a loud shout 8, Here Cyrus had a palace. 9. They hit him with a dart. 10. They cast stones at him. 11. We must do these things. 12. We must cross the river. 13. The king will fight on the following day. 14. They came on the following day. 15. Those hostile to the king came on that day. 16. lie speaks to the soldiers, and they advance with a great shout. 17. We see with our eyes. 18. The soldiers advance on the run. 19. Th• a large and rich city named Thapsacus. 1 § 184, 4. l Dae the infinitive with the article, τον άθροίζ*™ 54 GREEK LESSONS. SYNTAX OF THE VERB. LESSON LXXVII. VOICES, §195-199. Translate into English* 1. Ό πατήρ φιλει τον παιΒα. 2. Ούτος εστί σοφός. 3. Ό Βε βασιλεύς ταυττ) ουκ ήγεν. 4. 'Εντεύθεν εξε- Χαυνει σταθμούς τρεις. 5. Ό παις ύπο του πατρός φιλεϊται. 6. Περιερρεϊτο αυτή ύπο του Μάσκα κύκλω. 7. *Ώστε εγωγε, εξ ων ακούω* ούΒένα κρίνω ύπο πλειό- νων 2 πεφιλήσθαι ούτε * Ελλήνων ούτε βαρβάρων. 8. Προς βασιλέα πέμπων ήξίου, άΒελφος ων Β αυτού ; , Βοθήναί οί ταύτας τας πόλεις μάλλον η Τισσαφερνην αρχειν αυτών} 9. Και yap ήσαν αι Ίωνικαι πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους* το άρχαΐον^ εκ βασιλέως ΒεΒομεναι. 10. Και αρκτον ποτέ επιφερομένην ουκ έτρεσεν, άλλα συμπεσων β κατεσπάσθη 7 απο του ίππου. 11. Εις Βε Βη είπε, προσποιούμενος σπενΒειν ώς τάχιστα πορευεσθαι εις την ΈλλάΒα, στρα- τηγούς έλέσθαι άλλους ως τάχιστα, ει μη βουλεται Κλέ- αρχος απαγειν. 12. Κΰρον μεταπεμπεται απο της αρχής. 13. ΚαΙ των παρ εαυτω* βαρβάρων* επεμελεΐτο, ως πολεμεΐν τε ικανοί ειησαν, και ευνοϊκώς εχοιεν αύτω? 14. Ταύτα ειπών ςπαύσατο. 15. Αιτεί αυτόν. 16• Ήιτουμην 10 βασιλέα. 1 § 104- β See συμπίπτω, * § 73. 7 Translate, he was dragged. 3 § 129, 1. 8 § 142. * Why genitive ? β § 186. 6 §160,2. ω §199, Note 1; §3. LESSON LXXVIII. 55 LESSON LXXVIII. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE, §200-201. Translate into English. 1. 'Αναβαίνει ovv 6 Κύρος Χαβων Τισσαφερνην ως φιΧον* 2. Kcu των ΕΧΧηνων έχων οπΧίτας ανεβη τριακόσιους, καί άρχοντα αυτών αενιαν Παρρασιον. 3. Δαρείου 1 καί Πσρνσάτιδος yiyvovTai 2 παίδες δυο. 4. Πορεύεται 2 προς βασιΧεα rj εδυνατο τάχιστα. 5. *Επε\ ησθενεί 3 Δαρείος και ύπωπτευε 3 τεΧευτην του βίου, εβουΧετο^ τω παίδε άμφοτερω παρειναι. 6. Οστις άφί- κνεΐτο* των παρά βασιλέως προς αυτόν, 7ται^τα9 ούτω 8ια- τιθεις* άπεπεμπετο, ώστε αυτω μαΧΧον φιΧους είναι η βασιΧεϊ. 7. Ο ανηρ τοιαύτα μεν πεποίηκε, τοιαύτα δε Xiyec 8. Κύρος ουπω ηκεν} 9. ΟΙδα yap οττη οίχονται. 10. ΈπεΙ είδον αυτόν οίπερ προσθεν προσεκυνουν, 6 κα\ τότε προσεκυνησαν? καίπερ είδότες οτι επι θανάτω ayoiToJ 11. Αβροκομας ου τούτ εποιησεν, αλλ' επεί ηκουσε Κύ- ρον εν Κιλικία οντά, αναστρεψας tK Φοινίκης πάρα βασι- Χεα απηλαυνεν, €χων, ως ελεyετo, τριάκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάς. 12. Ει μεν δη δίκαια ποιήσω, ουκ οιδα• αιρησομαι δ ουν υμάς, και συν ύμιν ο τι αν δεη* πεί- σομαι. 13. Ει yap τίνα αΧΧηλοις μαχην συνάψετε, νομίζετε εν τηδε τη ήμερα εμε τε κατακεκάψεσθαι, και υμάς ου ποΧυ εμού ύστερον. 14. Πραττουσιν ά αν βου- Χωνται. 15. Επραττον α βουΧοιντο. 16. Καϊ των παρ εαυτω βάρβαρων επεμεΧεϊτο, ως ποΧεμεϊν τε ικανοί ειησαν, καϊ ευνοϊκώς εχοιεν αυτω, 17. Τισσαφέρνης διαβαΧΧει 2 τον Κύρον προς τον άδεΧφον, ως ΙπιβουΧευοι αυτω. 18. El δε τίνα όρωη δεινον οντά οίκονομον και 56 GREEK LESSONS. κατασκενάζοντά τε ης αργοί γωρας* και προσόδους ττοι- ovvtcL) ovheva αν ττωττοτε acpetXeTO, aXk aet ττΧείω ττροσ- €$ίδον. 1 Why genitive ? 2 §200, Note 1. s § 200, Note 5. * Compounded of what? The force of the preposition? Give the stem. 6 § 200, Note 3. 8 § 154. 6 Force of this tense? 9 § 206. T § 201 and § 243 ; the verb διαβάλλω implies saying. LESSON LXXIX. Translate into Greek• 1. The child loves his father. 2. The father is loved by his child. 3. The cities belonged to Tissaphernes, having been given to him by the king. 4. He sends for Cyrus to come to him from his government. 5. These things were done by the king. 6. The king did these things for him- self. 7. The city was surrounded by a river. 8. Cyrus goes up. 9. He went to the king. 10. He went to the king as fast as he could. 11. The king has already done these things. 12. They were in the habit of prostrating them- selves. 13. They prostrated themselves. 14. While they were marching, they saw a palace. 15. He spoke to the king. 16. He was speaking to the king. 17. The child shall do this. 18. They do whatever they please. 19. They did whatever they pleased. 20. The king had not yet come. LESSON LXXX. 57 THE MOODS. LESSON LXXX. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER ίνα, ώ*, tf™s, μή, § 215-218. Translate into English. 1. "Ερχεται Ίνα τούτο ϊδτ). 2. Ηλθεν Ινα τούτο ιδοι. 3. Και των παρ εαυτω βάρβαρων επεμελειτο, ως πολε- μείν τ ε Ικανοί ειησαν, και ευνοϊκώς εχοιεν αυτω. 4. Την Έλληνικην δύναμιν ηθροιζεν ως 1 μάλιστα εδύνατο επικρυ* πτό μένος, όπως οτι απαρασκευοτατον λαβοι βασιλέα. 5. Ταύτης ένεκα της παρόδου Κύρος τας ναύς 3 μετεπεμ- ψατο* όπως όπλιτας αποβιβασειεν εισω και εξω των πυλών. G. Φοβείται μη τούτο γενηται. 7. ^Εφοβείτο μη τούτο γενηται. 8. Εκελευε τους στρατηγούς ελθόντας Κύρον αιτεϊν πλοία, ως αποπλεοιεν ■ εαν δε μη δίδω 5 ταύτα, ηγεμόνα αιτειν Κύρον, όστις δια φίλιας 6 της 'χωράς απαξει ' εαν δε μηδέ ηγεμόνα δίδω, συνταττεσθαι την ταχιστην, πεμψαι δε και προκαταληψομενους τα άκρα, όπως μη φθασωσι μήτε Κύρος μήτε οι Κίλικες καταλα- βόντες. 9. Ουκ εθελω ελθεΐν, δεδιως 7 μη λαβών με δίκην επιθτ]* ων νομίζει υπ εμού ηδικησθαι. 10. Φοβού- μαι μη ου τούτο <γενηται. 11. ' Οπως ουν εσεσθε άνδρες άξιοι της ελευυεριας ης κεκτησοε, και υτιερ ης υμάς εγω ευδαιμονιζω. 1 S D XXIV. Note 1. ■ The stem ? 3 § 54. 4 Composition ? Force of the preposition? Why middle voice? 248 and 247, Note 1. β § 142, 3. 7 See Catalogue of Verbs, δκ'δω. 8 He shall inflict punishment for those things in which, &c. 1 § 217, Note 4. D § 153. 58 GREEK LESSONS. LESSON LXXXI. Translate into Greek• 1. He is coming that he may see this. 2. He came that he might see this. 3. He assembles his force as quickly as possible, so that he may take the king unprepared. 4. Cyrus sent for the ships, in order that he might land the hoplites. 5. Cyrus sends for the ships in order that he may land the hoplites. 6. He fears lest this may happen. 7. He feared lest this should happen. 8. He feared lest Cyrus should assemble his force. 9. They asked Cyrus for vessels in order that they might sail away. 10. They ask Cyrus for a guide who will lead them away through a friendly 1 country (lit through the country [which is] friendly). 1 See § 142, 3. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. LESSON LXXXII. PARTICULAK SUPPOSITIONS, §219-224. Translate into English• 1. El ττράσσβι τούτο, καΧως e^et. 2. El βπραξβ τούτο, κα,Χως e^et. 3. El eirpaaae τούτο, καΧώς e%ei. 4. El €ΐτρασσβ τούτο, καΧως αν efyev. 5. Ει τούτο βπραξε, καΧως αν βσχβν. 6. Εν τούτο επητραγει, καΧώς αν €Ϊχ€ν. 7. 9 Εαν πρασση τούτο, καΧως Ι£β£. 8. Ευ ττραξα τούτο, καΧως efa. 9. El ττράσσοι τούτο, καΧως αν €χ<Μ. 10. Εϊ τι €%€ί, δίδωσιν. 11. El tl €l^€v, εδ/- LESSON LXXXIH. 59 δου αν. 12. El tl \σγβ.ν, eScoxep αν. 13. 'Εάν π βχτ), δωσβι. 14. El tl €χοι, διδοίη αν. 15. El μη 1 ύμβις ηΧθβτβ, βπορβυόμβθα αν €7τϊ τον βασιΧβα. 16. El ϊΧθοι, πάντ αν ΪΒοι. 2 17. '<4λλ' el βου\€σθβ συναπιεναι, ηκβιν ηδη K€\€V€L υμάς της νυκτός. 3 18. *Ην yap τούτο Χά- βωμ€ν, ου δυνήσονται μζν^ν ol inrep της οδού. 19. -4λλ', οιμαι, €ΐ €θΐοου, 67TL τούτω αν €OL0oυ y όπως eμoL οους μ€ΐ- ον^ μη άττοδοίη ύμΐν το TrXelov} 20. Εαν τ)ς φιΧομαθης, ea€L b και ποΧυμαθης. 21. El ησαν^ ανδρβς αγαθοί, ώς συ φΐ)ς, ουκ αν ττοτβ ταύτα νπασγρν. 11. Uvoe yap αν Μηδοκός μβ 6 βασιΧςυς βπαινοιη, €l εξεΧαυνοιμι τους evep- yeτaς. 23. El €στι θεός, σοφός €στιν. 24. El τούτο Xeyet?, άμαρταν€ΐς. 25. El τούτο ΖΧβξας, ημαρτ€ς αν. 20. Έαν τούτο Xeyrfi, άμαρτηση. 27• Αν δε' τις ανθι- στήται, συν ύμΐν πβιρασόμβθα' γβίρούσθαι. 28. El δε τις αΧΧο όρα βεΧτιον, Χ€ξάτω. 29. El ουν ορωην υμάς σωτηριον tl βουΧ€υομβνους, ίΧθοιμι αν προς ύμά>ς. 30. Εαν Χυω αυτόν, χαιρησα. 31. El ypayfrei, γι/ωσο- μαι. 32. Εαν έΧθη, τούτο ποιήσω. 33. El eX0OL, τούτ αν ποιησαιμι. 1 f 283, 2. 6 | 120, 1. * Bee (Ιδον. β ήσαν here refers to several cases in past time. 3 Why genitive? 7 | l• 4 § 72, 2, and 73. • For this form of the optative, see § 123. LESSON LXXXIII. Translate into Greek• 1. If he is doing this, it is well 2. If he was doing this, it was well. 3. If he did this, it was well. 4. If he were 60 GREEK LESSONS. doing this, it would be well. 5. If he had done this, it would have been well. 6. If he (shall) do this, it will be well. 7. If there are altars, there are also gods. 8. If he had anything, he would give it. 9. If we have any- thing, we will give it. 10. If we should have anything, we would give it. 11. If he was able to do this, he did it. 12. If he should be able to do this, he would do it. 13. If you (shall) speak the truth, I will give you three tal- ents. 14. If I had a mina, I would give it to the slave. 15. If he should come, I would do this. 16. If I (shall) receive anything, I will give it to you. 17. If he had any- thing, he would have given it. 18. If you had not come, we should have marched immediately against the king. 19. If you had said this, you would have erred. 20. If you (shall) say this, you will err. 21. If he had (finished) doing this, it would be well. 22. If he shall come, I will do this. 23. If he should come, I should do this. 24. If he shall write, I shall know it. 25. If he should go, he would see all. 26. The passage was difficult to enter, if any one attempted to oppose. 1 27. If they (shall) do 2 this (once), it will be well. 1 See § 200, Note 2. a See § 200, Note 5. LESSON LXXXIV. GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS, § 225. Translate into English. 1. Eav τις κΧζπττ)) κοΧαξβται. 2. Ει τις κΧβπτοι, βκοΧαζβτο. 3. Eav τις ττράσση τοιούτον τι, χαλβττα/ζ/ο- μεν αυτω. 4. El τις πράσσοι τοιούτον τι, ζχαΧβτταινομβν. 5. *Ην €γγι>9 €λθτ) θάνατος, ονδβίς βού\€ται θνησκειν* LESSON LXXXIV. 61 6. Ει τις άντείποι, ευθύς τεθνηκει. 7. Φανερός δ ην, εί τις τι αγαθόν η κακόν ποιησειεν 1 αύτον? νικάν 8 πει ρω- μενος. 8. Ην βΤΓίκονρημα των ποδών, ει τις κινοίτο και μηδεποτε^ ησυχίαν εχοι, καϊ εί την νύκτα 5 ύποΧυοιτο} 9. Εις ye μην δικαιοσύνην ei τις αυτω φανερός γένοιτο επιδείκνυσθαι βουΧομενος, Trepl παντός εποιειτο τούτους πΧουσιωτερους ποιεϊν των εκ τον αδίκου φιΧοκερδούντων? 10. Kal eu τις αυτω δοκοίη των προς τούτο τεταγμένων 9 βΧακεύειν, εκΧεγό μένος τον επιτηδειον επαισεν 9 αν, 10 καϊ άμα αύτος προσελάμβανεν εις τον πηΧον εμβαινων. 11. Καν μην, ω Κύρε, Χεγουσι τίνες Ότι ποΧλα υπισχνϊ) νυν δια το εν τοιούτω είναι ιι του κίνδυνου προσιόντος' αν ο ευ γενηται τι, ου μεμ\η)σΌαι σε φασιν ενιοι be ουδ ει μεμνωό 1 * τε και βουΧοιο, δύνασθαι 1 ' αν άποδούναι οσα υπισχνν. 12. Ην τις παραβαινη % ζημιαν αυτοΐς απέθεσα: 13. Ει που εξεΧαύνοι Αστυάγης, εή> ίππου χρυσοχαΧινου περιηγε τον Κύρον. 14. Ec δε τίνα ορωη δεινον οντά οικονυμον, καϊ κατασκευάζονται τε ης α/?- χοι ι> χωράς και προσόδους ποιούντα, ούδενα αν πώποτε αφειΧετο^ αλλά del πΧείω 1 * προσεδίδου. 1•>. ' ΑΧΧα μην ει τις γ ε τι αυτω προσταξαντι καΧως υπηρετη- σειει\ ονδενϊ 20 πωποτε άχάριστον είασε 21 την προθυ- μιαν. 1(1. Πάρα βασιΧεως ποΧΧοΙ προς Κύρον άπήΧθον, επειδή ποΧεμιοι αΧΧηΧοις εγενοντο, και ούτοι οι μαΧιστα υπ αυτού αγαπωμενοι, νομιζοντες πάρα Κυρω οντες αγα- θοί 22 άξιωτερας αν τιμής τυγχάνειν η πάρα βασιΧει. 1 / Και οί μεν ευχοντο ώ? 23 δοΧίους οντάς αυτούς Χηφθη- ναι, οι δ ωκτειρον εί αΧωσοιντο. 2 * 18. Εύθυς συν τού- τοις εισπηδησαντες εις τον πηΧον, θάττον η ώς τις αν ν 25 ' 26 '#• ' ν r 'y ωετο μετέωρους εξεκομισαν τ ας άμαξας. 1 Dialect ? Β ( 165. ■ Account for the accent. 82 GREEK LES 4 Account for the use of μη^€ποτ€. s Why accusative ': • If he took off (lit unloosed) his sandals at nigltL 1 Why genitive ? I From τάσσω ; translate, of those appointed for this work, • § 225, fine print (end). * § 206 ; translate, selecting tlie one deserving it he would chastise Mm. II § 262. u §§ 183 and 277, 2 : lit on account of your hang in such a condition, when tlte danger is approaching. * § 200, Note 6- M The per. mid opt 2 pers. sing, of μιμνησκω. 15 Sc. φασίρ-, see §§ 246 and 2ΪΪ. * s 2 00. 2. 18 § 206 ; translate, fe never took (anything) away from any one. » §§ 72 and 72 2. » § 184, 3, Note 4. a ? : . 22 §226. B 277, 6, Note 2. " 22 id 248, % 25 Translate, sooner than any one would have thought; lit sooner than as. See § 220. 2. * Raised aloft LESSON LXXXV. Translate into Greet. 1. If (ever) any of them steal, they are (always) pun- :d. 2. If (ever) any of them stole, they were (alw punished. 3. If you (ever) do such a thing, we are (al- ways) angry with you. 4. If (ever) any one did such a thing, we were (always) angry with him. 5. If (ever) any of those appointed for this (work) seemed to him to loiter, he would beat them. 6. If (ever) any one does this, he (always) beats hint 7. If (ever) he receives anything, he (always) gives it. 8. If (ever) he received anything, he (always) gave it. 9. Κ I was (ever) able to do this, I (in all such cases) did it. 10. If any one counts upon two or even more days, he is a fooL 11. If they (ever) have anything, they (always) give it to the citizens. 12. If we (ever) had anything, we (always) gave it to our friends. LESSON LXXXVI. 63 LESSON LXXXVI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Translate into English. 1. El ην 6 θάνατος του παντός απαΧΧαγη, €ρμαιον αν ην τοις κακοις. 2. El πείσας 1 βουΧεται Χαβεϊν, Χεγε'τω τι εσται τοις στρατιώταις 2 εάν αύτω ταύτα χαρίσωνται? 3. Έαν αυ ημείς νικώμεν, ΧεΧυμενης της γέφυρας ούχ εζουσιν εκείνοι οποί φύγωσιν.* 4. Ει 8η ποτέ πορευοιτο και πΧειστοι μεΧΧοιεν' οψεσθαι, προσκαΧών τους φ^Χους εσπουδαιοΧογεϊτο, 6 ως ΒηΧοίη ους τίμα.* 5. 'Επειδή δε Κύρος εκαΧει, Χαβων υ μας επορευόμην, ι να, ει τι δεοιτο, ωφεΧοιην αυτόν uvt) ων €υ επασον υττ εκείνου. 6. ΈβουΧοντο εΧθεϊν, ει τούτο γένοιτο.' 7. ΕπεΙ άριστη- σαντες επορευοντο, υποσταντες εν στενω οι στραττγγοι, €ΐ τι εύρίσκοιεν των ειρημενων μη άφειμενον, 10 άφ-ρρούντο. 8. ΟύΒε yap €i πάνυ προθυμοΐτο ην ράΖιον. 9. Ει τούτο ποιήσει, εΧεύθερον άφησω αυτόν. 10. Ουκ εφασαν ιεναι, 11 εαν μη τις αντοϊς -χρήματα Βι&ω, ωσπερ rat τοις προτε- ροις μετά Κυρου αναβάσι. 11. Εί μεντοι τότε πΧείους συνεΧε'γησαν, εκινουνευσεν αν Βιαφθαρήναι ποΧυ του στρα- τεύματος. 12. Ούτος Κυρω ειπεν, ει αυτω Βοιη Ιππέας χιΧιους, Οτι τους προκατακάοντας ιππέας η κατακάνοι 1 * αν 15 ενεΰρευσας η ζώντας ποΧΧους αυτών εΧοι, 16 και κωΧυ- σειε του καειν επιόντας, 1 ' και ποιησειεν ώστε μηποτε δυ- νασθαι αυτούς ι&οντας το Κυρου στράτευμα βασιΧεϊ Biay- γεΐλαι. 13. ΕΧθοιμι αν, ει τούτο γένοιτο. 14. Ή εισβοΧη ην όδο V? αυτόν σατράττην Ιττοίησβν. 5. Κύρος, έχων ους €ίρηκα, ω ρ ματ ο άττο SdpSecov* 6. Ο re βουΧβταί δώσω. 7. *Α μη ββονΧβτο δούναι y 66 GREEK LESSONS. ουκ αν εΒωκεν. 8. "Ο τι αν βούληται, δώσω. 9. *0 τι βούλοιτο, Βοιην αν. 10. ' Ο τι αν βούληται ΒιΒωμι. 11. "Ο τι βούλοιτο εΒΊΒουν. 12. 'Ενταύθα Κύρω 2 βασί- λεια ην καϊ παράδεισος μέγας άγριων θηρίων πλήρης? α εκείνος εθηρευεν άπο Ιππου, οπότε γύμνασαν βούλοιτο εαυτόν τε κα\ τους Ιππους. 13. Ει μεν 8η Βίκαια ποιψ σω, ού /c οΐ8α • αιρησομαι 8 ουν υμάς, καϊ συν ύμιν ο τι αν οεη πεισομαι. 14. Και συν υμιν αν οιμαι είναι τίμιος, οπού αν ω. 10. &αν τίνες' οι αν ουνωνται τούτο ποιώσι, καλώς εξει• 16. Καϊ οι όνοι, επει τις Βιωκοι, προΒραμόντες* εστασαν. 17. ΟυΒεν^ ηγθετο αυτών 10 πολεμουντων. 18. Μετά τούτον άλλος ανέστη, επιΒεικνυς ώς ευηθες εϊη 11 ηγεμόνα αιτεΐν πάρα τούτου ω 12 λυμαινό- μεθα την πράξιν. Ει 8ε τω ηγεμόνι πιστευσομεν ω αν Κύρος ΒιΒω, τ/ 13 κωλύει και τα άκρα κελευειν Κΰρον προκαταλαμβανειν ; Έγω γαρ οκνοίην 1 * μεν αν είς τα πλοία εμβαίνειν α ημίν Βοίη, μη ημάς αυταϊς 10 ταΐς τριη- ρεσι καταΒυση* φοβοίμην 8 αν τω ηγεμονι ω Βοιη επε- σοαι, μη ημάς αγαγη ουεν ουχ οίον τε εσται εξελσειν • βουλοίμην δ' αν, άκοντος άπιων 1 ' Κύρου^ λαθεΐν αύτον απελθών• 19 ο 2 ® ου Βυνατόν εστίν. 19. Λεϊται αυτού μη προσθεν καταλύσαι προς τους αντιστασιωτας πριν αν αυτω συμβουλευσηται. 20. *Τπεσχετο άνΒρΙ εκάστω Βωσειν 21 πέντε αργυρίου μνάς, επαν εις Βαβυλώνα ηκωσι, 22 και τον μισθον εντελή, μέχρι αν καταστηστ) τους Ελληνας εις Ιωνιαν πάλιν. 21. Καϊ τους φυγάΒας εκέλευσε συν αυτω στρατενεσθαι, υποσχόμενος αύτοΐς, ει καλώς κατα- πραξειεν εφ α εστρατευετο, μη προσθεν παύσασθαι 21 πρίν αυτούς καταγάγοι 22 οϊκαΒε. 1 Why middle voice ? * § 71. 1 Why dative ? « See Catalogue of Verbs, πάσχω. LESSON LXXXIX. 67 1 αν dvai τίμιος = οτι τίμιος αν άην. See §211 and § 227, 1. • | 138, Note 8. 9 § 160, 2. T Give the other words of same class. * Why genitive ? 1 See τρίχω. u Subject ? u Translate, whose enterprise (lit. for whom) we are mining. 13 Τ what hinders Cyrus from giving ordtrs to preoccupy the heights also f " | 22β, 1. 15 Translate, triremes and all. § NO*•. M Translate, to a place from which ii will not be possible to extricate ourselves. 11 = tl άπίοψχ. » It lent? §183. "§203, Not LESSON LXXXIX. Traiiftlate into Greek. 1. Qynil had those whom I I ioned. 2. A • things which I have. 3. I will pre him what he (n I will give him whatever he may wish. 5. I should pre him wl might wish. 6. I g him \ 1. 7. 1 1 had a park full of wild beasts, which he waa accus t omed to hunt horseback when If 8. I should fear to embark in the vessels which Cyrus might 9. I will do whatever he may wish. 10. I w T ill fol- low the guide [i. a any guide] ι lyrua m 11. I !i to depart without the knowledge of Cyrus. They promised to advance until they should come to Babylon. 13. With you Τ am respected wherever I am. 14 With you 1 will submit to whatever may be necessary. 68 GREEK LESSONS. INDIRECT DISCOURSE. LESSON XC. SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE, §241-246. Translate into English. 1. Αεγει οτι γράφει. 2. Εϊπεν οτι γράφοι. 3. Ηκεν άγγελος λέγων, ore ΧεΧοιπως 1 ειη Συέννεσις τα άκρα. 4. Αεγει τις ore ταύτα βουλεται. 5. Αεγει τις ταύτα βούλεσθαι. 6. f Ύστερον, επεί εγνω οτι ου Βυνησεται βια- σασθαι, συνηγαγεν εκκΧησιαν των αυτόν στρατιωτών• 7. Μετά τούτον άλλος ανέστη? επιδεικνυς μεν την εύη- θειαν τού τα πλοία αΐτεΐν κεΧευοντος, 3 επιδεικνυς δέ ώ? ευηθες^ είη ηγεμόνα αιτεϊν πάρα τούτου ω 6 Χυμαινομεθα την πραξιν. 8. Επει ουν ήσαν αφανείς,' Βιή\θε Χογος οτι διώκοι αυτούς Κύρος τριηρεσι? 9. ΚαΙ Κύρος μετα- πεμψάμενος τους στρατηγούς τών *ΕλΧηνων ελεγεν οτι ή 6Βος εσοιτο^ προς βασιλέα εις Βαβυλώνα. 10. Τισσα- φέρνης διαβαλΧει τον Κΰρον προς τον άΒελφον ως 10 επι~ βουΧεύοι 11 αύτω. 11. Λέγει οτι τούτο αν εγ ενετό. 12. ' Εφη Κύρον αρζαι τού Χογου 12 ώδε. 13. Έκ τούτου παΧιν ηρωτησεν 6 Κύρος* Ετι ουν αν γε'νοιο 1 ^ τω εμώ αδεΧφω ποΧεμιος, εμοϊ δε και φίλος και πιστός ; c O δέ απεκρινατο οτι ουο ει γενοιμην, ω Κυρε, σοι γ αν ετι ποτέ Βοξαιμι. 14. Αγγελλει τούτους ελθόντας. 15. Ηγγειλε τούτους ερχόμενους. 16. "ΗγγειΧε τούτους ελθοντας. 17. Φησϊ γράφειν. 18. "Εφη γραφειν. lv. νι στρατιωται ουκ εψασαν ιεναι του πρόσω, 20. -4λλ' εγωγε φημι ταύτα φλυαρίας είναι. LESSON XCI. 69 1 See I ie of Verb?. XciVg). 10 ως, (saying) Clot J >. ll λ\ ■ I 171. 1. 71. «d). ive? u Se. φίλος σοι και πιστό?. 7 Why pt-rispomenon? " § 13, 2 (end). e 3. uratio recta f LESSON XCI. QTDIB1CI QUOTATION OF COMPOUND SKHTJ § %i I rimvl it. Into Kilglith. 1. Αν ύμείς λεγητε % ποη]σειν φησι ο μητ αισχυνην μΐ\τ α&οξίαν αυτω φέρει. 2. ΑπεκρίναιπΌ οτι μανθανοιεν α ουκ επίσταιντο. ο. Και ουκ εφασαν ιέναι. tuv μη τις αυτοίς χρψ ματα ΒιΒω, ωσπερ και τοις προτεροις μετά Κνρου αναβασι πάρα τον πάτερα του Κυρου. 4. Τπεσχετο" ανδρΐ εκα- Βωσειν πέντε αργυρίου μ: εις Βαβυλώνα ηκωσι* και τον μισθον εντελή^ μέχρι αν καταστ^στ} τους Ε\\ηνας εις Ιωιίαν τταλιν. 5. ΕπεΙ Βε γσθοντο οι μεν Ι οτι βασιλεύς συν τω στρατευματι εν τοϊς σκευο- φόροις ειη* βασιλενς δ' αυ ηκουσε Τισσαφέρνους οτι οι Ελληνες W$*mew το καθ αυτούς και εις το προσθεν οιχονται ' Βιωκοι -αύθα Βη βασιλεύς αθροίζει τε τους εαυτού καΐ συιπ-άττεται. 6. Έβούλοντο ελθειν, ει τούτο 'γένοιτο. 7. ΚαΙ εν τούτω Κύρος, παρέλαυνων αυτός συν ΤΙι^ρητι τω ερμηνει και άλλοις τρισιν η τετταρσι, τω Κλεαρχω ββοα αηειν το στράτευμα κατά μέσον το των πολεμίων, οτι* ίκει βασιλεύς ειη. 8. Απεκρίνατο οτι 70 GREEK LESSONS. άκούου Άβροκόμαν Ιχθρον avSpa eirc τω Ενφραττ) ττοταμω elvaij άπβχοντα δώδεκα σταθμούς. * § 223. 4 § 200, Note 3. 1 See νπισχνίομαι. 6 § 142, 3. 8 Composition? § 231, Note. β Why optative? τ § 200, Note 3 ; the opt. might have been used to correspond to vuccoev; § 243. 8 § 250, Note. LESSON XCII. Translate into Greek• 1. He is writing. 2. He says * that he is writing. 3. He was writing. 4. He says that he was writing. 5. He says that he wrote. 6. He said that he was writing. 7. He said that he had written. 8. A certain one 2 said that he was writing. 9. The report spread that Cyrus would pursue them with galleys. 10. Cyrus said that his march was directed to Babylon, against the king. 11. He said that Cyrus spoke as follows. 12. He replied that he would be friendly. 13. These are coming. 14. He announced that these were coming. 15. He announces that this will be done. 16. He says that this would have happened. 3 17. He promised to give each men five minae of silver, when they should arrive at Babylon. 18. He announces that they are fleeing at full speed. 19. He said that the soldiers would advance no farther. 20. On the next day a messenger came saying that Syennesis had left 4 the heights, after he had perceived that the army was already in Cilicia. 21. The soldiers refused to go farther, for they already began to suspect 5 that they were going against the king. 1 See § 260, 2, Note 1. * See § 98, 2, and § 242. * Observe the position of the enclitic. 5 νποπτ€υω (imperfect). 8 See § 211. LESSON XCUI. 71 LESSON XCIII. INDIRECT DISCOURSE. Translate into English• 1. Ειπεν Ότι τοΰτο ποιοίη. 2. Είπεν Ότι τοΰτο ποιησοι. 3. Εΐπεν Ότι τούτο ποιησειεν. 4. Εϊπεν Ότι τοΰτο ποιήσει. 5. Εφη ποιεΐν 1 τούτο. 6. Εβου- Χετο τούτο ποιησαι. 7. "Εφη τοΰτο ποιησαι. 2 8• Εφη ποιησαι αν τοΰτο. 9. Φησιν αυτούς τοΰτο αν ποιεΐν, €i εξην. 10. Φησιν αυτούς τοΰτο αν ποιεΐν, ei εξείη. 11. ΟΐΒα 3 αυτούς τοΰτϋ αν ποιονντας, ei εξην. 12. Φησι ποιεΐν α αν βουΧηται. 13. Εφη ποιεΐν α βουΧοιτο. 14. Μενουσι ποιοΰντες α αν βουΧωνται. 15. "Εμειναν ποιοΰντες α βουΧοιντο. 16. ΒουΧεται γνωναι τι τοΰτο εστίν. 17. ΈβουΧετο ηνώναι τι τοΰτο ειη. 18. Φησι γνωναι τι τοΰτο ειη. 19. Εφη γνωναι τι τοΰτο ειη. 20. El βουΧοιτο, τοΰτ εποιει. 21. Ει βουΧοιτο, τοΰτ αν ποιοίη. 22. Ειττεν Ότι γεγραφως ειη. 23. Εξεσται τοΰτο ποιεΐν. 24. Νομίζω yap υμάς εμοι είναι καν πα- τρίΒα καϊ φιΧους και συμμάχους, και συν ύμΐν μεν αν ? ? 4 ' tf * Φ 5 r Λ £ ν ν * > * 6 οιμαι είναι τίμιος, οττου αν ω, υμών οε έρημος ων ουκ αν ικανός είναι οιμαι ουτ αν ψιΧον ωψεΧησαι ουτ αν εχ- θρον αΧεξασθαι. 25. Τότε 1 8η καϊ εηνωσθη, Ότι οι βάρ- βαροι τον ανθρωπον ύποπεμψαιεν? οκνοΰντες μη οι ΕΧΧηνες ΒιεΧοντες την yεφυpav μενοιεν εν ttj νήσω, ερυ- ματα έχοντες ένθεν 9 μεν τον Τίηρητα, ένθεν 9 8ε την διώ- ρυγα, τα 8 επιτήδεια εγοιεν εκ της εν μέσω χωράς, ποΧΧης και αγαύης ούσης και των ερηασομενων ενόντων, είτα 8ε και αποστροφή 11 γένοιτο 12 * ει τις βουΧοιτο βασιΧεα κακώς ποιεΐν. 72 GREEK LESSONS. I The present infinitive has three distinct uses. What are they ? See § '202, § 203, and § 203, Note 1 ; § 211. a The aorist infinitive has two distinct uses. What are they ? See § 202 and § 203. 8 § 200, Note 6. 4 § 211 ; av belongs to thai = άψ av. For the sake of emphasis, av is often separated from its verb by such words as οίομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οιδα, &C. 5 § 234. A protasis is implied in συν ήμϊν and in Ζρημος ων, § 226, 1. β § 212, 2. 7 rare δή και, then indeed. 8 Had privately sent ; υπό in composition, from the lit. meaning under, often signifies secretly. Of the two forms of the Optative, which is the ni^re common ? 9 €v6ev μϊν .... tvBev de, on the one side . . . on the other side. 10 otnce there were in (it) those who would till the land ; § 278, 1. II λ place of refuge. 12 Depends on μη. LESSON XCIV. CAUSAL SENTENCES, § 250. Translate into English. 1. Kai αμα, εθαύμαζον ore ονδαμον Κύρος φαινοιτο} ov8* αΧΚος απ αυτού αυΒεις παρε'ιη. 2. Οι Be στρατιώται ol τε αυτόν εκείνου και οι αΧλοι ταύτα ακουσαντες, οτι ου φαίη πάρα, βασιλέα πορευεσθαι 6 επχινεσαν. 3. Ενταύθα Κύρος, Χιλανον καΧεσας του Αμβρακιώτην μαντιν, εδωκεν αυτω δαρεικους τρισχιλιους, otl ttj ενδέκατη απ εκείνης της ημέρας προτερον θυόμενος εϊπεν αυτω otl βασιλεύς ου μαγειται δέκα ήμερων. 4. 'Αμα δε ττ} ήμερα 7 συνελθόν- τες οι στρατηγοί εθαυμαζον οτι Κύρος ούτε άλλον πεμποι σημανονντα ο τι χρη^ ποιειν, ουτ αυτός φαίνοιτο. "Εδο- ξεν ουν αυτοϊς, συσκευασαμενοις α εϊχον και εξοπλίσαμε- LESSON xcv. 73 νοις, προϊεναι είς το πρόσθεν εως Κυρω συμμίξειαν. 10 5. Καταλαμβάνουσι δε τών τε άλλων χρημάτων τα πλείστα διηρπασμενα καί ευ τι σιτιον η ποτον ην • καί τάς άμαξας μεστάς 11 αλεύρων καν οίνου, ας πάρε- σκευάσατο Κύρος, Ινα εΐ ποτέ σφόδρα λαβοι ένδεια το στράτευμα, διαδίδοιη τοις ' Ελλησιν. 6. Ούτος Κυρω εϊπεν, εΐ αυτω δοίη 12 ίππε'ας χίλιους, οτι τους προκατα- κάοντας Ιππέας η κατακάνοί 13 αν ενεδρευσας η ζώντας πολλούς αυτών k\oc, u καί κωλύσειε 1 ^ του κάειν επιο'ντας, κα\ ποιησειεν 1 * ώστε μηποτε δυνασθαι αυτούς νδόντας το Κυρου στράτευμα βασίλεϊ διαγγεΐλαι} I § 250, Note. 6 § 283, 1. * § 145. • § 134, 2, and § 203. 8 ( 142, 2, Note 3. τ j 186. 4 Because (as they thought). { 250, KTote. 8 § 277, 3. 9 The indi.•. is retained here merely to avoid confusion with the construction of πέμποι and φαίνοίτο. 10 § 248, 3 ; cW αν σνμμίξωσιν might have been used. II Account for the position of the adjective. 11 § 242, last --lause. « § 212, 4. u § 245 and § 247, Note 3. ■ j 121. LESSON XCV. Translate into Greek• 1. Cyrus nowhere appeared. 2. They were surprised, because Cyrus nowhere appeared. 3. He said that he was not marching against the king. 4. They rejoiced because he said that he was not marching against the king. 5. The king will not fight for ten days. 1 G. He told Cyrus 74 GREEK LESSONS. that the king would not fight for ten days. 7. He gave him three thousand darics, because he had told Cyrus that the king would not fight for ten days. 8. I see the man. 9. He said, "I see the man." 10. Write the letter. 11. He said, "Write the letter." 12. He said that he was writing the letter. 13. Cyrus did not send any one. 14. The soldiers were surprised because Cyrus did not send any one to inform 2 them what they were 3 to do. 1 See § 179, 1. 8 Use the indicative χρή. 2 Use the future participle. LESSON XCVI. EXPRESSION OF A WISH, § 251. Translate into English. 1. Είθε φίλος ημίν yevoiTO. 2. Εϊθβ τούτο eiroiei. 3. Ει yap μη eyevero tovto. 4. Εϊθβ εμοϊ θβοι ταύτην την δνναμιν παραθβιβν. 5. *Αλλα τούτους οι Oeol άποτί- σαιντο. 6. El σνμβονλζύοιμι α βέλτιστα μοι 8οκ€ΐ elvai, 7τολλα μoL KayaOa 1 yevoLTO. 7. Τούτον evetca μήτε 7τολε- μ€Ϊτ€ ΑακβΖαιμονιοις, σωξοισθέ Τ€ ασφαλώς οποί θέλει έκαστος. 8. Ωφέλε Κύρος ζην? 9. Εϊθβ το ντο ίττοίη- σβν. 10. Μη άναμένωμεν. 11. Εϊθβ τούτο άληθίς ην. 12. Εϊθβ μη άπόλοιντο. 1 § 11, 1 (α). β See § 123, Note 2. LESSONS XCVIL, XCVIII. 7S LESSOX XCVII. 1MPERATIYE-SUBJUN IX EXDEPKNDENT BSNTEN Translate Into English. 1. Aey€, φεΐτγε, ιωμεν, Χυωμεν. Ί. Μη Χυστ)ς ι αυτόν. 3. Μη ποίησης τούτο. 4. Μη ποιεί τούτο. 5. Ειπώ ταύτα ; Γ>. ΒουΧει €ΐπω ταύτα ; 7. Ου μη πίθηται. 8. Ανδρες στρα . μη θαυμάζετε οτι χαΧεπώς φέρω τοΐς παρούσι" πρά~/μασιι>. ( Λ Μ ηδείς υμών Χεγέτω τούτο περί εμού. 11). ΛΧΧα ιόντων, ειοοτες οτι κακιους εισι £ς η ημείς περί εκείνους. 11. Μηδέν φοβηθ^ς. L2. Μηδέν φοβού. 13« Γα ποιήσω ; • : 117 .. •. II. . L88, 1. LESS* νιιι. Translate Into Cireek. 1. Speak thou. 2, I 3, Let us see. 4. Do • ituallv . lo thifl 6. D act). 7. Would that be were dow doing this. s. Would that it had not happened. 9. Ο that it may happen I I Jd that ring. 1 1. Let ufl i. 1l\ Lei our own camp 13. Call Menon, 14 us call Menon. 15. Let ue deliberal will semi certain αρ. 16. will h-a Why indie. ? 8 Why genitive? * § 142, Note 3. c, ci. i 7 L Β 8S0 Ν Ί r inflate into Greek. 1. II.• wishes Ι ι g κ ~ It is necessary to do tbia 3, He must remain I • » fly, 6. II β u • α to him. ft He requested Λ . to him. ! I t to the k: that these cities should be given to hi] r than [that) Tissaphernes shool 11. He took care of the barbarians, to make wu. 1. 1 r ci. ι: PARTICIPLE, 1 175-180. TranelAte Int.. I 1. Ο Κιρος υποΧαβων 1 τους φεύγοντας ~ συΧΧεξας στράτευμα* t7T0\iupK€L ΜιΧητον καΐ / ψ και κατιί ιτται\ ι ιράτο λ ρ τους εκπεπτωκοτας. 1\ 'Ο fiariktW της μεν προς ίαυτον επιβουλής ουκ yaOa- . Τισσαφε'ρνει* he εν< ~α δ αυτόν αμφι ?α στρατεύματα ha~ Ωστε ουί>€ν*' ηχθετο αυ- ' κα\ yap ο Κύρος απ έπεμπε τους ytyi' δασμούς , τω ν πόλεων ων* 6 Τισ- σαφί € Χ ων • 4. Ο ουν πρεσβύτερος πάρων govt. 5. ΠίΐΟϊταί τ€ και ανΧΚαμβ( αποκ II μητηρ εζαίΤ^ταμϊνη OVTOP ΟΊΓ01Γ€μΐΓ€ί τταλιν ηΤ| την αργην, 7. Τφ 'EKXjji ναμίν ηθροί- 78 GREEK LESSONS. ζβν ως μάλιστα εδύνατο επικρυπτο μένος, όπως οτι απαρα- σκευότατον λάβοι βασιλέα. 8. Άβροκόμας ου τούτο εποιησεν, αλλ επει ηκουσε Κυρυν εν Κιλικία οντά, ανα~ στρεψας εκ Φοινίκης πάρα βασιλέα άπηλαυνεν, έχων, ως ελεγετο, τριάκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάς, 9. Ούτοι προ αυτού βασιλέως τεταγμένοι 11 ήσαν. 10. θίγεται ~ απιων νυκτός συν άνθρωποις ώς είκοσι. 11. Κύρος ουν ανεβη επί τα ορη ούΒενος κωλυοντος 1 ^ κα\ εϊΒε τ ας σκηνάς ου 10 οι Κιλικες εφύλαττον. 1β 12. "Ηγγειλε τούτο γεγενημενον. 13. Τούτο το στράτευμα ούτω τρεφόμενον ελανθανεν. 1 § 204. 9 § 277, Note 2. 2 276, 2. 10 § 280. 8 Account for the ι subscript. u § 98, Note. 4 § 186, Note 1. ,2 § 200, Note 3. 6 What does this participle denote? 13 § 279, Note. 6 § 160, 2. 14 What does this gen. abs. denote ? 7 Why genitive? 15 § 179,2. 8 § 275, and § 142. M Why imperfect ? LESSON CII. Translate into Greek• 1. I saw those who were speaking. 1 2. He was in com- pany 2 with those (men 3 ) who were speaking. 3. He came secretly. 4. Cyrus, when he had collected an army, besieged the city. 5. Cyrus, while still a boy, was thought to be the best of all. 6. He did this while he was general. 7. He did this secretly. 8. The elder brother then happened to be present. 9. Cyrus went up, taking Tissaphernes as his friend. 10. He arrests Cyrus with the intention of putting him to death. 11. He departs quickly. 12. Cyrus sent the tribute which accrued from the cities. 13. He was not 3S0H CM. at all concerned lx in war. 14 15. They mm pU pay. l mpany with thoee ere speaking. 6 1 /;* rmnjKiny with = δ αφι~ KveiTO h των 4 τταρα βασιΧεως Wpo* . ττιΐντας OVTto θεις άττεττεμπετο* ώστε αύτω μ ι αι ιι ΚαΙ τ » δέ βαρβάρων 1 * εττεμε- Χειτο, ως ττοΧεμειν τε ικανοί ειησαν, και ευνοικως εχ ' ■ 17 αντύ 6. Την δε ' ΕΧΧηνικην ούναμιν ηθροιζεν ως ίΐτα ε&ύνατο VJ ετΓίκρντττυμι: -ταρασκευοτατον >* 3> βασιΧεα. *Ωδε ουν εττοιεΐτο 21 την συΧΧο^ οττόσας είχε φνΧακ Χεσι, τταρη^ειΧε φρουράρχου εκάστοις, Χαμβανειν~~ άνδρας ΠεΧοττονιη' υπ ττλιίστους 2 '* καΐ βαΧτίσ- ν 34 εττιβουΧευοντος Τισ- σαφέρνους πα 001. ΕβΙ γ'φ Ί}σαι• αι Ιωπκαι ττυΧεις Τισσαφέρνους 2 ^ το άρχα ^ως δε&ομά'αι ' δ αφεστηκεσαν ττρος Κυρον ττασαι ττΧην Μι\ι ; του. 7. Εν Μιλητω δε Τισσαφέρνης* ττροαισθυμενος τ αετούς, αττοστηναι ττρος Κυρον, τους μ& αυτών (πτε'κτεινε,~* τους δ' j ;\ Ό δε Κύρος υττοΧαβων τονς φεύη/οντας, συΧΧε'ξας* } στράτα όρκει ΜιΧητον ψ και κατά θαΧατταν, και mmpOTQ KOTTayCtP τους εκττετττωκότας: 1 Και αυτή αν άΧΧη ττροφασις ην 217.— ■ -'.— 4 184,4.— ■ te L— • r (te £_» | 7 :;._ 15 Whj ι. 1. — " | 171. ϋ- — ■ Ι 21 Ι. — 1 L— ■ | Ι — -' J. — * | 169, 1.-- XXIV.. Χ te -.- "", — *> § 16, 6 md 2.— " | IOC — ■ Ι 3. 82 EXPEDITION OF CYRUS. [I. 7 - 1 0. αυτω 1 του αθροίζβιν 2 στράτευμα. 8. Προς Be βασιΧβα πέμπων ήξιου, άΒεΧφος ων αυτού, Βοθηναι οι ταύτας τάς ποΧεις μαΧΧον η Τισσαφίρνην άρχειν 6 αυτών 6 κα\ η μητηρ συνεπραττεν αυτω ταύτα • ώστε ' βασίΧευς της μεν προς εαυτόν εττιβουΧης 6 ουκ τ)σθάνετο, Τισσαφερνει Be ενομιζε ποΧεμούντα* αυτόν άμφϊ τα στρατεύματα Βαπα- ναν ' ώστε ουοεν ηχσετο αυτών ποΧεμουντων. και, yap 6 Κύρος άπεπεμπε τους γιγνο μένους 12 δασμούς βασιΧει εκ των ποΧεων ων Τισσαφέρνης ετυγχανεν έχων. 1 * Ο. ΑΧΧο Be στράτευμα αυτω 15 συνεΧεγετο 16 εν Χερρο- ' Λ ' ' a n 'fr 17 ι £ 18 Ν ' 19 νήσω ττ) καταντιπερας Αρυοου ' τονοε τον τρόπον. ΚΧεαρχος ΑακεΒαιμόνιος φυγάς ^ ην ■ τούτω συηηενο- μενος 6 Κύρος ήγάσθη τε αυτόν, και ΒίΒωσιν αυτω μύριους Βαρεικους. *0 Be Χαβών το χρυσ'ιον, στράτευμα συνεΧεξεν άπο 2 * τούτων τών χρημάτων, και εποΧεμει, etc Χ€ρρονησου ορμώμενος, τοις θραξϊ τοις ύπερ 'ΕΧΧησπον- τον οικουσι, και ωφεΧει τους L•XXηvaς ■ ωστ€ και χρή- ματα συνεβαΧΧοντο αυτω €ΐς την τροφην τών στρατιωτών αι ΕΧΧησποντιακαΙ ποΧεις εκούσαι. Τούτο Β αν ούτω τρεφομενον 26 εΧάνθανεν αυτω το στράτευμα. 10. ' Αρίστιππος Be 6 ΘετταΧος ξένος ων ετύγχανε ν αυτω, καΐ πιεζόμενος ύπο 2ί τών οίκοι αντιστασιωτών, άρχε- ται προς τον Κύρον, και αΙτει αυτόν εις ΒισχιΧίους ξένους και τριών μηνών μισϋον, ως ° ούτω περιγενομενος αν των 1 Why dative? — 2 § 262, 2. — s By what cases is πρό$ followed? — 4 § 26, Note 3 (1).— δ §202, 1; 260, 1 (end).— * Why geni- tive?— 7 § 266, 2, Note 2. — 8 § 277, 2.— 9 § 203. — 10 § 160, 2.— u § 277, 2.— 12 § 142, L — 18 § 153. — M § 279, 2— 15 Why dative? — 16 § 200, Note 5. — 17 § 168. — 18 § 142, 4; 148, X.. L — 19 § 160, 2.— *> Stem? — 21 § 16, δ.— 22 § 141, Note 1 (a).— 23 § 200, Note 1. — 24 By what cases is από followed? — 25 § 142, 2. — » ? 279. 2. — w Signification of υπό followed by gen., dat, and ace. ? — * §277, Note 2. — 22 §211; 226,3. 1.10,11; Hi.] THE OFFICERS OF CYB1 83 άντιστασιωτών. Ό Be Κνρος ΒίΒωσιν αντω εις τετρα- κισχιΧιονς και εξ μηνών μισθον, και Βειται αντον μη ττρόσθεν καταΧνσαι 3 προς τονς άντιστασιώτας ττρ]ν Α αν ϊ σνμβονΧενσηται. Οντω δε αν το €ν θετταΧια i θανεν αντω τρεφόμενον στράτενμα. 11. Προξενον δε τον Βοιωτών, ξένον οντά αι/τώ, εκεΧενσε Χαβόντα άνδρας οτι 5 ττΧείστονς τταραηενεσθαι, Β ΠισίΒας βονΧομενος στρατενεσθαι. aw' ψραηματα παρεχόντων ΠισιΒών ttj εαντον ' χώρα. Σοφαίνετον Be τον ΣτνμφαΧιον, και Σω- κράτην τον Άχαιον* ξινούς οντάς καΐ τοντονς, εκεΧενσεν ανΒρας Χαβόντας εΧθεϊν 1 οτι ττΧειστονς, ώς ττοΧεμησων Τισσαφερνει σνν τοις φχτ/ασι των ΜιΧησιων. Και εττοιονν όντως οντοι. Γ II Λ ΡΤΕΒ Ι ί. Tin; ΜΛΚ< Η ROM SARDIS ΤΟ ΤΑΒ81 1. Έττει δ* εΒόκει αντω ηΒη πορενεσθαι 1 '* ανω, την μεν ττρόφασιν εττοιεϊτο 1 ΠισίΒας βονΧομενος εκβαΧεϊν 1 ^ τταντ (ΐ7Γ(~ισ ιν Μ τι)ς χωράς ■ και αθροίζει, ώς εττι τοντονς^ το 14 Τ€ βαρβαρικον και το ' ΕΧΧηνικον ενταύθα στράτενμα, και Trapayy* > τε ΚΧεαρχω Χαβοντι ΙΓί ηκειν όσον ην § Μ στράτευμα, 1, και τω ' Αριστίττττω σνναΧΧα^εντι ττρος τονς ls οίκοι αττοττεμψαι ττρος εαντον ο είχε στρά- τενμα?' και Έενία τω Άρκ /iCi, ος αντω ττροεστηκει τον εν ταϊς ττοΧεσι ξενικον™ ηκειν παράγγελλε*, Χαβόντα** τονς Ρ— 1 § 283, 3.— ■ | 202, L— « .— • Force of inl — • 3; 140.— ■ - 1 j ih. 2. — » | 26a— 11 I — " The inrrr nf fa '. — " \ 202, L — 14 § 184, 4.— a § 164.—" | UK Note 3.— >» | 171.3.—» §138, Note 8. 84 THE MARCH FROM SARDIS TO TARSUS. [II. 1-6. άνδρας πΧην όποσοι Ικανοί, ήσαν τας ακροπόλεις φυΧατ- τειν. 1 2. ΈκαΧεσε 2 δε και τους ΜιΧητον ποΧιορκοΰντας, 3 καΐ τους φυγάδας εκεΧευσε συν αυτω στρατευεσθαι, υπο- σχόμενος αύτοΐς, ει καΧως καταπραζειεν βφ' α εστρατεύ- ετο? μη 6 προσθεν παυσασθαι* πριν αυτούς καταγάγοι οικαδε. Οϊ δε ΐ)δεως επειθοντο ■ επιστευον yap αυτω • κα\ Χαβόντες τα οπΧα παρήσαν εις Σάρδεις. 3. 'Ξενίας μεν δη τους εκ των ποΧεων Χαβων παρεγε- νετο* είς Σάρδεις, όπΧιτας εις τετρακισχιΧιους • Πρόξενος δε παρην έχων οπΧιτας μεν εις πεντακόσιους και χίλιους, γυμνητας δε πεντακόσιους, Σοφαίνετος δε ο Στυμφαλιος όπΧιτας έχων χίλιους, Σωκράτης δε 6 Αχαιός όπΧίτας έχων ως πεντακόσιους, ΤΙασιων δε ο Μεγαρευς είς τρια- κόσιους μεν όπλιτας, τριακόσιους δε πελταστας έχων πάρε- γενετο ■ ην δε και ούτος και ο Σωκράτης των αμφι ΜιΧη- τον στρατευομένων. 4. Ούτοι μεν εις Σάρδεις αυτω αφί- κοντο. Τισσαφέρνης δε κατανοησας ταύτα και μείζονα ηγησαμενος 9 είναι η ως επί Πισίδας την παρασκευην, πορεύεται ως βασιΧεα fj εδυνατο τάχιστα, ιππέας έχων ως πεντακόσιους. 5. ΚαΙ βασιΧευς μεν δη, επεί ηκουσε πάρα Τισσαφέρνους τον Κυρου στοΧον, άντιπαρεσκευαζετο. Κύρος δε έχων ους ειρηκα, 10 ωρματο απο Σάρδεων ■ και εξεΧαυνει δια της Λυδίας σταθμούς τρεις, παρασαγγας είκοσι και δύο, επί τον Μαίανδρον ποταμον. Τούτου το εύρος δυο πλεθρα• γέφυρα 12 δε επην εζευγμενη 13 πλοίοις επτά. 6. Τούτον διαβας 1 * εξεΧαυνει δια Φρυγίας σταθμον ενα, παρασαγγας όκτω, εις ΚοΧοσσας, ποΧιν οικουμενην, ευδαιμονα και μεγαΧην. ' * Ενταύθα εμεινεν 10 ημέρας επτά* ι § 261, Ι.— 2 § 106, Note 2. — 8 § 276. 2. — 4 § 243. — 5 § 243, Note 2. — β § 283, 3. — 7 § 203, Note 2. — 8 The stem? The tense- stem?— 9 § 92. — 10 See ςΐπον. — 11 § 123. — 12 § 37. 2, Note 2.— 18 § 101, 3. — M See διαβαίνω. — 1 ' 1 ao. how formed ?' II. 6-9.] AT THE RIVER MAS και ηκε 1 Μένων ό ΘεττάΧος, όπΧιτας έχων χιΧωνς, και πεΧταστας πεντακόσιους, ΔοΧοπας καί Αινιανας και ΟΧυν- θίους. 7. 'Εντεύθεν εξεΧαυνει σταθμούς τρεις, παρασάγγης εικοσιν, εις At\an\i>;, τ;/^ Φρυγίας ποΧιν οικουμένη}', μέγα- Χην και etc Ενταύθα Κύρω βασιλίκι ην' 1 καί παράδεισος μέγας άγριων θηρίων πΧηρης, α εκείνος εθή- ρευεν Λ απο ίππου, οπότε γυμνασαι* βουΧοιτο 1 ' εαυτόν τε πους. Δια μtσoυ 8ε του παράδεισου pL. ανδρός ποταμός- αι c< 14 αυτού εισιν' εκ των βασιΧειων ρεϊ δε και δι 1 1 Τφ Κιλαινών ποΧεως* Ν. "Εστί, δε και μεγαΧου βασιΧεως βασιΧεια εν m Β ερνμνα επι ταις πηγαις τού Μαρσυου ποταμού, ύπο τΐ) ακροποΧει ' pel δε κα ποΧεως και εμβαΧΧει εις τον Μαι- ανδρον • του δε Μαρσυου το ενρος εστίν είκοσι και τ ποδών. Ενταύθα λ ΑποΧλ ctipai Μαρσυαν τας εριζοντα οι περί σος το οερμα κρεμασαι ■ν αι πηγαΐ- δια δε τούτο 6 ποταμός κα- U Mci>>; 1>. Ενταύθα Βερξης, οτε λ] Χα&ος ητ ται οικοδομησαι Εν- ρος ημέρας τριάκοντα- και ψ ΡΧ ? g Λακεδαιμόνιος φυη/ας έχων όπΧιτας χιΧωυς καί 1 ταστ οκτακόσιους κα\ τοξοτας Κρητας & Αμα δε και 1 ~αρήν ό Συρακοσιος έχων όπΧι- τριακοσιους, και Σοφαινετος 6 Αρκάς έχων όπΧιτας Και Ιντανθα ί\νρος εξετασιν καί αριθμόν των ΕΧλ -τοίησεν παραδεισω, και ^γενοντο 1 " οι | ■ - ' ■ Ux ? — ll W . 86 THE MARCH FROM SARDIS TO TARSUS. [Π. 9-14. σύμπαντες όπλΐται 1 μεν μύριοι και χίλιοι, πελτασται δε αμφι τους δισχιλιους. 10. 'Εντεύθεν εξελαυνει σταθμούς δυο, παρασαγγας δέκα, εϊς Πελτας, πολιν οίκουμενην. Ενταύθ* εμεινεν ημέρας τρεις • εν αις Εενιας 6 Αρκάς τα Δυκαια εθϋσε και αγώνα εθηκε • τα δε αθλα ήσαν 2 στλεγγίδες χρυσαι ■ εθεω- ρει δε τον αγώνα και Κύρος. Εντεύθεν εξεΧαυνει σταθ- μούς δυο, παρασαγγας δώδεκα, εις Κεράμων άγοραν, πολιν οικουμενην, εσχατην προς ττ) Μυσια χώρα. 11. Εντεύθεν εξελαυνει σταθμούς τρεις, παρασαγγας τριάκοντα, εις Καν- στρου πεδίον, ττοΧιν οικουμενην. Ενταύθ εμεινεν ημέρας πέντε ■ και τοις στρατιωταις ωφειΧετο μισθός πΧβον η τριών μηνών? καΐ ποΧΧακις Ιόντες^ επι τας θύρας απα- τούν? Ό δε 6 ελπίδας λέγων διήγε, και δήΧος ην άνιω- μενος • ου yap ην προς του Κύρου τρόπου έχοντα μη άπο- διδοναι? 12. Ενταύθα αφικνείται Επύαξα η Χυεννεσιος γυνή του ΚιΧικων βασιΧεως πάρα Κυρον • και ελεγετο Κυρω δούναι 7 χρήματα ποΧΧα. Trj δ' ουν στρατιά τότε απε- δωκε Κύρος μισθον τετταρων μηνών. Είχε* δε η ΚιΧισσα και φυΧακας περί αύτην^ Κίλικας κα\ Ασπενδιους • ίλε- γετο δε καΐ συγγενεσθαι 10 Κυρον ττ} ΚιΧισση. 13. Εν- τεύθεν δε εξελαυνει σταθμούς δυο, παρασαγγας δέκα* εις θυμβριον, ποΧιν οικουμενην. Ενταύθα ην πάρα την όδτν κρήνη η Μιδου καΧουμενη, τού Φρυγών βασιλέως ' εφ rj λέγεται Μίδας τον ^άτυρον θηρεύσαι, οϊνω 11 κεράσας αυτήν. 14. Εντεύθεν εξελαυνει σταθμούς δύο, παρασαγγας 1 Why properispomenon ? — 2 § 135, Note 4.— 3 § 25. 3. — 4 Stem? — 5 Account for the ι subscript? — 6 § 143. Note 2. — 7 Account for the accent. — 8 § 103. — 9 § 80. — 10 Composition ?— u Syntax? U. 14-18] VIEW OF THE TROOPS. Βεκα, εις Τυριαίον. ττοΧιν οικουμενην ■ ενταύθα εμεί ι ρας τρεις. Και Χεγεται δεηθήναι 1 η ΚιΧισσα Κυρου 2 επιΒεϊξαι το στράτευμα αυτί], Β ονΧομενος ουν ε -nil•^ εξετασιν ποιείται εν τω ττεΰίω των Ε\ βαρ- βιίρωι: 15. Ε κέλευσε δε I \\7]νας, ώς νυμος αυτοΐς ην, ούτω τι: 14, συντιιξαι δε Ι στον τους εαυτού. ] ησαν ουν c τάρων • ι δε το μει/ δε£ώ*/ 8f t »» » και οι σι/*/ αι/τω, το δ ενωνυμον ΐρχος και υι ecfmov, το δε μέσον οι αΧΧοι στρατηγοί. 1β. Εθεωρει ουν 6 Κύρος ττρωτον μεν τους βάρβαρους* οι δε 7Γα ρ ?;λα ι/ι/οι/ Π Μ *ατ *λα? /cat *ατα ra| είτα δε τοι/9 ΙϊΧΧηνας, τταρεΧαυνων εφ άρματος, κα\ η σσα εή> άρμαμαξη^ : •ς καΐ κι>7}μ"ί£πς *04 τττίδας t καΧυμμενας. 17. Εττει&η δε 7Γ<7ίτα<> τταρΐ)Χασε, στ μα ττρο της φαΧαγγος, ττεμψας Πιγρητα τον ερμ τταρα τους στρατηγούς τω: νσε ττροβα- Χεσθ ι κα\ εττιχωρήσαι ΌΧ7]ν " Tip φάλαγγα. Οι ι ~τον τοΊς στρατ και επα εσαλ- ~>)θβαΧΧυμενοι τα υττΧα εττηεσαν. I Si K/c δε τούτου, θάττον* προϊόντων συν κραυγή, άιτο τοί αι)το- ι> ορομο στρατιωταις εττΐ τα? σ#π δέ βαρβάρων φόβος ττοΧνς • *ai ^ τε ΚιΧισσα εφυγεν* εκ Tr;ν ώων. — ' — •| Ι. — • f 7 88 THE MARCH FROM SARDIS TO TARSUS. [II 19-22. 19. Εντεύθεν εξεΧαυνει σταθμούς τρείς, παρασαηηας είκοσιν, εις Ίκόνιον, της Φρυγίας ποΧιν εσχατην. Εν- ταύθα έμεινε τρεις ημέρας. Εντεύθεν εξεΧαυνει δια της Λυκαονίας σταθμούς πέντε, παρασαγγας τριάκοντα. Ταυ- την την χωράν επέτρεψε διαρπασαι τοις ΕΧΧησιν ως ποΧεμίαν ουσαν. 20. ' Εντεύθεν Κύρος την ΚιΧισσαν εις την ΚιΧικίαν αποπέμπει την ταχίστην όδόν 2 καΐ συνε- πεμψεν αυτί) στρατιωτας, ους Μένων είχε, και αυτόν. Κύρος δε μετά των αΧΧων εξεΧαυνει διά Καππαδοκίας σταθμούς τετταρας, παρασαηγας είκοσι και πέντε, προς Δάναν, πόΧιν οικουμενην, μεγαΧην καΐ εύδαίμονα? 'Εν- ταύθα έμειναν ημέρας τρεις ■ εν ω Κύρος απεκτεινεν άνδρα ΙΊερσην Με<γαφερνην, φοινικιστην βασιλειον, και έτερον τίνα των υπάρχων δυναστην, αιτιασαμενος επιβουΧευειν αυτώ. 21. Εντεύθεν επειρώντο εισβαΧΧειν^ εις την ΚιΧικίαν* η δε εϊσβοΧη ην οδός αμαξιτός, όρθια ισχυρώς,^ και αμή- χανος εισεΧθειν στρατεύματι 6 ει τις εκωΧυεν. 'ΕΧεγετο δε και Χυεννεσις είναι' επι των άκρων, φυΧαττων την εισροΧην • οι ο εμεινεν ημεραν εν τω 7Γβθί,ω. 1 rj ο ύστεραία* ηκεν αγγεΧος Χεγων, οτι ΧεΧοιπως 9 εϊη Χυεν- νεσις τα άκρα, επει γσθετο οτι το Μενωνος στράτευμα ηδη εν ΚιΧικια ην εισω των ορέων, καΐ οτι τριήρεις ηκουε περιπΧεούσας 10 άπο ' Ιωνίας είς ΚιΧικίαν Ταμων 11 ίνοντα, τάς Λακεδαιμονίων 12 και αυτού Κύρου. 22. Κύρος δ' ου ν ανεβη επί τα ορη, ούδενος κωΧυοντος, και είδε τας σκη- νας, ου οι ΚίΧικες εφυΧαττον. 'Εντεύθεν δε κατεβαινεν εις πεδίον μέγα και καΧον, επίρρυτον, καΐ δένδρων παντο- 1 § 277, Note 2. — 2 §160, 2.— 8 § Π, Note 4. — 4 § 260.— ■ § 74. 1. — 6 § 188, 5. — 7 The present infinitive has three distinct uses. V. are they? — 8 § 189.— 9 See XeiW — 10 § 123, Note 1 n § 12. 2. — v §167,1. — 13 See αναβαίνω. IT. 22-27.] Di CILl• Βαπών έμπλεων και αμπέλων ■ πολύ Βε και σησαμον και, μελινην και κεηχρον και πύρους και κριθας φέρει. Ορος Β αυτό περιέχει οχυρον και ύψηλον παντη εκ θαλαττης εις θάλατταν. 23. Καταβας δε Βια τούτου του πεΒιου ?;λασβ σταθμονς τετταρας, παρασαγγας πέντε και εικοσιν, m Ταρσούς, Κιλικίας πόλιν μβγαΧφ καΐ ενΒαίμοια. 'Ενταύθα ήσαν ιος βασίλεια, του Κιλικων βασιλέως' Βια μέ- σης 1 Be της πόλεως ρεΐ ποταμός, ΚυΒνος όνομα, €υρος Βυο Μι Ταύτην την πόλιν εξελιπον ol ενοικούντες 2 ι Συεννεσιος ε}ς χωρίον οχυρον επί τα όρη* πλην ο'ι τα ,λεΊα Ιτχοντι ναν he και οι πάρα την θάλατταν οικούιπ-ες εν Σόλοις και εν Ίσσοϊ<. **>">. ffcvafa Βε, η Συεννεσιος *γυνη, πρότερα Κυρου πέντε ημεραις εις Tap- σοι το. % Κν ci rp υπερβολή των ορών τών εις το πεΒΙον, Βυο λόχοι, του Μ στρατεύματος απωλοντο ' οί μεν εφα- ιηάς τ* κατακοπηναι υπ ο τών Κιλικων, οι Βε 9 υπυλ€ΐφθεντας και ου δυνάμενους ευρεϊν το άλλο στρα- α ουοε τας όΒους, είτα πλανωμενους άπολεσθαι- ήσαν δ ουν ούτοι εκατόν ό~τ Μ* 01 δ' άλλοι επειΒη ηκον, την τε πόλιν τους Ταρσούς Βιηρπασαν, Βια τον ολε- θρον τών συστρατιωτών ορ~/ιζυμενοι, και τα βασίλεια τα εν αυττ). Κύρος Βε επεί εισηλασεν εις την πόλιν, μετε- π ε μπετό τον Συεννεσιν προς εαυτόν • ό δ ούτε πρότερο ν ουΒενί° πω κρείττονι εαυτού εις χείρας ελθεΐν 1 ' εφη, ούτε ΤϋΤβ Κνρω ιεναι ήθελε, πριν η ηυνη αυτόν έπεισε, καΐ πίστεις έλαβε. 27. Μετά Βε ταύτα, επεί συνεηενοντο 1 § 143, ν. — 4 Acooont ι; , The ioriet infinitm has J ? 90 THE BATTLE OF CUNAXA. [II. 27; VIII. 1-4. άΧΧηΧοις, 1 Χυεννεσις μεν έδωκε Κυρω χρήματα ποΧΧα είς την στρατιαν, Κύρος δ' εκείνω δώρα α νομίζεται ιταρα βασιλεϊ τίμια, ϊππον χρυσοχάΧινον καϊ στρεπτον χρυ- σούν 3 καϊ ψελια καϊ άκινάκην χρυσούν και στοΧην Περ- σικην, κα\ την χωράν μηκετι αφαρπαζεσθαι ■ τα δε ηρπα- σμενα άνδράποδα, ην που εντυηχάνωσιν, άποΧαμβάνειν. / CHAPTER VIII. THE BATTLE OF CUNAXA. 1. Kcu ηδη τε ην άμφΐ άγοραν πΧηθουσαν, και πΧη- σίον 6 ην 6 σταθμός ένθα έμελλε 6 καταΧυειν, ηνίκα Πατη- ηυας, άνηρ Πέρσης των άμφϊ Κύρον πιστών, προφαινεται ελαύνων ανά κράτος ϊδρούντι τω Ιππω ■ ' και ευθύς πάσιν, οΐς 8 ενετυηχανεν εβόα και βαρβαρικώς κα\ ' ΕΧΧηνικώς, οτι βασιλεύς συν στρατεύματι ποΧΧω προσέρχεται, ως εις μάχην παρεσκευασ μένος? 2. Ενθα 8η ποΧυς τάραχος εγε'ι/ετο• 10 αυτίκα yap εδόκουν οι f ΕΧΧηνες, και πάντες δε, άτάκτοις σφισιν επιπεσεΐσθαι. 3. Κύρος τε καταπηδησας άπο του άρματος, τον θώρακα ενεδυ και αναβας επι τον ιππον τα παΧτα εις τας χείρας εΧαβε, τοΐς τε αΧΧοις πασι παρηηηέΚΚεν^ εζοπΧίζεσθαι και καθιστασθαι εις την εαυ- τού ταξιν εκαστον. 4. Ενθα δη συν ποΧΧτ} σπουδτ) καθίσταντο, ΚΧεαρχος μεν τα δεξιά του κέρατος 12 έχων προς τω Ευφράτη ττοτα- 1 § 81. — 2 § 135, 2.— 3 Account for the accent? — 4 § 276.— 5 § 138, Note 2 (c). — 6 § 98, 3. — 7 § 188, 5. — s § 187.—• Account for the σ in the antepenult. — 10 The stem? Connecting- vowel ? The personal ending ? — n How is the future formed ? — 13 § 56, 2. VIII. 4-10.] THE ENEMY IN SIGHT. 91 μω. Πρόξενος Βε εχόμενος, οι δ' αΧΧοι μετά τούτον Me• ι ων δε και το στράτευμα το ενωνυμον κέρας εσχε του Κ\- Χηνικού. 5. Του δε βαρβαρικού β€9 ΠαφΧαγονες ας χύίίον? WOpa ΚΧεαρχον έστησαν εν τω Βεξιω, και το ' ΕΧΧηνικον πεΧταστικόν ' ε*/ δε τα> ευωνυμω Αριαιος τε 6 Κνρου ύπαρχος και το άλλο βαρβαρικοί'. β• Κνρος δε /cat οί ιππείς 1 τούτου όσον εξακόσιοι ωπΧισμενοι — θωραξι 1 αυτοί κα\ παραμηριΒίοις και κράνεα -ες πΧην Κνρου' Κύρος δε ψιΧΐ]ν* έχων την κεφαΧΐ)ν είς την ψβ καθίστατο. Λέγεται δε και του<ζ αΧΧους Πέρσας ταϊς κεφαΧαις 5 εν τω ποΧεμω ΒιακινΒυνι 7• Οι δ* ίπποι - οι μετά Κνρου είχον καΐ προμ ι και προστερνιΒια- είχον δε και μάχαιρας & V Και ηΖη τε ην μέσον ημέρας και ονπω καταφαι ήσαν οι ποΧεμιοι • ηνίκα δε <φαι•ϊ) κονιορτος ωσπερ νεφε\η Χευκη, χρόνω* δε ου συχνω ύστερον ωσπερ μεΧα ποΧυ. " Οτε δε εγγύτερον .οντο,° τάχα Βη και χαΧκός τις ηστραπτε χαι και m τάξεις* καταφα /νοντο. Ο. ΚαΙ ΐ/σαν* ιππείς μεν Χευκοθωράκες* επι τού ευωνύμου των ποΧεμ Τισσαφεριη]^ Γβ τούτων άρχε ι ν ■ εχόμενοι δε τούτων η/ερροφόροι, εχόμενοι δ^ αι συν ποε άσπισιν* Αιγύπτιοι δ' ούτοι tXe'yovro είναι- 11 αΧΧοι δ' Λ\οι τοξόται. Πάντες δε ούτοι και , s εν Ι πΧηρει ανθρώπων εκαστον το έθνος επορευετο. 10. Προ Be WUtSb άρματα 12 ΒιαΧείπο: £η Β ρεπ ανηφόρα καΧούμενα ■ ειχον δε τα δ^ε- :.— » § 188, 1• — 0.— »§} — 92 THE BATTLE OF CUNAXA. [VIII. 10-16. ττανα εκ των αξόνων εις irXayiov αττοτεταμενα, και υπο τοις Βίφροις εις yrjv βΧεττοντα, ως Βιακόπτειν οτω εντυγχάνοιεν. Ή δέ ηνωμί] ην ως εις τας τάξεις των ΕΧΧηνων εΧώντα καΐ διακόψοντα. 11. *0 μεντοι Κύρος είττεν, ore καΧεσας τταρεκεΧεύετο τοις "ΕΧΧησι την κραυηην των βάρβαρων άνεγεσθαι, εψεύσθη τούτο ■ 1 ου yap Kpavyy αΧΧα aiyrj ως άνυστον και ηο-υχτ} ev ισω και βραδέως Ίτροσηεσαν. 12. Kal ev τούτω Κύρος, τταρεΧαυνων αυτός συν Πι- <νρητι τω ερμηνεϊ και αΧΧοις τρισιν η τετταρσι, τω ΚΧε- άργω εβοα ayeiv το στράτευμα κατά μέσον το των ίγο- Χεμίων, οτι εκεί βασιλεύς εϊη• "καν 2 τουτ " εφη, " νικώ- μεν, ττάνθ' 3 ημϊν ττεττοιηταιΓ 13. < Ορων δέ 6 ΚΧεαρχος το μέσον στίφος, και ακουων Κυρου εξω οντά του ΈλΧηνι- κού ευωνύμου βασιλέα, 4 ^ — τοσούτον yap πΧηθει ιτεριην βα- σιλεύς, ώστε μέσον το εαυτού εγων του Κνρου ευωνύμου εξω ην, — αΧΧ όμως ο ΚΧεαργος ουκ ηθεΧεν αττοσττασαι αιτο του ποταμού το Βεξιον κέρας, φοβούμενος μη κυκΧωθείη εκατέρωθεν • τω οε Κνρω αττεκρινατο, οτι αυτω μεΧοι οττως καΧώς εχοι. 14. Και εν τούτω τω καιρώ το μεν βαρβαρικον στρά- τευμα ομαΧως irporjei^ το οε *ΕΧΧηνικον, ετι εν τω αυτω μενον, συνεταττετο εκ των ετι ττροσιόντων. Καί 6 Κύρος, τταρεΧαυνων ου ττανυ ττρος αυτω τω στρατευματι? κατε- θεατο εκατερωσε αττοβΧεττων εις τε τους ττοΧεμίους και τους φιΧους. 15. Ιδων δε αυτόν αττο τού *ΕΧΧηνικού Άενοφων Αθηναίος, υττεΧασας ως συναντησαι, ηρετο ' ει τι r πapayyεXXoι β ο δ εττιστησας είττε, καί Χεγειν εκεΧευε ιτασιν, οτι και τα ιερά κάλα κα\ τα σφάγια καΧά. 16. Ταύτα δε Xεyωv, θορύβου ηκουσε δια των τάξεων 1 § 160, 2. — 2 § 11, 2. — 3 Account for the (9. — * The stem? — > Seecfc.— 6 § 46, 1. — * See ϊρομαι. VIII. 16-21.] BATTLE OF CUXAXA. Ιόντος, και ηρετο, τις 6 θόρυβος ει,η. Ο Be Κλέαρχος είπεν, οτι το σύνθημα παρ€ρχεται Βευτερον ηΒη. Κθ4 ϋαυμασε τις jrapayyeWei, και ηρετο ο τι ειη το σύν- θεμα. Ό δ' άττεκρίνατο υπ ΖΕΤΧ ΧΩΤΗΡ ΚΑΙ ΧΙΚΗ. 17. Ό δ€ Κίρος άκοί ΑΧΧα ΒεχομαΙ * εφη, ^ και τούτο έστω. Ταύτα δ' ειπών εις την εαυτού χωράν απηΧαυνε ' /cat ουκετι τρία η τετταρα σταοια 6tti\tT7)v τω φ αττ λων, ηνικα επαιάνιζόν τε c νες και ηρχοντυ τίοι It ναι τοϊς ποΧεμίοις. 1*. /If Βε ττορευομ€νων εξβκυ- μαιι -t ΤΙ της a\a~f ττυμενον ηρξατο Βρομώ Otiv ' και άμα ίφθ^ξαντο πάντες οιυνπερ τω Ενυα ζονσι, και /ουσι c ?όρατα ίΒονπησαν, φυβον ποι- 1 4 >. Πριν 6ε τόξευμα *£*λ εκκΧινουσιν οί βάρβαροι και φ' Β ενταύθα Βη εΒιωκον μαν και ι ϊβυων Be (ΐΧΧηλοις επεσθαι. 20. Γα δ εφερετο, τα μεν Βι αυτών των ποΧεμιων, τ<ι Ct κα\ m. Οι Β ϊπεί TrpoiBoiev, Βιισταντο* εστί Β όστις* και κατϊΧ^φθη, ^irep Ιν Ίππο- Βρυμω^ εκπΧ< ος και προσκυνουμενος ηΒη ως ρασιΧευς υπο των αμφ αυτόν, ουο ως εξηχυη όιωκειν ■ 1 Τ 2.—• | 141. - 1 . — • '. 94 THE BATTLE OF CUNAXA. [VIII. 21-27. aXXa συνεσπειραμενην έχων την 1 τών συν εαντω βξακο- σίων Ιππέων τάξιν, επεμελειτο 2 ό τί ποιήσει βασιλεύς. Kal yap τ)δει αυτόν, οτι μέσον 3 εχοι του Περσικού στρα- τεύματος. 22. Kal πάντες δ' οί των βάρβαρων άρχοντες μ^σον έχοντες το αυτών ηγούνται, νομίζοντες ούτω και εν άσφάλεστάτω είναι, ην fj η ισχύς αυτών εκατέρωθεν, και, εϊ τι παραγγεΐλαι χρτ/ζοιεν, ημίσει αν χρονω αισθανεσθαι^ το στράτευμα. 23. Kal βασιλεύς δη τότε μέσον έχων της αυτού στρατιάς όμως εξω εγενετο του Κυρου ευωνύμου κέρατος. Έπει δε ουδείς αυτω εμαχετο εκ του άντιου ουδέ τοις αυτού τεταγμενοις έμπροσθεν, επεκαμπτεν, ώς εις κυκΧωσιν. 24. "Ενθα δη Κύρος, δείσας 6 μη όπισθεν γενόμενος κατακοψη το ΕΧΧηνικον, εΧαυνει αντιος • και εμβαΧων συν τοις εξακοσιοις νίκα τους πρς βασιλέως τετα- γμένους, καΐ εις φυγην έτρεψε τους εξακισχιλίους • καϊ αποκτειναι Χεγεται αυτός ττ} εαυτού χ€ΐρΙ Αρταγερσην, τον άρχοντα αυτών. 25. *Γίς δ' η τροπή εγενετο, διασπείρονται κα\ οι Κυ- ρου εξακόσιοι, εις το διωκειν όρμησαντες• πΧην πάνυ ολί- γοι 7 άμφ> αύτον κατεΧειφθησαν? σχεδόν οί ομοτράπεζοι καλούμενοι. 26. Συν τούτοις δε ων καθορα 9 βασιλέα καϊ το αμφ εκείνον στίφος* και ευους ουκ ηνεσχετο, αλΧ ειπών " ίον ανορα ορω, ιετο επ αυτόν % και παιει κατά το στερνον, και τιτρωσκει δια τον θώρακος, ώς φησι Κτησιας 6 ιάτρος, και ιάσθαι αυτός το τραύμα φησι. 27. Παιοντα δ αυτόν ακοντίζει τις παΧτω υπο τον οφθάλμον βιαίως* 12 καΧ ενταύθα μαχόμενοι καϊ βασιλεύς και Κύρος και οι αμφ αυτούς υπέρ εκατερου, οποσοι μεν 1 § 142, Ι. — 2 Why properispomenon? — 2 § 71, Note 2. — 4 § 211. — 5 Decline. — β See δβι'δω ; § 16, 2. — 7 § 73, 6. — 8 § 16, 1. — 9 Ac- count for the θ. — 10 Stem ? — η § 129, 111. — 13 § 74. VIII. 27-29; Χ. 1-3.] DEATH OF CYRUS. 95 των αμφΐ βασιΧεα άπεθνησκον Κτησίας Xeyet, παρ εκεινω yap ην Κύρος δε αυτός τ€ απέθανε, και οκτώ οι άριστου των περί αντον εκειντο επ αντω. 28. Αρταπατης ο , ό πιστότατος αντω των σκηπτονχων θεράπων, Χεγεται, επειδή πεπτωκότα είδε Κνρον, καταπηδησας απο τον ιππον περιπεσειν 1 αντω. 29. ΚαΙ οί μεν φασι βασιλέα κεΧεν- σαί τίνα επισφάξαι αντον Κνρω, οι δέ, εαντον επισφαξα- σθαι, σπασάμενον τον άκινάκην είχε yap χρνσονν," και στρεπτον δ' εφόρει καΐ ψεΧια και ταΧΧα, ωσπερ οι αρι- στοι Ιιερσων ετετιμητο yap νπο Ά,νρον οι εννοιαν τε και πιστότητα. CHAPTER Χ. AFTER THE BATTLE. 1. Εντανθα δη Κνρον αποτεμνεται η κεφαΧη και χειρ η δεξιά. ΒασιΧενς δε καΐ οί σνν αντω διωκων^ εισπίπτει εις το Κνρειον στρατοπεδον • και οι μεν μετά Αριαιον ονκετι ΐστανται? αλλά φε^ονσι 6 δια τον αντών στρατο- πεδον εις τον σταθμον ένθεν ωρμωντο ' τετταρες δ ' ελε- yovTo ' πapaσάyyaι είναι της όδον? 2. ΒασιΧενς δε καΐ οι σνν αντω τα τε αΧΧα ποΧΧα διαρπαζονσι, και την Φωκαϊδα, την Κνρον παΧΧακίδα, την σοφην και καΧην Xεyoμεvηv είναι, Χαμβανει? 3. Ή δε ΜιΧησία, η νεω- τέρα, Χηφθεισα νπο των αμφι βασιΧεα, εκφεvyει γνμνη προς των 'ΕΧΧηνων οΐ ετνχον 10 εν τοις σκενοφοροις οπΧα έχοντες* και αντιταχθεντες, ποΧΧονς μεν των αρπαζόντων απεκτειναν, οι δέ καΐ αντων άπεθανον ■ ον μην εφvyov γε, 1 § 108, 8. — 2 Why perispomenon ? — 8 What kind of contraction is this? — 4 § 138, Note 1 (a). — 5 § 19δ, N. — β § 108, 2. — 7 § 134, N. 1 (c).— 8 § 167, 5.— 9 10S, 5.— » See τυγχάνω.— ll § 119, 1; § 46, 2. 96 AFTER THE BATTLE. [X. 3-8. αλλά και ταύτην έσωσαν, και άλλα οποσα εντός αυτών καΐ χρήματα καΐ άνθρωποι εγενοντο, πάντα έσωσαν. 4. Ενταύθα Βιέσχον αλλήλων βασιλεύς τ€ και oi f Ελ- ληνες ως τριάκοντα στάδια, οι μεν Βιωκοντες τους καθ αυτούς, ως πάντας νικωντες • οι Β αρπάζοντες, ως ηΒη πάντες νικώντας. 5. ΈπεΙ Β ' βσθοντο οι μεν ( Ελληνες, οτι βασιλεύς συν τω στρατευματι εν τοις σκευοφοροις εϊη, βασιλεύς δ* αν ηκουσε 1 Τισσαφέρνους, οτι οι [ Ελληνες νικωεν τϊ> καθ 3 αυτούς, και είς το πρόσθεν θίγονται* Βιω- κοντες, ενταύθα Βη βασιλεύς μεν αθροίζει τε τους εαυτού καΐ συντάττεται• 3 6 Βε Κλέαρχος εβουλεύετο, Προξενον καλεσας (πλησιαιτατος yap ην}, ει πεμποιεν τινας, η πάν* τες ιοιεν επι το στρατοπεΒον αρηξοντες. 6. Εν τούτω καϊ βασιλεύς Βηλος ην προσιων^ πάλιν, ως εΒοκει, όπισθεν. Καϊ οι μεν Ελληνες στραφεντες παρεσκευαζοντο, ως ταυττ) προσιοντος και Βεξομενοι • ο δε βασιλεύς ταύτη μεν ουκ ηηεν, τ) Βε παρηλθεν εξω του ευω- νύμου κέρατος, ταύτη και απηγαγεν, αναλαβων και τους εν τι] μάχη κατά τους ' Ελληνας αυτομόλησαντας, και Τισ- σαφερνην και τους συν αυτω. 7• Ο yap Τισσαφέρνης εν τϊ] πρώτη συνοΒω ουκ εφυγεν, άλλα Βιηλασε πάρα τον ποταμον κατά τους r Ελληνας πεΧταστας * ΒιεΧαυνων Βε κατεκανε μεν ουΒενα, Βιασταντες Βε οι Ελληνες επαιον και ηκοντιζον αυτούς • Επισθενης Βε Αμφιπόλιτης ηρχε των πελταστών, 5 καϊ ελεγετο φρόνιμος γενέσθαι. 8. Ό δ' ουν Τισσαφέρνης ως μεΐον^ έχων απηλλάγη, πάλιν μεν ουκ αναστρέφει, εις Βε το στρατοπεΒον άφικόμενος^ το των Ελλήνων, εκεί συντυηχάνει βασιλεϊ, καϊ ομού Βη πάλιν συνταξαμενοι επορευοντο. ι § 104 — 2 § 279, Note. — 3 Stem ? Connecting vowel ? — 4 § 2S0, Note 1. — δ Syntax ? — 6 § 73, 5. — 7 § 108, 5. Χ. 9-15.] FINAL CHARGE OF THE GREEKS. 97 9. Έπει δ' ήσαν κατά το ευωνυμον των Ελλτρων κέρας, εΰεισαν οί ff Ελληνες, μη προσάγοιεν 1 προς το κέρας, καΐ περιπτύξαντες αμφοτερωθεν αυτούς κατακοψειαν και εδο- κει αύτοϊς άναπτύσσειν το κέρας, και ποιησασθαι" όπισθεν τον ποταμο'ν. 10. Εν ω δε ταύτα εβουλευοντο, και δ// βασιλεύς παραμειψαμενος εις το αυτό σχτ}μα κατεστησεν άντίαν* την φάλαγγα, ώσπερ το πρώτον* μαχούμενος συνηει. 'Ως δε εΙΒον οί "Ελληνες εγγύς τε οντάς καϊ παρατεταγμένους, αυσις παιανισαντες επγεσαν πολύ ετι προθυμότερον η το πρόσθεν? 11. Οί δ αυ βάρβαροι ουκ εΒεχοντο, αλλ εκ πλεονος η το προσθεν εφευγον • οι δ επε&ίωκον μέχρι κώμης τινός. 1'2. Ενταύθα δ έστη- σαν οι' Ελληνες ' ύπερ yap ττ}ς κώμης γηλοφος ην, εφ ου ανεστράφησαν ol αμφι βασιλέα, πεζοί μεν ουκετι, των δε Ιππέων 6 λόφος ενίπλι,σθη, ώστε ' το ποιου μενον μη γιγνωσκειν? Καϊ το βασίλειον σημειον οράν 9 εφασαν, α€τον τίνα χρυσούν επί πελτης επι ξύλου ανατεταμενον. 13. Επει δε και ενταύθ εχωρουν οί ' Ελληνες, λειπου σι όη και τον λοφον οι ιππείς ■ ου μην ert ασροοι, αλλ άλ- λοι άλλοθεν εψιλοντο δ 6 λόφος τών ίππε'ων 11 τε\ος δε καϊ πάντες απεχώρησαν. 11. Ό ουν Κλέαρχος ουκ ανε- βίβαζεν επί τον λόφον, αλλ υπ αυτόν στησας το στρά- τευμα, πέμπει Λυκιον τον Συρακόσιον και άλλον επί τον λόφον, καί κελεύει, κατιΖόντας 11 τα υπέρ του λόφου, τι εστίν απαγγείλαι. 13 15. Καί 6 Λυκιος ηλασε τε, καί ιΒων απαγγέλλει οτι φευγουσιν α^α κράτος. Σχεδόν δ οτε ταύτα ην, καί ήλιος ε&υετο. 1 Why optative? — 1 Explain the use of this infinitive. — 8 1 I. _♦ § n;o χ_ι | .; i._* §108, 6 and 8. __ • 1 103 (end).— » §53,3 an 174. — la Seedfer. irticiple denote ? — w § 108, 4, II. 7 98 AFTER THE BATTLE. [X. 16-19. 16. 'Ενταύθα δ' έστησαν οι "Ελληνες, κα\ θεμενοι τα οττΧα ανεπαύοντο • και άμα μεν εθαυμαζον, οτι ουδαμού Κύρος φαίνόιτο, ούδ' αΧΧος απτ αυτού ουδείς τταρειη • ου γαρ τ}δεσαν αυτόν τενθηκότα, αΧΧ εικαζον η διωκοντα οίγεσθαι η καταΧηψόμενόν 1 τι ιτροεΧηΧακεναι. 17• Και αυτοί εβουΧεύοντο, ει αυτού μειναντες τα σκευοφορα ev- ταυθα αηοιντο, η αττίοιεν εττι το στρατοιτεδον. Εδοξεν ουν αυτοΐς αττιεναι • καϊ αφικνούνται αμφι δορττηστον εττι τ ας σκηνάς• 18. Ταύτης μεν ουν της ημέρας τούτο το τεΧος ey ενετό. ΚαταΧαμβανουσι δε των τε αΧΧων 'χρημά- των τα ττΧεΐστα διηρπασμενα, και ει τι σιτιον η ττοτον ην* κα\ τας άμαξας μεστας αΧευρων καϊ οϊνου, ας παρεσκευά- σατο Κύρος, ίνα, ει ττοτε σφοδρά το στράτευμα Χαβοι ένδεια, διαδοιη τοις f ΕΧΧησιν • ήσαν δ αύται τετρακοσιαι, ως ελεγοζ/το, άμαξαι, και ταύτας τότε οι συν βασιΧεΐ διηρ- ττασαν. 19. * Ώστε 2 αδειττνοι ήσαν οι ττΧεΙστοι των Έλ- Χηνων • ήσαν δε και ανάριστοι, ττριν yap δη καταΧύσαι το στράτευμα προς άριστον, βασιΧευς εφάνη. Ταυτην μεν ουν την νύκτα ούτω διεγενοντο. 1 § 277, 3. — 2 §237. NOTE>. In the year b. c. 407, Cyrus, the younger son of Darius, King of ι .a, was appoiir • ommand i>orts of Asia Minor, and satrap irjgia^ and Cappado* ! to take tomo- kged in war with the Atl. r the at Sard; to an alliance ο had j to the comma Aegospotami (b. c. h had la- ears (b. c. 431 - 4 1, and Artaxerxee, his son, succeeded to t: Μ, who was present at his was accused by Tissaphernes, the satrap of the south- noes of Asia V accusation was be! raxerxes. 18, and would have put him to deatii ession of I him hack . if possible, to wrest the t: th the Greeks had convinced him of their now cor. > f llo we •nnesian war. tmempt 1 f these to eir Dndei u he eomm< that h in th of p. c. 401. marched through PI Cilicia, rotted the Euphrates at Thapsaeus, and 100 GREEK LESSONS. proceeded to the plain of Cunaxa, near Babylon. Here he was met by the Persian army, numbering nine hundred thousaud, under Arta- xerxes. Cyrus had about one hundred thousand Asiatics, and four- teen thousand Greek mercenaries. In the battle Cyrus was killed in an attempt to slay his brother, and the expedition was abandoned. The army, under the command of Xenophon, the historian of the ex- pedition, made a retreat from Babylon to the shores of the Euxine, a distance of sixteen hundred miles, in which the TT encountered in- credible difficulties and dangers. The following brief summary of Book I. will assist in understanding the narrative : — Chap. I. On the death of Darius, and the accession of Artaxerxes to the throne of Persia, Cyrus is accused by Tissaphernes of plotting against the new king. Cyrus is arrested by his brother, but on his mother's intercession he obtains his liberty and returns to his satrapy. He now secretly raises an army, part of which are Greeks, in order to make war against his brother. II. Cyrus sets out from Sardis, and marches through Lydia, Phry- gia, and Lycaonia, into Cappadocia. Before arriving at the Cilician pass he is met by Epyaxa, wife of Syennesis, the king of Cilicia. Soon after his arrival at Tarsus Syennesis is induced by his wife to have an interview with him. III. The Greeks suspect the real object of the expedition, and refuse to go farther. By the persuasion of Clearchus they are in- duced to follow Cyrus, who promises them higher pay, and says that the expedition is against Abrocomas, who was somewhere on the Euphrates. IY. Cyrus proceeds to Issus, where he is joined by his fleet; passes the Pylae Syriae ; two Greek generals, Zenias and Pasion, desert the expedition. At Thapsacus, on the Euphrates, Cyrus dis- closes the real object of the expedition. The army mutiny; bu % influenced by fresh promises and the example of Menon, one of their commanders, they are induced to cross the river. V. The army marches through a desert country along the left bank of the Euphrates, to a point opposite Charmande. They suffer from want of provisions, and many of the beasts of burden perish. A quarrel arises between Clearchus and Menon, which is with difficulty settled by Cyrus. NOTES ON ANABASIS, 1, I. 101 VL Traces of t: troops are BOl Orontes. .1 rela- tive of Cyrus, oilers to hasten forwar :ne horsemen and lie in ambush lor then Hi >. however, found to % e in correspond with the king, and is tried and put to de. VII. Cyrus enters Babylonia, ami romises t D case th• The next day, 1 army in order of the King ; after which, supposing his brother will not hazard a I roceeds lees cautiously. VIII. I vdly they see the enemy advancing battle, and ha ν prepare for action. . on the banks of th• to Sight tl troops opposed to them. atta and ls sla The character of Cyrus, ikes and plm rue, and advances against the Greeks, by sed. CB 1. 1. Δαριίου . . . γίγνονται, 1 here were born Udo sons. Darius w» ia from i. of \Uv and W, see Leasou XXI V ή<ΗΚν« F — far£rTcv<, ^βούλιτο, Ίταρών *τνγχαν«, happened to be present, f τνγχάνω ? — Κΰρον %k ρ.€ταιτ^τΓ€ται, he sends for Cyrus (• force of tl - καί στρατηγό v, h- ha &< καί (also) OOlltmti στρατηγών with σ-ατράιτην. ΤΙ π καί . . . hi, falls stands 1>•ί λ. :i these particle•, dirc8ci{c, ^ΐΓοίη<τ€ ι we should uso the ]>1ΐφ• tld of to Tissaph• in. ■ ; in is succ^-l enmity of ΤΪΜφίΜΠΜΙ to Cyrus. — λαβών. — J* φίλον -άν^βη, μ- αναβαίνω - Παρράχτιον, 102 GREEK LESSONS. 3. 4τ€λ€υτησ€ : the aorist is sometimes used where we should use the pluperfect, especially after such adverbs of time as lircC, €ΐτ€ΐ8ή, &os, irpiv, &c. Give the formation of this verb. — κατ€<ττη, become established in the kingdom. See καθίο-τημι. — διαβάλλ€ΐ . . . αύτω, accuses Cyrus to his brother (saying) that he is plotting against him. — €•π•ιβουλ€υοι is put in the optative, because διαβάλλ€ΐ is in the historical present. — 6 hi, and he, i. e. the King. — ws άΐΓθκτ€νών, for the purpose of putting him to death. Account for the accent. — Ιξαιτησαμί'νη αυτόν, lit. leaving begged him off (for herself). 4. «s άιτήλθβ, when he departed. — KivSuvcvo-as refers to the danger he had just escaped. — tfircus, how. — eirC, in the power of. — άντ' IkcCvov, in- stead of him. — Παρΰσ-ατι$ uev 8ή . . . ύττηρχ€ τω Κυρω, now Cyrus Md his mother Pary satis (i. e. to support him), tfo-ris 8c, &c. corresponds to this clause, and gives a second advantage which Cyrus had. 5. 8vtos, {kcCvos, 8s. — αύτώ. rvWiyts ; also of λέγω, to speak f — ίν Χ€ρρονήσ-ω τη KaTavmrcpas 'Αβύδου, in the Chersontsus, which is over against Abydos, ii < hersonesus ; Abydos was Mysia. — τόνδ€ rbv τρόιτον, in the following manntr. — ήγάσ-θη . . . δίδωσ-ιν, he came to esteem . the aorist to the 1. | 2 (άναβαίνιι . . . άνέβη). 1 θί the ofabout$5.4« {-lion (Anah. I. 7, 18) estimates the Daric at twe: i.mas, w about $3 value). Γ doable, in parison with gold, in ancient times tha w, άπά, with. — Ικ••« όρμώμ€νο5, (repeatedly) making forays (opw>as) from the Chersonesus; observe — vtrip, beyond. — tois . . . oLkoOctv, those dwelling, the dwellers, — ^κούο-αι, uilangly. — τοΰτο . . . στράτιυμ,α, and thus this army also was supported secretly fur lam ; τούτο belongs Ιο τ6 στράτα^α. 10. ων with <τυγχαν€ν. — και . . . μασθόν, and asks of him merca ' ico thuuMi ι 1 1 υ u sa n d mercenaries | ree months. — «•*... τών άντιστασ-ιωτών, intimating that he should thus be superior to those opposed >ce note on I. 6. — ούτω Trtpi-ycvopvos άν ovtw ττ«ριγ«νοιτο dv. — Ίτρόσ6«ν . . . irpiv, Is/bn , . . that — καταλύο-αι, to terminate (the war), i. v. to make peace. — wpos, wUL 11. τν, see Lesson Χ Χ Π — ώ* . . . ο-τρατιύ- €<γΘολ, pretending that he wished to lead an army amon The ions were a wui ι fully subdued by the Persians. — ώ? . . . Πιο-ιδών, because (as he said) the / Home were giving trouble. — Στυρ,φάλιον. Stymphalus was a town in κοΛ τούτους, these also, L »crates, as w» 11 •xenus and At . . . φνγο* π he were int* to war I essaphernes in company with thr MiUsian pupil should be pturided with an an< Lent atlas, ■ daemon, Τ wuji &c• 104 GREEK LESSONS. CHAPTER II. 1. ΈττεΙ 8* εδόκει ήδη αύτω, when at length it seemed good to him. — άνω, upward, i. e. into the upper countries of Asia, or those remote from the sea. Cyrus had now completed his arrangements for his expedition against his brother, and it appeared to be a suitable time to begin his march. — τήν |x^v ιτρόφασαν ειτοιείτο, he made the pretext. — μεν here stands without any- thing opposed to it in the rest of the sentence, but the clause implied by the text would be, but he was in reality marching against the king. — εκ, out of. καΐ . . . Ελληνικό ν, and he assembles, as if against these, both the barbarian and the Grecian army. — ενταύθα, hereupon. — λαβόντι . . . στράτευμα, taking all the army which he had. The antecedent is attracted into the rela- tive clause ; see § 154. — . σ-υναλλαγεντι irpos tovs οΐκοι, having become rec* onciled to iAose at home ; see σ-υναλλάσ-σ-ω. — 8 εΐχε στράτευμα, the army which he had. Another case of attraction. — 8s . . . ξενικού, who commanded for him the mercenary force in the cities, i. e. the Ionian cities. — εν tcus ττό- λ€<τι, has the position and force of an adjective. — ξενικοί), sc. στρατεύ- jacitos. — λαβόντα : in the preceding sentence, λαβόντι is used because it stands in immediate connection with Κλεάρχω. Here λαβόντα is removed from Hevia, to which it refers, and is connected more closely with the omitted subject of ήκειν, agreeing with it in case ; see 138, Note 8 (end). — ττλήν όττόσ-οι, except as many as. The antecedent of oirocroi, if expressed, would be a demonstrative pronoun in the gen. after ιτλήν. 2. 'Έκάλεσ-ε δε και, and also he ordered. — έκελευσ-ε, urged. — νιτοσ-χό- μενο$, having promised, from ύιτισ-χνεΌμαι ; stem ? — ει ... εστρατεύετο, if he should succeed well in those things for which he was making the expedition. — ταύτα the antecedent of α is not expressed. — εάν καταττράξτ) might be used instead of ει καταττράξειεν. — εστρατεύετο is not affected by the princi- ple of indirect discourse, as στρατεύοιτο (representing στρατεύομαι of the direct form) would be ambiguous. — μή ιταύοτασ-θαι, not to cease. — κατα- γάγοι, should lead home ; from κατάγω ; stem ? — τταρήσ-αν cis Σάρδει$, they arrived at Sardis. Πάρειμι signifies rest in a place, yet here it has the idea of motion from its construction with εΙ$. — Sardis was the capital of Lydia, and at this time the residence of Cyrus. 3. £2ενία$ μεν δή, Xenias accordingly, i. e. in accordance with the in- structions of Cyrus. — tovs εκ των ττόλεων, those from (in) the cities. — οττλίταε is in apposition with tovs εκ των ττόλεων. The Grecian foot sol- diers were divided into, 1. όττλϊται, heavy armed, who wore heavy armor, and fought with broad shields and long spears ; 2. ψιλοί, light armed, who fought with darts, arrows, and slings, and were employed chiefly as skir- mishers ; 3. ττελτασταί, targeteers, who were armed with a small round shield, called Ίτ&τη. The heavy-armed soldiers (όττλΐται) were divided into τάξειε and λόχοι. — ds τετρακισ-χιλίου^, to the number of four thousand. — γυμνήταε, light-armed; from γυμνοΞ, naked. The term was applied to those light-armed soldiers who were not protected with the shield and thorax. — NOTES ON ANABASIS, 1, n. Quantity of the termination -as in γυμνήτα? ? — a>s ircvraxoo-iovjs, indrtd. — ώς, when joined with BUM y. — ό Mcyapcvs : Megara was situated h .nth. — ήν agrees with ovtos, its nee nd is mderttood with th- των . . . (ττρατΓυομί'ν^ •. military e/N rations ; see § 169, 1. 4. Ούτοι. The troop» thus far enumerated formed (fee whole of the • - ied bin on . — hi is 1 I somethi: £ — μείζονα . . . fropoo-KCVTjv ι be greater than as (if it w» i••) against the Pisidians. — ώ«, to. — η «δυ- νατό τάχιστα, as he could (go) most quickly. καΐ βα<τιλ«ν* uiv δή, and dV | WCOOrdingly the king. — rliril ήκοικτι : the • where we ahou — ιταρ ά, /n*/« ,• the mew of ιταρά with 1 ace? — «Γρηκα, Μ ti-rrov — ώρμάτο, ^<> ίφ* ή, at which : the loss of ' I'wL — τον Σάτνρον θηρ€νσαι, to have caught the Satyr, i. tike «κδ«ϊραι ι or γυμνάσ -eu in κ«ράσα$, by mingling, lit. having mill•, I this DQ Kcpavvv^ik. 14. &€ηθήναι, (rem Wop.at. How doe• thii infinitive differ from γνανά- ι J 7 f Is it like o-vyy€W: ν 1 ^ληι as of ταχθήναι and στήναν. — σνντά{αι Sk ίκαστον τον$ «αυτόν, and that (general) marshal his own troofts. With ίκαστον, se. σ-τρατηγόν, σ-υντάξαι depend• on eaaXeap» Sow do 1 re• differ from latere*! — hr\ τίττάρων, /our deep. — ol Ut ivov ■ oi ; 10t•, 1), while plunder t with aurovs understood, the su κατάκοιτη ναι. — vrro, se« | V.<7. 1. — οί 8V, hut others (say that) having been left behind, kc. — \Ητολ€ΐφ&ντα$, frmn ύΐΓολ€(ΐΓω. — ιΐτα . . . airoX&Hkw, after that, wandering al»out th< I — 8* οδν, and it is certain. ήκον, see | 1 3. — clo^Xoxrcv : observe tl t tlie aorist after adverbs ρ.€Τ€ΐΓ^ττ€το . . . ίαντον, sent reptatedhj for ό δ* ούτι . . . Ιφη, he, however, both said that my time before come into the hands of any ον (like ώς), to the number of, about. — αυτοί, they themselves. — ιταραμηριδίοις, cuisses, i. e. armor for the thighs. — ψιλήν, unprotected, i. e. by a helmet ; he wore a tiara instead of a helmet. 7. δ€ is the connective. — €Ϊχον καί, had also. — ιτροαετωττίδια, frontlets, i. e. armor for the forehead. — ττροστδρνίδια, breastplates. — μαχαίρας, swords. 8. καί ήδη τ€ . . . καί, see note on § 1. — χρόνω, &c, and in a very short time aflerwards it appeared like something black. — €irl πολύ, reaching far off". χαλκός τις, something like brass (properly bronze). — καταφαν€ΐς, plainly visible. 9. λ€υκοθώρακας, in white corselets. The white corselets were probably made of linen. — 4χόμ€νοι δ£ τούτων γ€ρροφόροι, and next to these wicker- shield-bearers. The -ye'ppov was a rectangular shield of wicker-frame and covered with ox-hide. — ττοδήρεσ-ι, reaching to the feet. — Αιγύπτιοι. These were probably descendants from those Egyptian colonies planted in Asia Minor by Cyrus the Elder, for the Egyptians at home had already revolted from the Persians. — κατά 2θνη, by nations. 10. irpb . . . αλλήλων, in front of these moved chariots at a considerable distance from one another. Supply liropeveTO. — €K . . . βλέποντα, extending from the axle-trees obliquely, and others under the seats pointing (lit. looking) towards the ground. — ά*ττοτ€ταα€να, from άιτοτ6ίνω. — 8τω έντυγχάνοι^ν (§ 248, 1) : this contains the idea of the drivers of the chariots. The direct discourse would be 6τω αν €ντυγχάνωσ-ιν, ivhomever they may meet. — r\S\ γνώμη, kc, and the plan was to drive into and cut to pieces the ranks of the Greeks. — Ιλώντα, fut. act. participle from Ιλαύνω, nominative with άρματα understood ; the nominative is used as if some verb like were designed preceded, instead of ή γνώμη ήν. 11. 6 uevToi Κΰρος «ΐ -irev, as regards, however, what Cyrus smd ; 6 relates to τοΰτο below. — 4ψ€ύσ-θη τοΰτο, in this (as to this) he icas deceived. — σ-ιγτ} ως άνυστόν, as silently as oossible ■ ή(τνχτ), quietly, ΐσ-ω, with equal step, sc. βήματι. ">TES ON ANABASIS, 1, vni. Ill 12. Iv τοντω, η. τω καιρώ, Μ (R*f S PCOJ tM. — ίβ^α, cried aloud. — κατά ucVov. Eli centre ; see | ότ•. . . . sfsj, Mere ; see | καν = καΐ αν. — νικώμ.^. - ττίττοίη- ται : to the future, to denote the certainty that the action will take place by rep re senting it μ already cooap] see § to 7. όρων . . . στίφο$, I S seeing that the centre MM το μ^σ-ον is Med substantively. — άκουων, fcc, ΜβΤΜ ΓΜ UMSl //s, * — φοβούα€νο5, αντω . . . Ιχοι, 6«/ he that he was taking care that it should be mil ; in din , ίρ,οι juXci διτωί καλώ* IJQ| 1). — 8oJ »Am | why pfW 14. ir\ . . . pivov, remaining still in the same place. — U τών Γη irpoono'v- rwv,from thorn who were still coming up. — ov irdw προ*, not very near h\ n, as if it were an adjective meaning near. — κατ€θ«άτο, kept maveyi' Η«νοφ«ν. Xmm jImB is mentioned here I Β the Anabasis. He was not a regula • cian arm Ίιιη- νπτ*λάσ-α$ »S ο-νναντήσαι, x pressed by the iniinitiv. k which I expressed by the Latin infinitive ? — ίπτιλάο-α*, from νττιλαννω. — d n -napayyiWoi^ w h ether he had any common see § 24 τταραγγιλλιις τι , - 4•π•νο-τήσ*α*, S& τον tinrov, I halted. — δτν . . . καλά, fi rices and victims wer• ; ttr\ od ; καλά 16. 8ca τών τάξπαν Ιό ντο*, going through the ranks. — <τνν0ηαα, the watch• word. — 6τ\ h ; see § 241, 1 — καΐ 6si and he, ; arsons. 17. άλλα . . . Ιστα», / both acccftt it, and this let it be. — els τήν Παντού χώραν, (•> his own post, i. e• at the bend of the barbarian — 8ιβχ«τη; *rt. — £ιταια>αζον tc, both sang the paean smug two paean 18. «s & iropcvopivv, but when, as they were advanr [y αυτών. — ίξ€κνααιν«, fluctuate d. — το 4iriAciiropj shouted IXtktv. — irotovvTfS, in order to cause ; see § 277, 3. — tois tirrrois. to the scy: front and I irplv 84 τόξευαα €ξικν€ΰτ6αι, but before an an αυ- τών : tee | 87 \. Why is μή u>ed betel θ*ίν I — τάξα, ^icm / — l-rwfcu, from Ιιτομιαι. 112 GREEK LESSONS. 20. τα δ* άρματα, kc, but the chariots were borne along, some . . . others. — κενά, empty. — ot 8' εττεί ιτροΐδοιεν, but whenever they saw them ; see § 233. — εστί δέ tforis, there was one who, now and then one. — κατ€λήφθη, from καταλαμβάνω. — εκπλαγείς, from εκπλήττω, having been terrified. — ουδέ τούτον παθεϊν, that not even this one suffered. — ούδ* άλλος, and not even any other : επαθεν, from πάσχω. 21. το καθ* αυτούς, that (part of the army) which was opposed to themselves. — ήδόμενος, though delighted. — ούδ* ώς εξήχθη διώκειν, teas not even thus in- duced to join in the pursuit : ώς ; see § 29, Note. — εξήχθη, from εξάγω. — συνεσπειραμενην, from σ*υσπειράω, drawn closely together. — επεμελειτο, he closely watched. The object of this verb ? — 6 τι ποιήσει βασιλεύς, see § 241 (end). — κα\ γαρ, and he watched the movements of the king for. — ηδει αύτδν oVi, lit. he knew him that ; ηδει, from οΐδα. 22. καΐ iravT€S δε, and, in fact, all. — μέσον . . . ηγούνται, occupying the centre of their own army, lead them into action. — νομίξοντες . . . είναι, thinking that thus they are both in the safest place ; ήν • . . {[, if their force shall be on both sides of them; αυτών depends on εκατέρωθεν; €Ϊναι, see § 226, 1. The direct discourse would be ούτω καΐ εν άσφαλεστάτω έσμεν (§ 200, Note 7), ήν fj ή ισχύς ημών εκατέρωθεν (§ 223) • καΐ εί τι ιταραγγ€ΐλαι χρήζουν, ήμίσει άν χρόνω αίσθάνοιτο το στράτευμα (§ 224 ; § 247, with Note 3 ; § 211). 23. καΐ . . . δή τάτε, and indeed then. — έχων, though occupying. — #μως, yet. — ε*ξω Ιγένετο, extended beyond, lit. became without ; έγένετο, from γίγνο- μαι. — εκ του άντίου, from opposite side ; αυτοΰ depends on the adverb. — τεταγμένοις, from τάσσω. — αύτοΰ and αΰτώ refer to the king. 24. δείσας μή, fearing that. — κατακόψη (sc. δ βασιλεύς), may cut to pieces; see § 218 and § 248, Note. — άποκτεϊναι, to have slain. Explain the construction here, and the time denoted by the aorist infinitive. 25. ή τροπή, the rout. — είς τδ διώκειν, to the pursuit. — πλην πάνυ όλί- γοι, only a very few. — σχεδδν . . . καλούμενοι, chiefly the so-called table- companions ; see § 142, 2. 26. καΐ τδ άμφ* εκείνον στίφος, and the dense body-guard around him. — ήνέσχετο, did not restrain himself; see άνέχω, § 105, Note 3. — ιάσθαι : the present infinitive has three distinct uses. What are they ? see § 202, 1 ; § 203 and Note 1. 27. παίοντα, while striking the king. — καΐ . . . εκατέρου, and there, while both the king and Cyrus were fighting and their attendants in behalf of each. — δττόσοι, how many. — άπέθνησκον is a substantive clause governed by λέγ€ΐ. — εκείνω, i. e. the king. — ίκειντο, lay dead. 28. δ πιστότατος . . . θεράπων, the most faithful to him of his sceptre-bearing attendants. — πεπτωκότα, fallen ; see § 280 and § 246. From πίπτω. — περιπεσεΐν, depends on λέγεται. The aorist infinitive has two distinct uses. AVhat are they ? 29. επισφάξαι . . . Κύρω, to kill him upon Cyrus ; see § 187. — εαυτόν is the object of έπισφάξασθαι. — άκινάκην, scimetar. — ετετίμητο, from τιμάω. NOTES ON ANABASIS, 1, x. 113 CHAPTER X 1. Έντανθα 8ή, thereupon, then. The narrative is now resumed from III., having been interrupted by the >keteh of the nhmrtof of Cyrus. — διώκων, while pursuing. — tUnriirrti, break into. The historic pres- ent ; the singular is em pi .use Ρασ -iXcvs is the most important subject. — fv6tv ώραωντο, whence they started. — έλ£γοντο, there were said, or m< I 'he distance was said to be, reeks; irp6s gene ral 4ict(vov$ understood, the an tec < ou — άντιταχθΛπ•€$, I been drawn up against them. — οι ok . . . άττίθανον, some of them also Jell. — αήν . . . y(, yet, however. — Jvtos . . . tylvovro, came within thtir rt'irh. 4. 8ιάτχον αλλήλων, were distant from each other. — ol uUv refal to ol "Ελληνα. - ω« ιτάνταϊ νικωντ«, as if they were victorious over all. The right wing of the king's army wia ri ill :s. — ω? ήδη iravTts viK»ivTts, <« ifthty ■•* all conquerors. left wing of the king's army waa routed <• does η the pai ■ 5. δ' αν, on the other hand ; ήκουσ*, kc heard from Tissaphernes tl Greeks were victorious over 1 />osed to them, and had gone forward pursuit ; οίχοντα. respond with vucitv, |S4S, also §20'. — tl irfu- irotlv rivas, whether they should send som> mood, see § 1 present mbjunctiT• might hare been need, a* I would be, ττ^ττω^ν Tivas ή iravrts foutv ; — άρήξοντ**, to rend* r n>'d. Wlttl the time ι 6. fv τοντω καΐ (JaonAtvs, during this time the king also. — OTpacf^vrcs, faced about. — ως . . . 8t{6utvoi, as if he (tlie kii. 'runcing in ■ ι -rive him : foff fcbfl 0QDSI nn-t [OH, SM | i ;i 278, 1. — ί • • . άιτήγαγ€ν, but By the same way he had passed beyond the left wing (of the Greeks), by this he also led his for - καΐ tovs . . . αντομ.ολήσ•αντα$, those who, being over , had deserted in the battle. When, at fii idedly in hably desert • < 1 th»• king. These ware eom] by th•* Qreekl lo tin• tfcail arms, and Μ sent to the camp. 7. ο γαρ Τι*τσ-αφ^ρνη$. Tissaphernes was stationed on the left wing of the royal army ; so, of course, opposed I lit wing of the army of Cyrus. II was posted, and on his rigl way when Tissaplc I _'•••!, and allowed liini to pats between themselves and the river to the camp. — σ-ννόδω, encounter. — 8 114 GREEK LESSONS. αύτονδ, i. e. Tissaphernes and his "band. — γ€ν4ο*θαι : when do the present and aorist infinitive retain their time ? 8. μ€Ϊον £χων απηλλάγη, after he withdrew, being worsted; απηλλάγη from απαλλάσσω. — σ-υνταξάμ€νοι, having marshalled their forces, 9. Iircl 8', but when. — κατά, opposite to. — π€ριπτύξαντ€9, having sur- rounded. — ανάπτυσσαν, to fold back the wing. The line was at right angles with the river. It is now changed parallel to the river, the front facing the enemy, and the rear resting on the river. — καΐ . . . ποταμόν, and to make the river in the rear, i. e. to form a line of battle parallel with the river. 10. Iv . . . 4βουλ€υοντο, but while (the Greeks) were deliberating on these things. — καΐ δή, even now. — παραμ€ΐψάμ€νθ9, having passed by. — άντίαν, opposite, — ώ(ΠΓ€ρ, as. — μαχοΰμ€νος : the force of this participle ? — ctvvtJ€i, from σ*ΰν€ΐμι (συν, €Ϊμι). — 3ντα$ refers to the king and his forces. — πολύ ίίτι προθυμότ€ρον, with much greater ardor. 11. 8' αυ", but again. — ck irXeiovos, from a greater distance, i. e. sooner than before. 12. ΰπφ, above. — γήλοφο$, a hill. — άν€<Γτράφη<ταν, they faced about ; from αναστρέφω. — π€ζοι μ£ν ούκέτι, infantry no longer. The infantry had fled, the cavalry alone remained. — 4ν€πλήσθη, from Ιμπίπλημι. — το «irov- ούμ€νον, what was doing (or going on). — α€τ6ν . . . άνατ€ταμ€νον, a golden eagle upon a buckler, with spread wings ; άνατ€ταμ€νου, from άνατ€ίνω. — eiri ξΰλου, on (a pole of) wood or on the shaft of a spear. 13. €iT€l hk και, but when also. — άλλοι άλλο0€ν, some in one direction, and some in another. — Ιψιλοΰτο, began to be cleared. — t&os, at last. 14. ουκ . . • λόφον, did not attempt to march up on the hill ; see § 200, Note 2. — κελίΰα . . • απάγγειλαν, orders them to observe what is beyond the kill, and bring back word what there is there ; ri Ιστιν, see § 243 ; τί €Ϊη might have been used, see § 200, Note 1, and § 201 (end). 15. καί, and also. — δτι : how used here ? — σ\€δον . . . €δυ€το, lit. and about the time when these things took place, the sun was also setting. 16. &ττησ•αν, halted. — καΐ . . . ά퀕π•αΰοντο, rested under arms, lit. having put down their arms, rested. — καΐ άμα : there is no corresponding άμα 8e, but owing to the intervening explanatory clauses, the construction is changed, and the correlative sentence begins with καΐ αυτοί, &c. — φαί- νοιτο, see § 250, Note. In what mood would this be after a primary tense ? ηδ€0-αν, see § 130, 2. — τ€0νηκότα (from θνήσ-κω), see § 280 and § 246. — €Ϊκα£ον, they conjectured. — διώκοντα οΙ'χ€ο~θαι, sc. αυτόν, see § 200, Note 3, and § 279, 2, Note. — ή . . . ιτροδληλακέναι, or that he had marched for- ward to seize upon something, i. e. some post or fortress ; •π•ρο€ληλακ€ναι, from ιτρο€λαυνω. What time do these infinitives denote ? 17. αυτοί, they themselves, in distinction from Cyrus. — αΰτοΰ, there. — άγοιντο, see § 244 (end). Could the present subjunctive have been used ? What was the direct question ? — ενταύθα, to that quarter. — $>o|;€V . . . autevai, accordingly it seemed best to them to go away. NOTES ON THE ANABASIS 1, X. 115 18. των Αλλων χρημάτων, of their other effects. — (In = ο τι, ich. Those whom 1 • mentioned are the 17. On the next day he them what he promised IK. The same men were when these things happened. Γλ They went wher- lired 20. They immediately cast away their 128 GREEK LESSONS. bracelets wherever they happened to be standing. 21 r He (always) gives what he promises. 22. He cried out to all whom he met, that the king was advancing with a large army. 23. We will not follow the guide whom Cyrus shall give, lest he lead us (to a place) whence it will not be pos- sible to go forward. 24. Cyrus rode on horseback when- ever he wished to exercise himself. INDIRECT DISCOURSE, §241-248. 1. We are able. 2. They said, 1 " We are able." 3. They said that they were able. 4 They answered that they did not know. 5. They answered, " We do not know." 6. The soldiers said that Cyrus was dead. 7. He says that he is doing this. 8. He says 2 that he is writing. "&". He says that if he should (hereafter) have anything, he would give it. 10. He said that if he had a mina, he woidd (now) give it to the slave. 11. The road is steep. 12. He says that the road is steep. 13. He said that he was writing. 14. He said that he would write. " 15. They say that he would come if this should happen. 16. They said that they came there to see the battle. 17. He said that he did not remember me. 18. .He says that he would give him a talent, if he should speak the truth. 19. He says that he would not trust the guide which Cyrus should give. 20.' He thought that if he should desire to announce anything to the army, they would perceive 3 it in half the time. 21. I wrote a letter to him, (saying) that I would come on the next day. 22. I wonder that no one among you is angry. 23. He announced to the king that he would come. 2-4. He asked whether there was any one wiser than I. 25. Tis- saphernes accuses Cyrus to his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against him. 26. He perceived that the army of CAUSAL SENTEN 129 MenOD was already in Cilicia. 27. He says 2 that lie should have written, 4 if he had been able. 28. H< ' that he should Write, if he should (ever) be able. 29. He s (hat I Ε he were abla SO, I first an- noun him that Cyrui marching 1 against him. :u. 1 know that he would writ should be able. 32. I know that he would have written, if he had been ι thai if j you w< Cyras, when he Ι ι ' -.it-ii, the paternal empire (whkb) both (βΧΐ tO the BOUth tO th m where men dwell on account of heat, and to the north to that region where (they cannot live) on account of the cold, but the friends of my broth raps all in the middle of these. But if quer, it beoa of these (countries). So that I do not t may nol have anything which 1 Ι ι each of my friends it' we shall be W b that ] may η enough to whom [ η 1 will al 1 υ&φημί; see ate. 1 1 2 ge 112. 4 What would kbit be in I * (Tee the partici: β Anything which, ο τι. * όσος. • If we shall be Sh ai> cu γίνηται. Βθθ § 184, 4. » Use και. VL SENT 0-257. 1. I will Lrive him a talent, because he spoke the truth. 2. We honor the general, because he is brave, St We are •lished, I the wise are not honored. 4. Would that my son had conquered, δ. Ο that Cyrus would c 130 GREEK LESSONS. 6. Ο that I had this power ! 7. that Cyrus were living ! 8. Ο that we had done these tilings ! 9. Let us go to the camp. 10. Let us not fear that the king will lead his army in this direction. Ii> Let us deliberate whether we will send the soldiers, or will go ourselves to the camp. 12. Call Menon, for he is nearest. 13. Would that he had arrived before the battle. 14. Be not astonished. 15, Would that he were alive, for he would not fear these dan- gers. 16. Ο that these things had happened as he wished ! 17. May you never see this. 18. He gave to him ten tal- ents, because he said to him that the king would not fight within ten days. 19. When the generals had come to- gether, they were surprised because Cyrus neither sent another to signify 1 what they should 2 do, nor appeared himself. * 20. Cyrus cried out to Clearchus to lead the army against 3 the 4 centre of the enemy, because the king was 5 there. 1 See § 277, 3. * See § 142, 2. ■ See § 243. 6 See § 250, Note. 8 Use κατά. THE INFINITIVE, § 258 - 273. 1. I told him to come. 1 2. I said that he came 2 3. He wishes to be 3 wise. 4. He said that he had been doing 4 this at that time. 5. He said that he was doing 5 this. 6. He says that he has done this. 7. He said that he had done this. 8. He commands him to go. 6 9. He says that he did 7 this. 10. "We are able to carry on war. Tttr He wishes to expel the army from the country. 12. I came to see you. ^tSr Clearchus narrowly escaped being stoned to death. 14> Xenophon left half the army to guard the camp. 15. They announced that Cyrus had conquered. 16. It is announced that Cyrus has conquered. 17. He THE PARTICIPLE. 131 said that he wished to go. 18. They learn to do this. ^H^ I will tell you, on condition that you remain silent. "^OvsThe enemy rode towards us, so that our army was ter- rified. 21. He said to Cyrus, that if he would give him a thousand horsemen, he would prevent the enemy from burn- ing the grass, and would make them unable to announce to king that they had seen the army. 22. AYe are about 8 to do tl, We are about to cross the river. 24 Cy- to go into the c; 1 See§'J»:<>. 1. ■ See§- 1 & (fine print). 4 S 1. The present infinitive has three distinct ι What ar * The present infinitive referring to time p: latively to the principal verb cXcyc ; f : it had 1 as an imperfect (as in tl.• it would have re fe rred to time past rela- tively tO fXfye. 1. THE PARTICIPLE, §275-280. 1. He goes up, taking TNsaphernesas his friend. 2. He happened to be present 3. II<• went up, having four hun- died heavy-armed men. 4. They seized the general for the purpose of potting him to death. 5. They were pres- ent with Cyme, loved him. G. He paid atten- to tlu 4 king, <>n ike 'ίση thai he was friendly to him. 7. He collects his forces, concealing them as much a< lie could. 8. He gave orders to the cities to take as man as possible phernes is plotting him. 9. Hi that some persons in Mile- plotting tl ne things, lik He took under >n those who were fleeing. ITT He asks, be- 96 he is his brother, that the king shall give him tl 132 GREEK LESSONS. cities. 12. And thus an army was secretly supported for him. 13. And thus he was supporting an army secretly. ~""t4r He urged Socrates, having taken as many men as pos- sible, to come, pretending that he was about to carry on war against the Thracians. 15. He was not displeased because they were carrying on war. 16. Cyrus was manifestly 1 troubled. 17. They came into the presence of the king with 2 golden bracelets. 18. Cyrus, being a boy, was pleased with these things. 19. In the reign of Cyrus 3 these things happened. 20. He sends men to do this. 21. He hap- pened to come. 22. He came secretly. "23>They stood and wept for a long time. 24. When you have read the letter, give it to me. 25. He went away unobserved 4 by Cyrus. 1 See § 280, Note 1. 8 Use the prep, hd with gen. 2 Use the participle. * Use λανθάνω with the participle. THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 1. When Cyrus hears this, he speaks as follows. 2. The king will come to fight λ on the following day. 3. He made a review of both the Greeks and the barbarians, while riding upon his horse. ""^STt is evident that he acts un- justly. 2 "^ I am conscious to myself of knowing nothing. 6. Aristippus, having been asked what those things 3 were * which it was necessary to teach 5 boys, replied, "What they will use when they become men." TsJn what 6 do those who are educated differ from the uneducated ? ^Sv Cyrus spoke boastfully when the battle 7 was about 8 to take place, but he was not very 9 boastful otherwise?^). Cyrus an- nounced to the soldiers to prepare, because (as he thought 10 ) there will be a battle. 7 10. I hear that his brother is dead. 11 11. He heard that Cyrus was 12 in Cilieia. 12. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 133 He assembled his forces as secretly as possible. 13. Cyrus ascended upon the mountain without opposition. 13 14. He announced to his generals to take their best and bravest men, on pre f phemes 14 wafl plotting against the cities. 15. As they (i. e. the army) were proceeding 15 from thence, there appeared tracks of horses. 16. Cyrus I the exiles, and, raising an army, besieged Mi- letue. 277, B. 9 μιΐλα. 2 Lit. doiiKj unjust (Jtinrjs. 277, Note 2. 3 What those thiii(js y τίνα. 11 a u Lit. no one opposing. 38, 1, Not. 14 ( I ite. ■:i. absolu' 1. • See | 98, 3. IXTKRKor.ATIVE 3, § 282. 1. Do j h me to come When will you do this 1 4 Is be aot a good man? 5. What are you <» you wish that I should say this ? 21. He asked him what he was doing. 3 22. He asked him what he should do. 23. Do you speak tamely of it, when I wanted little 13-4 GREEK LESSONS. of being stoned to death ? 24. Cyrus, when he had called 4 together the generals and captains of the Greeks, consulted how he should conduct 5 (make) the battle. 25. When 6 did the soldiers of the king arrive ? 26. Thales, having been asked how we might live best 7 and most justly, replied, "If 8 we do not ourselves do 9 (those things) which we blame in others." 27. He heard a noise, and asked 10 what the noise was. 1 See § 160, 2. * See § 256 and § 282, 2 (end). 8 The direct discourse would be ri ποπίς. 4 § 277, 1. 8 Use ttv. 5 See § 244. * Use δράω. 6 πότ€. 10 Use fjpero. T The accus. plur. neut. of άριστος* MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. Translate Into Greek. As this niLrlit , however, advanced, 1 fear fell upon the Greeks also, and there was a commotion and such a noise - natural- when 1 fear falls upon (a company of men). But Clearchoa ordered Tolm η Eleian, the best herald of (the heralds) of that time, 4 whom he happened to have with 5 him, he ordered this one to proclaim 6 silence, and to announce that the command"rs puhli that whoever will give information of the one (lit, of him who) win» has let loose 7 the ass among the arms, shall receive a reward a talent of silver. And when this was proclaimed, knew that their 8 fear was groundless, and the commanders safe. But at break of day (learchus ordered the Greeks to station themselves under arms in the order in which they were 9 when 10 the battle took place. 1 Such αϊ aturally happen, otov cIkos γίγν*σθαι. * I 277. 1. " See §276. J. te& • See § 141, Note 2. 6 Lit. by the side of himself. • Which they were, fjncp ςΐχον. • β I 3. » See § 230. II. Translate Into Greek. 1. There Cyrus and the army remained twenty days ; for the soldiers refused to go farther, for they already be- gan to suspect that they were going against the king, and 136 GREEK LESSONS. they said that they were not hired for this purpose. But ( ilearchue first attempted to compel his own soldiers to go; hut they threw (stones) both at him and at his beasts of burden when he began to advance. 2. And Clearchus then narrowly escaped being stoned to death. But, after- wards, when he knew that he would not be able to compel (them), he convened an assembly of his own soldiers. And first he stood weeping 1 a long time ; but they seeing him w< metered and were silent. And then he spoke somewhat as follows : — 3. ■* Fellow-soldiers, be not surprised that I am deeply grieved at the present state of affairs. For Cyrus became a friend to me, and honored me while a fugitive from my country both in other ways, and particularly by a gift of ten thousand darics. On receiving these, (lit., which having received) I did not lay (them) up for my private use; nor did I waste them in pleasure, but I expended them on you. 4. And first, indeed, I made Avar against the Thracians, and, with your assistance, I took vengeance (on them) in behalf of Greece, by driving 2 them out of the Chersonesus, when they wished 2 to take the land from the Greeks dwelling there. 3 But when Cyrus called (us), I went taking you, in order that if he should need anything, I might assist him in return for the favors which I had received from him. 5. But since you do not wish to go with me, it is quite 4 necessary for me either to abandon 2 you and enjoy the friendship of Cyrus, or to prove 2 false to him and go with you. But since you do not wish to ol>ey nor even to follow me, I will follow in company with you, and suffer whatever may be necessary. I think that you are to me both country, friends, and allies, and with you I think that I shall be honorable wherever I may be." 6. He spoke these (words). But the soldiers, both his own flit., those of him himself) and the rest, when they had heard these things, praised him because he refused to march against the kin" And more than two thousand MISCELLANEOUS EXEBCISES. 137 from Zenias and Pasion took 2 their arms and beasts of burden and encamped by the side of Clearchus. 7. But Cyrus, being both perplexed and grieved at these things, sent (repeatedly) for Clearchus. But he, however, did not wish to go, but sending a messenger without the knowl- edge of the soldiers, he told him to be of good cheer, inas- much as these things would be settled favorably. And he bade him (Cyrus) to send for him, but (when this had been done) he himself refused to go. 1 Lit. standing, he wept for a long time. 2 Use the part. 8 The Greeks dwelling there, τους cvoucovvras "Ελληνας, 4 Quite, δή. III. Translate into Greek. 1. But what I just now wrote, that the king was struck with alarm at the approach of the Greeks, was evident from this ; for, though on the preceding day he sent and ordered them to deliver up their arms, he then, at the rising of the sun, sent heralds concerning a truce. 2. But when they had come 1 to the (advanced) guards, they in- quired for the commanders. And when the (advanced) guards reported this, Clearchus, happening then to be in- specting the ranks, told the (advanced) guards to bid the heralds wait until he should be at leisure. 2 3. But when he had stationed the army so that the dense phalanx was in a favorable condition to be seen on all sides, and (so that) no one 3 of the unarmed was visible, he called the messengers, and he himself also came forward with both the best armed and best looking of his own soldiers, and told the rest of the generals (to do) the same. 4 4 But when they were in the presence of the messen- gers, he asked what they wished. 5 And they said they had come concerning a truce, as men who will be 6 duly author- L38 GREEK LESSONS. bed to announce both the (messages) from the king to the Greeks and those from the Greeks to the king. 5. But he answered, " Tell him then, that we must have (lit. there is need of a) battle first ; for we have no breakfast, nor is there any one who will dare 7 to speak to the Greeks con- cerning a truce without 8 (first) supplying a breakfast." 6. The messengers hearing these things rode away, and came back quickly ; from which it was also evident that the king was somewhere near, or some other person to whom orders 9 had been given to transact these things. They said that they (i. e. the Greeks) seemed to the king to say (what was) reasonable, and that they were come with guides who, if there should be a truce, would lead them whence they would have provisions. 7. But he (Clearchus) asked whether he was making a truce 10 merely (αντοΐς) for the men while going and returning (from the king), or (whether) there was to be a truce for the rest also. But they said, " For all ; until the (report) from you shall be announced 11 to the king." 8. And when they had said this, Clearchus, having caused them to withdraw, con- sulted ; and it seemed expedient to make the truce quick- ly, and to go quietly for the provisions and receive them. 9. And Clearchus said, " These (terms), indeed, seem good to me also. I will not, however, announce (our determina- tion) hastily, but I will delay until the messengers shall fear lest it may seem inexpedient to us to make the truce. I think, however," said he, " that the same fear will be present also to our soldiers." But when it seemed to be the fit time, he announced that he acceded to the truce, and immediately ordered them to lead (the way) to the provisions. 1 0. And they (the guides) led (the way) ; and Clearchus it (with them), intending, it is true, to make the truce, but nevertheless having his army in order (of battle) ; and he himself guarded the rear. And they met with trenches and canals full of water, so that 12 they were not able to MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 139 cross without bridges ; but they made crossings for them- selves from the palm-trees which had fallen/ 3 but 14 some they also cut down. 11. And there it was possible to learn Clearchus how he commanded, with his spear in his left hand, and his staff in his right. And if any one of those appointed to (work) seemed to him to loiter, selecting (the) one who deserved (it), he would beat him ; and he himself at the same time going into the mud took part in the work, so that every one was ashamed (lit. shame was to all) not 15 to assist in urging on the work. 12. And those thirty years old were appointed by 16 him (to this work) ; but when they saw Clearchus also urging on the work, those (who were) older also took part. 13. But Clearchus was so much the more in haste (on this account) because he suspected that the trenches were not always so full of water; for it was not a suitable season 17 (lit. such as) to water the plain. But in order that even now there might appear to the Greeks to be many difficulties for the march, on this account he suspected that the king had let out (άφίημι) the water upon the plain. 14. But proceeding, they arrived at villages, from whence the guides directed them to take the provisions ; there they remained three days ; and there came from the great king Tissaphernes, and the brother of the wife of the king, and three other Persians, and many slaves followed them. But when the generals of the Greeks met them, Tissaphernes first through an interpreter spoke as follows : 15. " I, Ο men of Greece, dwell a neighbor to Greece ; and when I saw you fallen into many and insuperable evils, I re- garded 18 it an unexpected gain for myself, if in any way I should be able to ask from the king to grant to me to restore you safe to Greece. For I think that it will not be unattended 19 with gratitude to me either from you or from the whole of Greece. 16. But knowing this, I asked the king, saying to him that he could justly gratify me, both because I first announced to him that Cyrus was 140 GREEK LESSONS. making an expedition 20 against him, and came at the same time with the message with (lit. having) assistance ; and I alone of those arrayed against the Greeks did not flee, but rode through and joined the king in your camp, where the king came after he had killed Cyrus. And 1 pursued the barbarians who were with Cyrus, in company with those who are now present with me, the very persons who are most faithful to him (L e. the king). 17. And lie also promised me that he would deliberate concerning these things ; and he ordered me to ask you, when I why (lit. on account of what 22 ) you made the expedition 28 against him. And I advise you to reply moderately, in order that it maybe easier for me, if I shall l•• obtain any good thing for you from him." 18. To these things th withdrawn, deliberated and answered, but Clean hi; 'for them) : "We neither came together with tl. king Avar on the king nor did we march ι the first instance) ; but Cyrus kepi finding many pi as you also well know, in order that 1 take you unprepared, and lead us up h< him already beset with danger (lit being in danger, we were ashamed both before gods and men to him, since in a former time Ave had presented ourselves (so that Cyrus) could do (us) favosa Β Cyrus is dead, 24 we neither contend Β the king for his kingdom, nor is there anything on account of which Ave should wish to do harm to the country of the king ; neither should Ave wish to kill him, but we would pro homeward, if no one should harass us. We will, fa try with (the help) of the gods to requite any ι injures 25 us ; if, however, any one shall be found to us, to the best of our ability at least, we will inferior to him also in doing good. Thus he spoke." 19. But Tissaphernes heard (him) and said,"] « port these things to the king, and (will bring Ill aages) fir again I : bat until I shall ι will furnish a ma on th. m the 1. • . in opp ι not bo had made an ax- imaelf And Q Dfl that ruth we will furnish® I mil ν to will lea ieoe without tare : be poeei purchase (thein) we ν ν that ν truth, • hi as 5 lnjuiy, taking food ■ nk whenever we shall not furnish a market ; I nit if we shall furnish a market, tl imed good. Then they made oa Tlaaa] and the ι the I ι the Greeks. immediately to it when I shall have acconip want, I will come ν luggage park•-! u;•. f-•: th•• pur- pose of leach tjack to Greece, and to wn gOl -♦>o § 283, Γο wkam order» had been gitvn, ω ιπίτίτακτο. m See j -tvdfTai η I n wrmL 142 GREEK LESSONS. 11 See § 239, 2. 12 See § 266, 2, Note 1. 13 See § 98, 1. 14 Some, rovs de; 6 de is often used when no ο μίν precedes. 15 See § 283, 7; a negative idea is implied in αίσχύνην eivcu. 16 See § 197, 1, Note 1. 17 Suitable season, ώρα οία. 18 / regarded it as an unexpected gain for myself ςΰρημα έποιησάμην. 19 See § 211, Note. 20 See § 246. » See § 243. 21 See § 277, 1. * See § 200, Note 6. 22 τίνος hew. B See § 276, 2. 20 Use the Attic imperative μενόντων for μ€νίτωσαν. 27 That it should be granted, δοθήναι. 28 See § 277, 5 and 6, Note 1 (end). 29 We will furnish, use infin.; ημάς, understood, is the subject. 80 The aor. subjunctive after cnci8av refers the action of the verb to a moment of time preceding the action of the leading verb. EXAMINATION PAPERS. 1. What then ? When 1 the Athenians and my [fellow] ens 2 come, 8 let us summon 4 this man also, that we may consult 6 together. 6 2. I, u If you go 7 now, I you be at home ? " 9 3. Ο my country ! 10 Ο all who inhabit n thee would love thee as I now do ! 4 N< ; many d; ι r this, Chares 12 came from Athens with 13 a few k Bhipe j and in.: ttoni- The Lac , 10 under the lead 17 of Hegesandri- das. 18 1. tnti&a*. 2. πολίτης. 3. ϊρχομαι. 4. κπλ/ω. 5. σνμβου\€ύω *. Η9§, 7. €ΐμι. 8. πύτ€. 9. ouroc. 10. ππτρίΓ. 11. our/». 12. Χάρης. 13. ϊχων. 14. ολίγος. 1 Γ), νανμαχίω. νικάω. 17. 7>ι'ομα« (gen. abeoL). 18. Ήγησανύρίύας. II. 1. beee things, Pericles rose, 1 and thus spoke. 2. Do not obey 2 these most wicked men. 3. On the n day . what he promised. 4 4. All the Gr• ened 5 to be doing this. 5. Many fear lest these things pen 1 while Philip is king. 7 G. If these things true/ / I be still more terrible. 9 1 . άνίστημι. 2. π*ίθω. 3. νσπραΐος. 4. υπισχνίομαι. 5. τυγ- χάνω with the participle. 6. γίγνομαι. 7. genitive absolute. 8. αληθής. 9. &€ΐνός. 144 GREEK LESSONS. III. 1. Any one might justly 1 praise 2 him, not only for 3 these things, but for what he did about 4 the same time. 5 2. If you do 6 what I just 7 now told 8 you, you will have all things which any one could wish. 9 3. Ο that 10 these things had happened u as we wished ! 9 But since ^ λυο were unfortunate, 13 let us do what the wisest of us shall command. 14 4. If these men had not perished, 15 the city would have been saved 16 and we should now be free. 17 1. δικαίως. 2. επαινεω. 3. επί. 4. περί. 5. χρόνος. 6. ποιέω• 7. άρτι. 8. φράζω. 9. βούλομαι. 10. είθε. 11. γίγνομαι. 12. επεί. 13. άτυχης. 14. κελεύω. 15. άπυλλνμι. 10. σώζω. 1 7. ελεύθερος. IV. 1. If I appear 1 to be wrong, 2 I will pay 3 the penalty. 2. If you should turn 4 from evils, you would quickly 5 be- come 6 better. 3. I fear 7 lest we have forgotten 8 the road 9 home. 10 4. If Philip had had this opinion, 11 — that difficult 12 to fight 13 with the Athenians, — he would have done 14 no one of the things which he has done. 1. δοκεω. 2. άδικεω. 3. δικην δούναι. 4. αποτρέπομαι. 5. εν τάχει. 6. yiyvopai. 7. δείδω. 8. επιλανθάνομαι. 9. οδός. 10. οικαδε. 11. γνώμη, 12. χαλεπός. 13. πολεμεω. 14. πράσσω. V. 1. Those who were looking * on feared 2 lest their friends 3 should suffer 4 anything. 2. They all said 5 that the ki had sent 7 them, and that they wished 8 to make an alli- ance 9 with Cyrus. 3. If another shall come 10 in his own name, 11 him ye will receive. 12 4. When this had hap- ΛΜΙΝΑΤΙΟΝ PAPERS. 14j all believed M that an assembly 1δ would be sum- 1. Μφ φοβίομαι. 3. φίλο?. 4. πάσχω. 5. λέγω βασιλί ττίμπω. 8. βουλομαι. V. σνμ- 10. ϊρχομαι. 11. υ*Ό/χα. 12. λίΐ^άι•ω. 13. γίγνομαι. οίομαι. 15. ίκκλησία. 10. σνγκαλί'ω. VI. 1. You would be ild you appear 2 not to \iose things whi vrould blame 3 others fordoing. rear' 1 «of 1 money, not even 7 •ut 8 to vied rax faith. 10 3. The !lt, H and I have oc- cunv Λ I had M the n gle, M 19 the earth 11 I might be numbered 21 among 22 I ;» 1. fJcui. Ι .ιτμι. Γ). μη$€ίς ΟΓ oi'ifif ? C. trfKO. 7. μ^ί*. 8. /χ*λλ*έ»>. 9. παράβαιναν. 10. irumr. 11. 0bffX«VC. 1J. Xcycii/ with ότι. 13. tiyyfXor. 11. yiyvopm. -lv. 17. rrrt 5, ueror. 19. Xcnro* 20. γή. 21. ^mJ^ L Jcrrpo»/. \ II. 1. I tried 1 to show 2 him th thought 4 he was but 6 v. that these things hap- {' whil _. 8 3. Let no one believe 9 11 be ruined. 12 4. If these 4 unju γ would not have condemned M : lb• burned 17 the vessels, 13 r. 20 1. gllplfnflM -• &€ίκννμι. 3, on. 4. υωμαι (witll infill.). 146 GREEK LESSONS. 5. be (with preceding μίν). 6. φημί (with infin.). 7. γίγνομαι. 8. participle of βασιλεύω. 9. νομίζω (with infin.). 10. φοβίο- μαι. 11. πολις. 12. άπόλλνμι (2d aor. mid.). 13. άδικεω. 14. καταγιγνώσκω. 15. στρατηγός. 1G. θάνατος, 17. κατακαώ. 18. πλοίου. 19. Ki'pos. 20. διαβαίνω. VIII. 1. The king α is chosen 2 in order that those who choose 2 him may be benefited 3 by 4 him. 2. They said 5 that rus 6 was dead, 7 and that Ariaeus 8 would flee. 9 3. If he had been here, 10 would he have overlooked n these things, or have punished 12 these impious 13 men? 4. May we desire 11 only 15 those things which we shall rejoice 1δ to have ac- quired. 16 5. Before 18 he came, 19 the ships 20 happened 21 to have gone 22 to Caria 23 to summon 24 assistance. 25 1. βασιλεύς. 2. αίρεω. 3. ευ πράττειν. 4. bia. 5. λέγω fort). 6. Κνρος. 7. θνησκω. 8. Άριαϊος. 9. φεύγω. 10. ττάρειμι. 11. ττεριοράω. 12. κολάζω. 13. άσεβης. 14. *πιθυμεω. 15. χαίρω. 16. κεκτημαι. 17. μόνον. 18. πριν. 19. Έρχομαι. 20. ναΰί. 21. τυγχάνω. 22. οίχομαι. 23. Καρία. 24. π6ριαγγ€λλω (participle). 25. βοηθεΊν. IX. 1. All of them fear α lest they may be compelled 2 to do many 3 things which now they do not wish 4 to do. 2. Ο that 5 this man had had 6 strength 7 equal 8 to his mind. 9 3. They called in 10 physicians 11 when they were sick, 12 that they might not die. 13 4. He showed 14 that he w is ready 15 to fight 16 if any one should come out. 17 1. φοβεομαι. 2. αναγκάζω. 3. πολύς. 4. βούλομαι. 5. είθε. 6. εχω. 7. ρώμη. 8. ϊσος. 9. γνώμη. 10. παρακαλίω. 11. Ιατρός. 12. νοσεω (partic). 13. αποθνήσκω. 14. δηλόω ( 6Υι). 15. έτοιμος. 16. μάχομαι. 17. εξέρχομαι. EXAMINATION PAPERS. 147 X. 1. 1 id conie 2 that he might see 3 both and what b α done. 2. I told him Ben true, 4 this would not have he WeW alive ; 7 for he would >ar 8 these dangers 9 as yon da 4. Do you wish 6 me to come ?* TeD l him not to fear 8 me, thinking 10 I shall be angry. 11 1. Xcyu. 2. ΐρχομαι. 3. οράω. 4. αληθής. 5. γίγνομαι. 6. βουλομαι. 7. ζάω. Β. φοβοίμαι. 9. «ινδικό?. 10. οΐομαΐ. 11. MMflMPA XI L It is μ fearing 4 2. Athens, 7 al- liav- >f all the Greeks 1 lied 10 and 1S 4. Call* no one 1. Xiym. 2. βασ^ίς. 3. dbwrfpMMl• 4. φοβίομαι. 5. «πόλ- Xo^i. β. pfc* 7. Ά^μι. 8. hurt # «V*• 9• /">*• ■pfc 11. yly^ai. 12. <\ττα\\άσσω. 13. ™pam>s. 14. Μ ισιω. 10. φ*ύγω. 17. icaraXciW 18. βάρβαρος. Ζλβιος. 21. 22. τίλίυτάω. XII. 1. < to be a friend 1 of the powerful, 3 in order that you ma\ punishment 4 if you act unjustly. 5 2. ( ^6 i, ball miss 9 at once 10 Π and « e 12 to gain. 3. Μ to announce 11 that the city had 148 GREEK LESSOXS. been taken, 16 but that the citizens 17 were hidden 18 near 19 the sea. 20 4. Would 21 that he had died 22 in his youth, 2 * for 2* he now would be happy. 25 1. βούλομαι. 2. φίλος. 3. to be powerful, δύνασθαι. 4. δί- κην δούναι. 5. άδικάν. 6. φοβούμαι. 7. μη. 8. πράττω. 9. άμαρτάνω. 10. άμα. 11. τυγχάνω. 12. ελπίζω. 13. wyycXor. 14. Έρχομαι. 15. ayye'XAca. 16. άλίσκομαι. 17. πολιΥ^Γ. IS. κρύπτω. 19. παρά. 20. ώζλαττα. 21. f^f. 22. αποθνήσκω. 23. a young man, νεανίσκος. 24. cW. 25. (ίδαίμων. XIII. 1. I trust * that these things which you have heard 2 are true. 3 2. Who would not wish 4 to leave his ι when such base 6 men are in power ? 7 3. The same men were present 8 when these things happened. 9 4. lie said 10 that, although he was 11 a god, he wished 4 to die. 12 1. πιστεύω. 2. άκουω. 3. αληθής. 4. βούλομαι. 5. πατρίς'. 6. πονηρός. 7. κρατεω (partic). 8. πάρειμι. 9. γίγνομαι. 10. (Ίπον. 11. participle. 12. αποθνήσκω. XIV. 1. After these things, a battle l having taken place, 2 the Greeks were victorious. 3 2. The king himself came as quickly 4 as possible 5 with the army. 6 3. The same _ commanded 8 the army in both 9 the battles. 4. Mian] the children 10 whom he saw feared u lest they should be taken. 12 5. If these things had been true, 13 it would have been still 14 more terrible. 15 1. μάχη. 2. γίγνομαι. 3. νικάω. 4. ταχν. 5. ως. β. στρά- τευμα. 7. στρατηγός. 8. ήγεομαι. 9. άμθ>ότερος. 10. παϊς. 11. φοβεομαι. 12. λαμβάνω. 13. αληθής. 14. €τι. 15. δεινός. ϋβΧΛΤΚΗΙ papers. 149 XV. 1 I b U ] him thai you all 2 were my «friends. 4 2. He J t,iUsC e state 9 id not have happened. 11 4 Do J will flee 18 when 11 β* us ? 1 λ <>ω t vfe 3. ροβθθ8βΪΥ€ 4. φ/λο*. 5. πράΥ- r•. 6. οντ•*. 7. doer». 8. άδι««' ω . 9. ττολι Γ . 10. δι /caios•. 11. γι'γι^Ηϋ. II οψαι. 13. φ*νγ«. 14. Stop. 15. <5ραω. XVI. 1 They came 1 in order to destroy 2 their 3 enemies. 4 D should say* would be The men 7 reported * seen 9 no one. 10 4. He de- clares n expects u to dia u 1 ϊρχομαι. 2. ανόλλνμι. 3. article. 4. ίχήχκ. 5. λ/γα>. C. χαληται**. 7. άτηρ. 8. AroyytXAw. 9. όράω. 10. ovflfiV. 11. ώτοφαύ*•. 12. oiVai. 13. Λήσιω. XVII. 1 "Mn the country 3 of the Uxii, 1 -e Bucephalus 5 was β once 7 missing. 8 1 parti ; !< J '.\x«f.;V a :; • yfyni L OKfiioc 5. Bou• «φάλαί. G. yt'yro/im. 8. αφανή*. Accord:: .e proclaimed 2 tlirough 8 the country I 1 kill 4 all I y brought 5 him 1. «/*. 2. ΐΓροκηρνττω. 3. ανά. 4. άποκτύνω. 5. απάγω. 1 fear 2 of the king had 3 the barbarians, that 4 Bucephalus was sent 6 back directly 6 upon 7 the proclamation. 8 L TOaoabf. 2. φόβος. 3. USC €ΐμί. 4. ώστ€. 5. αποπέμπω. ίπί. 8. κηρνγμα. 150 GREEK LESSONS. XVIII. 1. Did not Homer l call 2 Agamemnon 3 shepherd 4 of the people, 5 because a general 6 ought 7 to take care 8 that his soldiers 9 be both 10 safe n and 10 prosperous ? 12 1. "Ομηρος. 2. προσαγορενω. 3. Αγαμέμνων. 4. ποιμην. 5. \αός. 6. στρατηγός. 7. δει. 8. επιμεΧεομαι. 9. στρατιώτης. 10. re *αί• 11. σώί. 12. ευδαίμων. 2. For 1 you know 2 that generals are chosen 3 to be au- thors 4 of prosperity 5 to those who chose them. 1. yap, 2. οΐδα. 3. αίρεομαι. 4. cunoy. 5. ευδαιμονία. 3. It seems * to me, therefore, 2 that Agamemnon would not have been applauded 3 by Homer, had he not been ex- cellent 4 in this particular. 5 1. δοκεω. 2. ουν. 3. επαινεω. 4. from αγαθός. 5. omit. XIX. 1. As l Xenophon 2 was * sacrificing, 3 a messenger 4 ar- rived 5 from Mantinea, 6 announcing 7 that his son 8 Gryl- lus 9 was dead. 10 1. omit. 2. Ξενοφών. 3. θύω. 4. άγγελος. 5. ^ω. 6. Μαντινεία. 7. λέγω. 8. υιό*. 9. ΤρύΧΚος. 10. to die, θνησκω. 2. Then * he 2 laid 3 aside the garland, 4 but 5 continued to sacrifice. 6 1. καί. 2. εκείνος. 3. άποτίθεμαι. 4. στέφανος. 5. δε pre- ceded by /zeV. 6. διατβλ^ω. 3. But when * the messenger had added 2 this 3 also, 4 that he had died victorious, 5 Xenophon put 6 the garland on 6 again. 7 1. «ret. 2. προστίθημι. 3. εκεϊνος. 4. καί. 5. w€ς και clnov τον παις els τω πο\€ως τοντω elvai. 5. And Xenophon, on arriving, said to Seuthes, that the men were friendly, and would have sent mercenaries if he had asked it. XXVII. 1. The general with all his soldiers sailed away from the island, thinking that Cimon had come from Athens with twenty-seven ships. 2. The gods know well what it is best for man to have : to some they give much gold, to others a beautiful body, to others neither of these gifts. 3. (Write the following sentence in a corrected form, with the ac- cents.) Γαρ έδωσα έμαντος avrovs iva τάΚαντον be oi άνθρωποι έπανσονται μαχοντ€ς. QUESTIONS FOE EEVIEW. 1. How many letters are there in the Greek alphabet? Name them. How are they divided? Name the vowels. JI<»w many long vowels; how many short vowels'? Name the donbtfttl Towels. How many diphthongs] Which are the I Name the diphthongs. (Notice that when an vowel precedes a close vowel in the same syllable, the tw<» form 1 diphthong : if the open vowel is short the diphthong lied proper ; but if the open vowel is long, the diphthong is called improper). Which vowels can take the iota subscript ? 2. il ι ifl the rough breathing marked? The smooth? ire! doee a dipththong take the breathing] Write breathing on the following words: αρχή, ck, eis, ayopa, αυτός ; write the rough breathing on the following : ημίρα, άρμα, oCror, Έ\\ην (Notice that when the word begins with a • J, ih.• t.Liit and breathing are written to the left, and ver the rowel), vntp (Notice that words beginning with ν alwa; the rough breathing), Ίππος, ovtos (Diphthongs al- - have the accent and breathing over the second vowel even if th ipitals, except a, y, ω). Write the three last diph- thongs in capitals. Place the smooth breathing on the following Qcd§, (Write the words all in capitals; all in small re), 'Otero. How is the consonant ρ generally written at inning of a word] How in the middle of a word] Put the breathing on ρήτωρ, ράδως (Write the last word in . Πυρροί. 156 GREEK LESSONS. 3. How many simple consonants are there? Name the labials, the palatals, the unguals. Name the double conso- nants. Of what letters is each composed ] On what principle are the consonants, as given above, classified ] Mention another classification. What is σ called ] Which are nasals ? Name the semi-vowels. Write σ at the beginning and in the middle of a word. Mention the mutes of the same order. Mention the rough mutes. Which mutes are co-ordinate, which cognate ? Mention the siwds, the sonants. What letters only can end a Greek word ] Are there any exceptions ] 4. What is Crasis ] What is Elision ] What is the Apos- trophe used for, the Coronis, the Diaeresis ] To what words is ν moveable added ] What does ov become before a smooth vowel, before a rough vowel ] 5. How many syllables can a Greek word have ] What is a pure syllable ] Which is the pure syllable in οϊκία, βία, βασιλεία ] 6. What is meant by quantity 1 When is a syllable long by nature ] Which are the long vowels ] Which the diphthongs ? When is a syllable common] Name the liquids] What is the quantity of the syllable before a middle mute followed by a liquid ] Name the middle mutes. Repeat the general rules for the quantity of syllables. 7. How many kinds of Accent ] On what syllables can each stand ] On what syllables only can the circumflex stand 1 When is a word called an oxytone ; when, perispomenon ; when, barytone ? When can the acute stand on the antepenult ) What kind of syllables admit the acute Ί (Ans. either long or short syllables). What the circumflex] When can the cir- cumflex stand on the penult] What final diphthongs are con- sidered short for accent ] If the last syllable is accented, what accent does it generally take] (Ans. the acute.) When does an oxytone change to the grave ] How is a dissyllable, with a long penult and short ultimate, accented ] Accent the follow- QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 157 ing words On the antepenult : άνθρωπος, δυναμις, παράδεισο? ; the following On the penult : ήμερα, δήμος, δορν, μήκος, νήσος, τείχος, Ιδιώτης, μέσος ; the following on the last syllable : αριθμός, προ, θεός, δασμός. What is the general rule for the accent of nouns ] What docs an oxytone of the first or second declension become in the genitive and dative of all numbers] What is always the f the genitive plural in the first declension'? 8. What is Inflection i What dues it include] What is the How many cases ] How is gender indicated in Greek I Write th• >n of the article. What accent in Write the genitive singular feminine; Qgnlar masculine. Decline αρχή, τελεντή, πηγή. What iOOent in the genitive and dative of all numbers'? ISlOn of οικία, χωρά, ήμερα, αρετή, σατράπης, πολίτης, θάλασσα. What is the rule for nouns ending in α pure and pal quantity Of final a in θάλασσα, ήμερα, άχορά, χώραΐ In \shat does the \ _ular of the following nouns τιμή, σατράπης, οπλίτης, στρατιώτης, πολίτης 1 What is the of final α in I uive of the first declension] What ifl th στρατιώτης in the vocative singular] :lt of οπλίτης and πολίτης is long; accent them in the pilar ; in the genitive plural. μνάα. What is the rule for the accent in con- lj Qablefl I If the first syllable of the uncontracted f,, nil } ΙΛ rhat accent will the contracted form r the accent of the contracted penult. m does the proposition εκ govern ] \Vhat does it be- I rowel ; before a vowel with the rough breathing] re the dativo singular of δίκη, αρχή, οικία; write the same in r What is the iota subscript. What case in the the iota subscript. What does the nc-mi- f nouns of the first declension end in 1 What in the voeat: ilar I Accent the following words in the itive singular : γλώσσα, χώρα, τιμή. Is there any indefinite 158 GREEK LESSONS. article in Greek ] What case does από govern ] Decline ή τιμή together. What is the accent in the first declension of the genitive singular, dual, and plural ] What are words with no accent on the last syllable called] With the acute on the penult ] With the circumflex on the penult ] What are words called which have no accent 1 Decline μονσα, and explain the change of accent where it is not the same as in the nominative singular. What nouns of the first declension have as in the genitive singular ] Accent the following nouns : γλωσσάς γλωσσών, γλωσσαις, (from γλώσσα) j *Ατρειδτ], Άτρειδαι, Ατρειδών, (from Άτρείδης) \ στρατιωταις, στρατιωτα, στρατιωται (from στρατ- ιώτης) ) θάλασσαν, θαλασσαι, θαλασσών (from θάλασσα). 10. In what does the nominative singular of nouns of the second declension end ] Decline λόγος, νήσος, άνθρωπος ; explain the change of accent in the last two. Decline δασμός. What do oxytones become in the genitive and dative ? Accent the following words : ποταμού, ποταμοιν, ποταμοις (from ποταμός) \ νήσω, νησον, νήσοι, νήσων (from νήσος). What is the termination of the vocative of nouns ending -οςΊ (Notice that the vocatives of αδελφός and θεός are αδελφέ, with irregular accent, and θεός, the same as the nominative.) Decline together ό νόμος, 6 κίνδυνος, ή οδός, το Ιμάτιον, το σνκον. 11. What is the Attic Declension] Decline νεώς, άνώγεων. Give the rule for the accent (see § 22, 2, N. 2). Notice that these words take ι subscript where the common ending is ι. Write the nominative plural of λαγώς. What would the com- mon ending be ] Write the ace. singular of λαγώς (see § 42, 2, Note). Write the nominative plural of άνώγεων. What would the common ending be ] Write the dative singular and dual of λαγώς, νεώς, άνώγεως. Whfit prepositions govern the genitive only] (Ans. αντί, instead of; πρό, be/ore; από, away from; εκ, out of). Translate the following into Greek : Out of the house; before the temple; instead of the soldier ; away from the sea ; out of the temple ; out of the hall. What accent has εκ 1 What the other propositions ] QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 159 1 2. Repeat the rules for contraction relating to the second declension. Decline νόος, πλόος. Explain the change of accent in the singular. Rule for the contraction of the nominative, ■0001 rive dual] Decline όστίον, icaveov. What D of the governed genitive ] Translate into Greek : ' >or of the house ; the pay of tlie soldier ; oiit oftlie door of the house. Write the declension of the following words and mark ; mint it}' <>f tl. οϊκία, δασμός, στρατιώτης, ill the ilar; ptrntt πολίτης, and άνθρωπος in the plural. Give the rule for the quantity of the ending in the ace. singular of οΐκίιι. Ac nt oUia ami στρατιώτης in the genitive plural. s the third declension include ] How is . I I Sow is the nominative formed from the stem] in masculine and feminine stems 1 What cou- nts can stand at the end of a Greek word] What change • a labia] <»r palatal mute undergo before a lingual mute (see § 16) t What mm stand before σ] From the \B σώματος, Χίγοντος, πράγματος, φυλακος, γνπός, φ\€βός form >mit lor the euphonic changes. 1 L Decline φίλαξ, κόραξ, φλίψ. Give the rule for the accent of φλίψ in the oblique eases. What is generally the ending of ice. ? What exceptional What is the vocative of λίωνί What doei ' I of λίων end in] In what cases is the ▼oca' • as the stem ] Decline ποιμην ; write the voc- n »m the last word ] Decline δαίμων, σώμα, ίρις. I the dative plural formed] Form the dative plural of the following, and account for the euphonic changes : φίλαξ, φλ€>, κόραξ, λίων (§ 16, 5), ikwk. What nouns in the contracted ? i:>. Decline τριήρης and γόο*. Give the rule for the accent S in ης. What nouns are contracted only in the lingular, ind the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural ] Decline πόλις, πηχνς, άστυ. Are nouns in -is ever oxy- : in -fir | In what does the ace. of nouns in -«/? end] nt of tl. ve ? 160 GREEK LESSONS. 16. Decline φυγάς, άγων, παις (for νοα, see § 48, 2 α), λιμήν, όνομα, σώμα. What cases are alike in neuter nouns ] How do they form their nominatives *? What is the nominative of όνοματ, σωματΊ Explain the accent of πολις, in the genitive singu- lar. Decline together ή δύναμις; 6 γονεύς; τό δάκρυ. If the stem ends in ι, what change is made % Decline πρόφασις and mark the quantity of the endings. Decline (τό) ορός, (τό) εύρος. What propositions govern the dative only ? (Ans. iv (cf. Lat. in) in] συν) (cf. Lat. cum.), with, in company with). Translate into Greek : in the houses of the village ; in the army of Cyrus ; in company with the fugitives. 17. Decline ναυς, γέρας, κέρας. What nouns have ω in the ace. sing. 1 What are syncopated nouns ? Where is the accent in the vocative placed Ί Where in the genitive and dative] Decline πάτηρ, άνήρ. 18. What is the accent of monosyllables in the genitive and dative of all numbers ? What exceptions Ί (see § 25, 3, Note.) If the case ending is long what is the accent ] Accent the fol- lowing WOrds : θητος, θητες, θητα, θητας, θης (voc), from θής. What is the quantity of -a* in the ace. plur. ] What of the ace. plur. of the first declension ? Accent the following : αϊνων€, αινωσι, αϊνωνας, αινωνοιν (from αίνων) ', βασιλευ, βασιλείς, βασιλευσι (from βασιλεύς). 19. How do adjectives in •ος end ? What is the ending of the feminine; if ρ precedes the -οςΊ How do adjectives in -οος end 1 Decline σοφός, άξιος. What is the quantity of the a in the feminine in the ending of the nominative 1 The accusative ? How do compound adjectives in -ος end 1 Decline άδικος, άπορος. Of what are the two last compounded Ί 20. Decline άγήρως. Decline and explain the accent of εϋγεως. Write out the declension of χρύσεος, and account for the change of accent. Decline άργίψεος, εΰνοος, άπλόος. 21. Decline αληθής, πεπων. What irregularity has εκών, ίδρις, φυγάςΐ How do most adjectives in -υς end ] Which have the QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 161 endings -ας, -quo, -avl "What is the stem of μίλαςΊ Decline γλυκύς, χα'φας. How is the feminine formed (§ 108, 4, N.) ? 1 explain how the feminine is formed. Decline τίρην, αρσην \ which has no feminine form ? Translate every every city, all the soldiers (§ 142, 4, N. 1.). out the declension of λύων, ίστάς, δ€ΐκνύς. How ι -ων declined ] How are participles in -ους in -ας ; in -et?] Decline λίλυκώς. What gular in the feminine. Decline Ιστώς. line τιμών, φιλών, δηλών. Write ont the declension of Ti/ida tnd uncontracted forms, and give the Write the stem of αληθής, ςυδαίμων. ikvt, μίγας. Notice in πολίς that the λ is ber vuwel than υ. :' comparison ? Compare κουφός, σοφός, μίλας, σαφής, πίνης, χαρίας, πικρός. W hat is the rule for th a short penult? If the penultimate vowel is ad a liquid 1 Compare μίσος, (ννοος, σώφρων, I , συ, ου. Which forms are enclitics ? Is any pronoun enclitic when governed by an accented proposition ? Which forms are then used (§144, N.)? Decline αυτός. Write the Greek for : the same man ; the man himself; the country itself ; the same country ; I read ; I myself am reading ; I read, but you write. When is the personal pronoun expressed] How is αυτός contracted with the article ? When does αυτός mean him, her, it ? 30. Name the reflexive pronouns. Decline ίμαυτου. What are ίαυτού and σεαυτου generally shortened into ? Explain the difference between αυτού and αυτού. Write the Greek for : my own father (for the position of the article, see § 142,) ; his own tent; he wishes to exercise (βούλζται γυμνάσαι) himself; I exercise (γυμνάζω) myself and the horses. What is a reciprocal pro- noun ? Decline αλλήλων. 31. Which are possessives? How formed and declined? Write the Greek for : my father ; my brother ; a brother of mine ; my friend. What are demonstrative pronouns 1 Decline ούτος. How is obe declined. What is the position of the demonstra- tive ? Write in Greek : this country ; that man ; those men ; this general ; those generals ; I see (ορώ) the generals themselves ; I see them ; I see that boy ; I see those boys. 32. What is an interrogative pronoun? Decline τίς. De- cline the indefinite τίς. Is the accent of τίς ever changed to the grave 1 Write in Greek, what men do I see (δρω) ? I see a certain man. Define a relative pronoun. Decline ο?, όστις. What kind of a relative is όστις. Write in Greek : whom do I see ? a (certain) boy ; some of the Greeks (gen. § 168). 33. What are correlative pronouns 1 How are they dis- tinguished 1 Those with π ; with r 1 How are pronouns and verbs distinguished? Write in Greek: tvhere, whither, hoir, somewhere, to some place, from some place. 34. What is the general rule for the accent of verbs? How QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 163 many voices, how many moods, how many participles, how many tenses] Which are the finite moods] How are the s divided] Which are the historical] What is a pure, mute, and liquid verb ] Inflect the present indicative of λύω. I sonal endings ; the connecting vowel. Inflect the future. Write in Greek: / loose him ; you will lose them; he looses those men ; they will lose that boy. Inflict the impf., and the personal endings and connecting vowel. Write in I k : / was loo$im re loosing them ; we were Ι ι θ the aor. of λύω. Give the synopsis in the f fut., of aor., of pf. Write the present subj. optat. Which form is used (see p. 93.)] pres, mid. Give the stem, the connecting 1 the personal endings. Inflect the impf. Give the personal ending. Give the aor. pf. and plupf. >pses of the fut., aor., and pf. Write Hi] ]. WnU the aor. indie. fut. pass., the aor. pass., the fut. pf. Give a psis of the pres., the fut., the aor., the pf., and fut. pf., pass. a synopsis of λίίπω in 2 a. act. and 2 a. mid. Give a syn- opsis of στέλλω in 2 a. pass. Inflect 2 a. indie, of each. Give re of each in the act. W is the future of liquid verbs formed] Give the future of φαίνω, infleet it. Give a synopsis of the future. How is the aorist formed (§121)] Give a synopsis of the the a. optat. Decline the future partic. of φαίνω. Inflect the future mid. ; the optat. 38 YN n t by periphrastic forms ] Give the pf. pass I» Inflect and account for the euphonic changes ; Β ,r ττλ^ω, of πίθω. Give the plupf. of each. How is pf subj. and optat of the pass, and mid. formed] How is .tic fut. formed ? Write in Greek : we are about to igmentl How many kinds ] Give some word 164 GREEK LESSONS. to illustrate each. What words take the syllabic augment] What tenses take the augment, and what the reduplication] What verbs reduplicate ] Do all verbs that begin with a single consonant or with a mute and a liquid reduplicate ] What do verbs beginning with two consonants (not a mute and liquid) or a double consonant take ] If the verb begins with a rough mute, how is it reduplicated (§ 17, 2.) ] 40. What is the temporal augment] Write the impf. of αγω, ελαννω, εχω. Write the impf. of αισθάνομαι,. \Vhich VOWel receives the augment if the word begins with a diphthong ] 41. What is the Attic reduplication ] Give the pf. of ακούω, ελέγχω, ε*λαίνω, όρνσσω. Where is the aug. or redupl. placed in verbs compounded with a preposition] Write the impf. of συλλέγω, προσγράφω. If the prep, ends in a vowel, what is done ] Where is the aug. or redupl. placed in verbs com- pounded with Svs- with ευ-? What verbs prefix ει instead of the reduplication ] 42. What is a pure verb ] When is the final vowel of the stem lengthened ] Write the pres., fut., and pf. of ζητεω, τιμάω, φιλεω, δηλόω, εάω, δράω. Give the flit, of χράω, καΧεω (§ 120. 43. Write the pf. of στεργω, γίγνομαι, τίκτω, φαίνω, κράζω, πλήσσω, στρέφω, λείπω, φεύγω. What change is made ] What is the stem of στέλλω ] What is the rule for ε in monosyllabic stems] Write the pf. pass, of στέλλω, τρε'ττω, τρέφω. What four verbs in -νω omit ν of the stem before terminations begin- ning with a consonant ] What does ν become (when not dropped) before -κα \ -μαι 1 44. How is the future formed ] Form the future and account for the euphonic changes of the following verbs : τρίβω, γράφω, λέγω, πείθω, αγω, αδω ; τρέφω, τρίχω, θρύπτω, and τνφω. (§ 1 7, 2, Ν.). How is the future of a liquid verb formed ] Write the future of φαίνω, στέλλω, αγγελλω. Write the aorist of the ti last. How is the pf. formed I Write the pf. and account for the euphonic changes of the following : λείπω, γράφω, πλέκω, QUBTIONB FOR REVIEW. 1G5 τάσσω, φράζω κλέπτω (§ 109, 1), πψπω, τρπίω. How is the aor. pass, forau . C ; lupf. and aor. pass, of each of the verbs \UOTL Write the pf. pass, of τιμάω, πύθω, γράφω, κάμπτω, ίλ^χω. φαίνω (§ 11ί σττ^δω, οξύνω ; τβλεω, Item σπα-), ακούω, Κίλίύω, κυλίω, λβύω, ξύω, παίω. ττλίω. πρίω. ο the pf. subj. and optat. pass, gen- eral. pass, of τίλίω πάθω, φαίνω. How is the fut. pf. formed? Wh form the fut. pf. with active end- Inge 1 AllS. Ιστημι and θνησκω. the aor. pass, of λύω (§ 116, Ν. 2. (a)). What Bon derived I 48. Sow do liquid in their future and aorist? Form tlM future of άγγίλλω, τίλίω, βι,βάζω. Ιλαύνω, κομίζω, βάλλω, κτ^ίνω, φθύρω, άμυνω, σφάλλω, στίλλω, αϊμω j flit. mid. of μάχομαι, πνίω, πλίω, φ*ύγω. What kind of a futuiv have the last three verbs? meaning is called the Doric. I form their future without any tense sign? Ι πίομαι. t 9^ω. ακούω % απαντάω, απολαύω, βαδίζω, βοάω, γ<λάω, σιγάω, οΐμώζω. σιωπάω, σπουδάζω. Notice that these verbs :t. mid κ€ρδαίνω, οργαίνω, πιαίνω. in the present the anoontraeted and contracted m of τιμάω, g rule for contraction. Write in the «raj the inapt, the imper., and the infin. Write the pres. both formi of φιλίω and δηλόω in the pres. and -.. both forme, of τιμάω, φιλίω, δηλόω \ . verb in the present. . What is the rule for the contraction of dissyllabic verbs 1 πλέω ; of δίω. What verbs have η for a in the Write the present of ζάω. 166 GREEK LESSONS. 56. What verbs omit the connecting vowel ? To what are the terminations added] What is the stem of τίθημι, δίδω/χ] Give the synopses of ΐστημι, τίθημι, δι'δω/ζι, ΰείκννμι in the pres- ent. Write the inflection in the present indie, of each verb in the impf. Give the present subj. and optat. of ΐστημι, δίδωμι (§ 127, 3). 57. Give a synopsis of each verb in the 2 a. active. Give the inflection of each in 2 a. indie. Give the present impera- tive of each ; the 2 a. imper. 58. Inflect each verb in the present pass. Is the accent regular 1 For accent of δυναμαι, ςπίσταμαι, κρίμαμαι, 2 a. Ιπριάμην, ώνημην, see § 127, 6, Ν. 2. Give a synopsis of each verb in the present ; in the 2 a. Write the present subj. and optat., and account for the accent. What verbs have their 1 a. in -κα ] Give the parts of each verb. What forms are used in the impf. sing. act. of τίθημι and δίδωμι % How is ΐστημι used in the 2 a. active. Give the infin. forms of each verb. Give the pf. of τίθημι, plupf. of ΐστημι, fut. pf. (§ 120, 3, N.). Difference of meaning of ΐστημι : (1) in act. \ (2) pass. ; (3) middle. 59. Give a synopsis of €ΐμί. Inflect the present ; the impf. What is the signification of dpi in the present (§ 200, 3) 1 For what verb is it used as a future 1 60. Give a synopsis and inflect e?/u, ΐημι, φημί, κέίμαι. What is the 2 a. of βαίνω, γιγνώσκω 1 How inflected Ί What is the 2 a. of άλίσκομαι, its pf. % 61. What is the 2 pf. of βαίνω, 1στημι% Decline the partic. ίστως (§ 69, Ν.). Give the 2 pf. of fctfo. Inflect οΐδα. Give the imper., and 2 plupf. of οΐδα. What verbs have an intransi- tive Sense in the 2 pf. ] Ans. fyetpu), πβίώα. φαίνω, δλλυ /u, αγννμι, and a few others. 62. What is a simple sentence ; the subject, the predicate, the copula ] Give the rule for the subject of a finite verb ; for the infinite mood ; for a verb ; for the neuter pi. ; for a collec- tive noun. Write in Greek : You and I are reading : the prizes were given. QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 167 03. "When does the predicate noun agree with the subject] Give the rule for apposition : for adjectives. If the word to which the adjective refers is omitted, how is the case of the adjective determined ? C4. To what does the article correspond in English ? Men- tion * ι of the article in Attic Greek. Translate the fol- 6 των ' Αθηναίων δήμος ; πολλοί, οι πολλοί ; πλςον€ς, οι πλίονις J «λλοι saso/w), oi άλλοι (==.co?teri), 6 ρήτωρ ; Κύρος iyev€TO βασιλ€νς των Ώίρσων ; τα των ' Αθηναίων ) η aperr). position of the article when attributive? ; the wise men; the arms of the t r. Tni: 6 αγαθός άνηρ ) ot ev ttj πόλ€ΐ ) 6 δήμος 6 των ' Αθηναίων j 6 (μος Ιταΐρος \ ίμος Ιταΐρος. CG. Wl d of the article with the demonstra- :i. of the personal j>n»iu>un? Translate: 6 άνηρ σοφός) (jI η πάσα πόλις ; τΰισα πόλις \ 6 άνηρ ούτος', της ήμίρας όλης διήλθον (they pVO- r i Λοσι σταδίων ; €σχατον το ορός \ το Ζσχατον μίση : ή μίση α-, Latin forui/i medium for m when does the article retain its original 08. When is the nominative of the personal pronoun ex- Whkh forms of the oblique cases are generally used 1 J pronoun, when a reflexive, when an in- tion the uses of αυτός. What is a reflexive I How is the possessive, the demonstrative, the interro- ronoun used ? Translate : Zei>s την Άθηνάν (φνσ€ν U (Zeus prod'irr,] Athene out of) τής ίαυτου Κ€φαλής ; αυτού 6 υιός j 6 ήμίτ€ρος πατήρ ) 6 πατήρ ήμων \ τις €ΐ ) €ΐπ€ μοι, όστις (ι or τις €ΐ. What is Assimilation ; Attraction? I the rule for the nominative the vocative ? Give rule for the a e. What is the cognate accusative? 168 GREEK LESSONS. The ace. of specification ; the adverbal ace. 1 Give the rule for extent of time or space ; for ace. after adverbs of Swearing ; for two ace. Translate and give the rule for the ace. ερταυθα Κύρος εμειρε \ ημέρας περτε ) τείχος τειχίζορται \ εδίδαξαρ top παϊδα τήρ μουσικην ) κάμρω τηρ κεφαληρ. 71. \Vhat is the rule for the genitive Ϊ Mention the differ- ent kinds of genitive. Explain the difference between the sub- jective and objective genitive. Give the rule for the genitive after verbs. Mention the verbs that are followed by the geni- tive. 72. Give the rule for the causal genitive \ the gen. as ablative ; the gen. after the comparative degree \ the gen. after compound verbs ; the gen. of price ; of time and place ; the gen. with adjectives ; with adverbs ; the gen. absolute. 73. Translate and explain the use of the genitive : 6 φόβος τωρ πολεμίωρ ) δούλος περτε μρώρ : πολίτου άρετη ) ή οικία του πατρός εγερετο ] θορύβου ηκουσερ ] ήκουσα ταύτα τωρ άγγελωρ ) της επίβουλης ουκ ησθάρετο \ αρδρες άξιοι της (§ 141, Ν. 1 (a)), ελευθερίας \ παράδεισος θηρίωρ πλήρης \ θαυμάζομερ Σωκράτηρ της σοφίας \ μείζων εστί του πατρός \ που γης εστιρ ] ωχ^το της νυκτός. 74. Give the general rule for the dative. Rule after transi- tive and intransitive verbs ; the dative of advantage and dis- advantage. Give the ride for dative of possessor, and the dative with respect to which. After what class of verbs and adjec- tives is the dative used 1 75. Translate and explain the following : όμοιοι (like) τοϊς άλλοις \ ούτος Κυρω ειπερ \ τη ηλικία έπρεπε ; δίδω /it σοι εμαυτόρ. 76. Give the rule for the dative of resemblance and union ; dative after compound verbs ; the causal and instrumental dative. 77. Give the rule for dative of manner ; agent after verbals in -τεος, dative of time, and dative of place. 78. Translate and explain the dative in the following : ερταίθα Κυρω βασιλεία η ρ \ ποταμός ημϊρ εστί. διαβατέ ος ) άκορτίζει τις παλτω ' } τ?) πρώτη ήμερα άφίκορτο. BOTIONS FOR REVIEW. 169 plain the meaning of the word voice in grammar; of ■ : ' ldle • : η the subject be represented in the middli 80 • J1 8 ω the indicative] Define each. I imperfect differ? Translate into Ai*; he has done this; I ; I I • the indicative divided? What «HBOnlj .νίκη not in indirect discourse? How in this construction? Translate in• nce ) ; he did this (habitu- D the general principle of indirect discourse. writing; he §ays that he is 83. Wh the participle express 1 What gnomic aorist. How ftp I Explain the general use of the pa: 85. How n ode? Define each. which depend upon final clauses, for ob- verl is of fearing. Ϊ plain : γράφω Ίνα μάθης ; ϊγραφον (Ζγραψα) ίνα μάθοα J φοβοίμαι μη τούτο γίνηται ] ττάραμι Ινα ιδω ) παρην Ίνα Ί&οιμι. β 1 How are conditional the different forms of particular mppoeitione, and one example of each. When is the indicative I When the future indicative? Define of each. id explain the following : tl γράφα, καλώς ποία ; »<ιψ<•. κ λα r ΙποΙησί j ei ypa\^€i, καλώς ποίησα ) α Ζγραφ€, καλώς αν ι:. >αλώς ποίησα \ §1 τοϊτο λέγοις, άμαρτάνοις. 170 GREEK LESSONS. 90. When the protasis is represented by a participle, what tense is the participle in ? What is an implied condition ? 91. What do relative clauses include ? Give the rule for a relative clause with a definite antecedent. How many forms in particular suppositions have relative clauses with an indefinite antecedent ? Mention each and give an illustration. In general suppositions ? 92. Translate and explain : συνίπεμ^ν αυττ} στρατιώτας ους Μίνων €ΐχ€ν ) χρωμαι βιβλίοις οις Έχω ' } ηγεμόνας ίλαβον οι αυτούς αξουσιν \ Έπρατταν ά δόξειεν αυτω : ουκ Έστιν ο τι αν τις μύζον τούτου κακόν πάθοι. 93. What is the rule for temporal particles after Έως, etc. ? In conditional sentences ? Give the rule for πριν. 94. What is meant by direct discourse? By indirect? How is an indirect quotation introduced ? How are the mood and tense of an indirect question determined ? Give the rule for changing the direct discourse (without av) to the indirect. Translate into Greek : / am writing ; he says I am writing ; I was writing ; he says I was writing ; he said that he was writing. 95. Give the rule for indirect questions. What is said of an indicative or optative with av when changed to the indirect discourse? Of infinitives and participles? Rule for indirect quotation in compound sentences ? To what class of clauses may the principles of indirect discourse be applied ? 96. Translate and explain : Xeyei on Spa : ΈχαΧίπαινςν on λίγοι ; tXeyov οτι Κΰρος τέθνηκεν ] ουκ Έχω τι \ίγω ) tine μοι, τίνα γνώμην Έχεις ; *ΐπον, ηντινα γνώμην Έχοιμι : would €ΐπον, ηντινα γνώμην (Ιχον be correct? 97. Give the rule for causal sentences. In how may wi.ys can a wish be expressed ? Define the imperative mood. How is the first person of the subjunctive used ? What is used in prohibition ? In questions of doubt ? 98. Translate and explain : 1ωμ*ν : μη κλίψτ^ς : τι ποιωμεν : et μοι yevoiTo φθόγγος. 99. What is the infinitive ? How used when not in indirect QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 171 discourse? How with the article? With το μήΊ Can the infinitive express purpose ? How used with ώστε ? With ε'φ' ω ? How with πριν ? 100. Translate and explain : βούλομαι λέγειν : ηκομεν μανθάνειν : κελεύω σε γράφειν : δέομαι σου προθύμου είναι : συμβουλεύω σοι. προθύμω είναι : ήξίου δοθήναί οι ταύτας τάς πόλεις : υπελάοας priding up) ως συναντήσαι (to meet him) : βουλεται πονείν (to toil), ώστε πολεμεϊν. 101. What is a participle? What may it qualify? How used when preceded by an article ? What relations may be ex- pressed by a participle? After what verbs is the participle used like the infinitive ? With what verbs does it contain the leading idea ? With what verbs does it stand in indirect dis- course ? How used with δήλος εϊμι and φανερός εϊμι ? 102. Translate and explain : oi θεο\ χαίρουσι τιμώμενοι υπό των ανθρώπων : εκείνου εϊπόντος, πάντες εσίγων (were silent) : Κνρος νπολαβών τους φεύγοντας, συλλεξας στράτευμα, επολιόρκει Μίλητον (Cyrus received the exiles and raising, &c.) ; λαθεϊν αυτόν άπιλθών. 103. What constructions are used with the verbal in -τεος ? Translate into Greek : we must do this, using both constructions. 104. How is a question asked in Greek? What are the principal interrogative particles ? What do they imply as to the answer? How can an indirect question be introduced? How an alternative question ? 105. Translate and explain : ποι τράπομαι (I go) ; ουκ εχω, οποί τράπωμαι : τις λέγει : ηρόμην (I asked), τις λεγοι : ηρόμην όστις Xeyot : ηρόμην τι or ο τι λεγοι '. αρ εϊμι μάντις '. αρα φοβεΐ '. ου (or αρα ου) φοβεί : μη (or αρα μη) φοβεϊ. 106. How many negative adverbs has the Greek? Mention some of the compounds. How is ού used ? How μη ? Which is used in final clauses ; in conditional ? With the infinitive ? With the indirect discourse ? With the participle ? How are ου μη and μη ού used ? Translate, ov μη ποιήσω (I certainly shall not do it) ; δίδοικα μη ου θεμιτον fj (I am afraid it may not be laic fid.) MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 1. How many letters in Greek alphabet? How divided] How many breathings ] What mutes are of the same order ? Of the same class ? The general rules for contraction of vow- els 1 What is crasis Ί elision ] 2. Contract the following words and give the rule : τψάομεν, νηόδυνος, αώόα, yivcos, ζηλοε, χρυσίου, ζηλοεις, αβίδω, Xveat, άέκων, Χνηαι. 3. Perform crasis and elision on the following words : 6 ck ; 6 ini ) ol έμοί \ ο άνηρ ] κα\ είτα ) τα αγαθά \ το ιμάτιον ] τα άλλα ) του ύδατος \ το ύδωρ ) τα όπλα ) τα αίσχρά \ ο έτερος ; τον έτερου \ κα\ αν ) κα\ εν. When does iota become subscript in crasis ] 4. Give the general rule for euphony of consonants. What mutes can stand before σ % 5. Write more correctly and give the rule : πΧεκθψαι ; \εγθη- ναι\ συνκα\εω) ενπειρος ) συρρέω \ σννΧεγω j παντσι \ τιβεντ-ς ; ουκ ούτος ) απ €στιας \ κατ ήμεραν. 6. Write more correctly, άγσω ; δεχσομαι ; τρφσω ; γραφσω ; λβγσω \ τετρφμαι ) πεπειθται. 7. What syllables admit of accent Ϊ Which accent can stand on any of three $ Which only on the penult or ultimate ? What is the quantity of a circumflexed syllable 1 What is a syllable called that has the acute on the last syllable % On the penult ] On the antepenult 1 The circumflex on the last syl- lable ? On the penult 1 8. What are proclitics ? What words are proclitics ] What MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 173 are enclitics Ϊ What words are enclitics Ί What is the accent of the interrogative ml Are the personal pronouns always enclitic after other words 1 Is ειμί in any of the forms always enclitic after other words ] 9. Write τε after άνθρωπος) μοί after δεϊξον; τις after άνηρ; φησίν after καλώς; τε after τιμών; τϊς after πόσος; τινές after παίδες ; τίνες after άνδρες. 10. Write the declension of the following words : θεά; χώρα; πολίτης; ναύτης; ταμίας; ποιητής; Άτρείδης ; 'Ερμης; κριτής; στρα- τιώτης ; δεσπότης (all regular except the voc. δέσποτα with irregu- lar accent). 11. Give principal parts of άγγελλω; άγω; αίρεω; βαίνω; γίγνο- μαι ; γράφω \ δέχομαι ; δεω (to bind) ; δεω (to ivani) ; δοκεω ; εάω ; ελαύνω; ελέγχω; ευρίσκω; εχω \ θνησκω (§§ 120, 3, Ν.); κάλε ω ; κάω ; λαγχάνω. 1 2. Decline οδός ; δώρον ; άνθρωπος ; κίνδυνος ; ποταμός ; θάνα- τος ; νήσος ; μήλον ; άγγελος j αδελφός (notice the irregular accent in the last). 13. How are adjectives compared Ί Compare κούφος; γλυκύς; μέλας J χαρίεις \ σαφής ; μάκαρ ; αίσχρός ; ταχύς ; ηδύς. 14. Give the principal parts of πλέκω; πείθω; πέμπω; δερω; τίθημι ; δείκνυμι ; φέρω ; πίνω ; πάσχω ; όράω. 15. The following verbs are pass, deponents; give the prin- cipal parts : άγαμαι ; άχθομαι ; βούλομαι ; δέομαι ; δύναμαι ; διαλέ- γομαι ; επίσταμαι ; ηδομαι ; οίομαι ; επι and μετά, -μελομαι. 16. Decline φυγάς, άρχων, αι£, παϊς, κόλαξ, γύψ, ελπίς, κλείς, σώμα, φώς, ους, θηρ, ρις, χείρ, κύων. 17. Give the general rule for accent of nouns. How are monosyllables of the third declension accented in the genitive and dative ] What nouns are exceptions to this rule % 18. Give the vocative of the adjective ευδαίμων. Ans. εϋδαιμον. Notice that adjectives in •ων gen. -όνος take in the vocative the accent on the antepenult. 19. Give the VOC. of 'Απόλλων, "Ποσειδών, Αγαμέμνων, Σωκράτης. See §56, 2, N.j §52, 2, Ν. 1. 174 GREEK LESSONS. ' 20. What is augment ? reduplication % Give the general rules for each. Write the impf. of αγω, ελαύνω, ικετεύω, υβρίζω, αισθά- νομαι, αυξάνω, οίκτείρω, εικάζω, ευρίσκω. 21. Write the Greek for 3, 7, 8, 10, 20, 14, 16, 30, 100. 22. Give the Greek ordinals from 1st to 10th. Give the numeral adverbs up to the tenth. 23. Decline eii. Is δύω always declined] Decline ουδείς. 24. Accent the following : ελθε, άπελθε, Ιδε, εϊσιδε, δος, άποδος, θες, παραθες, σχες, προσχες, προσ€ΐχον (προς and εχω). 25. Give the principal parts of δράω, χράω, αχθομαι, ερομαι, βούλομαι, μένω, μελω, μάχομαι, οίχομαι, ο'ίομαι, άκουω, δερω, έπομαι, πέμπω, φεύγω. 26. Compare αισχρός, βαθύς, γλυκύς, μεσός, μακρός, νέος, ολίγος, παλαιός, 27. Form adverbs from the following and compare the ad- verbs : φίλος, σοφός, αληθής, ηδύς, ταχύς, σαφής, δίκαιος. 28. Give the general rule for sequence of tenses. Which are historical tenses 1 Is the gnomic aorist an historical tense ] 29. Decline άνηρ, κύων, ρητωρ, λιμην, δαίμων, κίς, ο* ς, βους, ηχώ, πόλις. Give the rules for forming the vocative of nouns of the third declension. 30. Write more correctly ενπιπτω, συνβαινω, σννχεω, ενλειπω, μελανς, λουνσι. 31. Form the dative plural of the following : τιθείς, λέων, δαί- μων, ίστάς, ίππεύς. 32. Write the present subj. active of λύω, άγγίλλω, τρίβω. Give the fut. and aorist active of φαίνω, ορίζω, σπενδω, αυξάνω. 33. Write both the contracted and uncontracted forms in the impf. of τιμάω, φίλε ω, δηλόω. 34. Perform crasis and elision on the following : κα\ έτερος ; καϊ είτα j καϊ 6 \ κα\ οι ) κα\ ει ) κα\ υπό ) μεντοι αν ] εϊ μη εχομαι ] μη ευρω , που εστίν \ εγώ οίδα ) εγώ οιμαι ) ότου ένεκα ] α αν ; απο εαυτόν. 35. Write the impf. of εάω, εθίζω, έπομαι, εχω, εϊςφερω, προςάγω, εμβάλλω, άποφε'ρω, προβαίνω, δυςτυχεω. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 175 36. What is the Attic reduplication] Write the perfect of αλείφω, ακούω, ορυσσω, ελαύνω, ε\εγχω, εγείρω, άλίσκομαι. 37. Write the second perfect of στέργω, γίγνομαι, τίκτω, φαίνω, λείπω, κράζω (see § 109, 1). 38. How is the perfect formed of stems ending in π or β, κ or γ, φ or χ ] Form the perfect of κηρύσσω, άγω, κόπτω, βλάπτω, κλέπτω, πέμπω, λέγω, πράσσω (stem πραγ). The last verb has two forms πεπραγα (intransitive, / have fared) and πέπραχα (transi- tive, 7* have done), 39. Give the perfect of στέλλω (§ 109, 3), τρέπω, τρέφω, φθείρω, κρίνω, πλύνω, φαίνω, βάλλω. 40. Decline αληθής, σώφρων, δίπονς, πολύς. 41. Give a synopsis of the aorist middle of βουλεύω ; inflect the present. Give the same of λύω. 42. Mention the classes of pronouns. Decline εγώ, 6δε, τις, τ\ς. 43. What prepositions govern the genitive only 1 Translate into Greek, a slave instead of a king ; before the city ; aiuay from the house ; out of the house. 44. How is the nominative of nouns of the third declension formed from the stem ] Form the nominative of the following WOrdfl : σώματ~ος, τιθέντ-ος, φύλακ-ος, γυπ-ός, φλεβ-ός, αϊών-ος, παντ-ός, δαίμονος, λεοντ-ος. 45. Write the perfect of φιλεω, χράω, τρέχω, τρέφω, φύω, θάλλω, χάσκω, φαίνω, χαίνω. 46. Perform crasis and elision on the following : κα\ 6 ; κα\ οί ; το Ιμάτιον ; του έτερον \ από ου \ νύκτα ολην. Form compounds from από and ΐημι ; δέκα and ήμερα ) επτά and ήμερα. 47. Decline γυνή, δόρυ (regular in prose), Ζευς, ηρως, κύων, νανς, ους, ύδωρ, υιός, χειρ. 48. Form the future of τιμάω, φιλεω, δηλόω, τίω, δακρύω, εάω, Ιάομαι, καλίω, γελάω. Write the perfect of δεω (to bind), θύω, λύω, and mark the quantity of ν in the last two. 49. Write the principal parts of κλέπτω, ρίπτω, τύπτω, όρύσσω, 176 GREEK LESSONS. πλησσω, πράσσω (give both forms of the perfect), τάσσω, αρπάζω, σώζω, αγείρω, α'ιρω, βάλλω, eye /ρω, κτείνω, φαίνω, φθείρω. 50. Compare αγαθός, βαθύς, γεραιός, γλυκύς, πένης. Form ad- Verbs from οξύς, αληθής, ηδύς, ταχύς, and compare them. 51. Write the declension of όστις. 52. Give a synopsis of the 2 aorist active and middle of λείπω. Inflect the indicative of each. 53. With the inflection of the perfect middle of πείθω, τρίβω, άγγελλω, φαίνω, and account for the euphonic changes. 54. With the aorist of active of καλεω, σπείρω, μένω, φαίνω, διδω/χι, τίθημι, ΐημι, πιαίνω, κερδαίνω. 55. How is the Attic future formed] Give the future of καλεω, ελαύνω, κομίζω, μάχομαι, βιβάζω. 56. The following verbs have the future middle, in the active sense ; form the future, and account for the euphonic changes : πλέω, φεύγω, κλαίω, νεω, πίπτω, πννθάνομαι, εσθίω, πίνω. 57. Give the perfect passive of σπάω (§ 103 and Note), κελεύω, δράω, κλείω. 58. Write the perfect of τίθημι and ΐημι; of δέω, οΧομαι. The future of βούλομαι, χαίρω, εθελω, μελω, μένω, αχθομαι, μάχομαι. 59. Write the principal parts of κτείνω, βαίνω, ελαύνω, πίνω, δάκνω, τέμνω, αϊσθάνομαι, άμαρτάνω, αυξάνω, λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, μανθά- νω, πυνθάνω, τυγχάνω, 60. Write the perfect passive of τάσσω, γράφω, τρίβω, σπάω, παίω, πείθω, πλησσω. 61. Write both contracted and uncontracted forms of the present optative of τιμάω, φίλεω, δηλόω (§ 116, Ν. 2 (c)). 62. Give a synopsis of ΐστημι in the present indie. Inflect the present subjunctive and account for the accent. 63. Inflect the present εϊμί, εΐμι, ΐημι. 64. What prepositions govern the dative only? Translate into Greek : in the city, with the soldiers, at daybreak. 65. Inflect the present of ζάω, πλέω, δεω, χ.ράω. 66. Give the general rules for the use of the article in Attic Greek ; for the Homeric use of the article. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 177 67. Inflect the present active of ΐστημι, τίθημι, ϋ&ωμΛ, δύκνυμι. 68. What is meant by assimilation and attraction in gram- mar] 69. Explain the use of ου in Attic Greek. 70. Write the enclitics. Write τ\ς after άνθρωπος, άνηρ, φίλος. 71. What prepositions govern the accusative only? Trans- late into Greek : up the river, into the city, he sends to the king. 72. Inflect the present passive of ΐημι, ΐστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμι, δείκνυμι. 73. Decline νεώς, άνώγεων, λαγως (§ 42, 2, Ν.), αδελφός, πλόος, παις, κέρας. 74. How does the meaning of ΐστημι differ in the first and second aorist ] Give the first and second aorist of the following and translate each : ΐστημι, άφίστημι (to revolt), καθίστημι (to put down), βαίνω, δύω. 75. The perfect of the following verb is transitive, the 2d perfect intransitive ; form both perfects and translate them : ολλυμι. 76. Give the general rule for the agreement of adjectives. What is the position of the adjectives with the noun when the article is used ] Translate in as many ways as possible, the wise man. 77. What prepositions are used with the genitive and accu- sative ] Translate into Greek : through the country, down from the wall, over the earth. 78. The second perfect of the following verbs is intransitive. Form and translate it : αγνυμι, εγείρω, πείθω, πήγνυμι, ρήγνυμι, φαίνω. 79. Write the inflection of present of φημί; the second per- fect, οιδα. 80. Give the general rules for the accusative. Translate and explain the following: σατράπην εποιησεν αυτόν; καλός εστί σώμα ) πάντα κράτιστος ενομίζετο ] Κύρος εμ€ΐν€ ημέρας τριάκοντα. 81. Decline αυτός. How is it contracted with the article] 178 GREEK LESSONS. Translate 6 βασιλεύς αυτός ) 6 αύτος άνηρ j οι πόλϊται της αυτής ημέρας ου ταύτα, θαυμάζουσι j ό παις αύτου αγαθός εστίν. 82. The following verbs form their second aorists like verbs in μι y write the second aorist : βαίνω, διδράσκω, κτείνω, πέτομαι, φθάνω, άλίσκομαι, βιόω, γιγνώσκω, δύνω. 83. Give the general rule for the genitive ; the rule for the partitive genitive ; genitive after verbs. 84. Translate and explain the following : οί πρεσβυτατοι των στρατηγών ) εδωκά σοι των χρημάτων j θορύβου ήκουσεν ; Ααρείου κα\ ΊΙαρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παίδες δυο. 85. Inflect the present of the deponents : αγαμαι, δύναμαι, επί- σταμαι, εραμαι, κρέμομαι. 86. Write the perfect of the following, and give the rule for its formation : λείβω, γράφω, τάσσω, πλέκω, βρέχω, άγγέλλω, σπείρω, πείθω. 87. Decline the interrogative τις ; decline oo-m. 88. Translate the following and parse the pronoun : όλβιος ω παίδες φίλοι είσίν \ τίνα 6 πατήρ θαυμάζει ; 89. Write the future of γαμέω. (Notice that the active voice is used of a man marrying, the middle of a woman.) 90. What prepositions govern three cases? Translate the following : about the head ; a messenger from (the side of) the king ; to (the side of) the king ; in presence of the judges ; from under the chariot ; under the mountain. 91. Give the principal parts of τυγχάνω, κρεμάννυμι, δείκνυμι, ζεύγνυμι, μίγνυμι, ολλυμι, ομνυμι, θνησκω, διδράσκω, μιμνησκω. 92. Give the rule for the causal genitive ; the genitive when used as ablative ; the genitive after comparatives ; genitive after compound verbs. 93. Translate and parse the genitive in the following: ελαβον της ζώνης τον *Ορόντην ; του λόγου ήρχετο ωδε ) το τείχος ην εύρος ei- κοσι ποδών ) στρατιώτου εστί μάχεσθαι ] του στρατού ελαβεν ) ασκών δεησομαι ) ΐππον μνών τριών επρίατο \ δώροαν (bribery) αυτούς εδίωζεν [prosecuted) ] πάντων οι θεοί κρατουσιν (rule) ; τούτο εμαθεν υμών j Βαβυλώνος ου πολύ άπεχουσιν. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 179 94. The perfect of the following verbs has a present mean- ing. Form the perfect : μιμνησκομαι, καλίομαι, πείθομαι, ολλυμι, κταομαι, ΐσταμαι, βαίνω. 95. Write OUt the declension of λελυκώς, τιμίων ] δεικνυς, μέγας. 96. Give the rule for the genitive after adjectives ; the geni- tive with adverbs ; the genitive absolute. 97. Translate and parse the genitive in the following : άμα- ξαι, μεσταϊ αλεύρων καϊ οίνου ; άρματα, κενά (destitute) ηνίοχων ; δά υμάς άμείνους του πλήθους είναι ; εγγύς αλλήλων ; εξω του δεινού', βα- σιλεύς ου μαχεϊται δέκα ημερών \ Κύρος ηει (went) καλούντος του πατρός; τις των παρόντων (those present) ; αΐτεΐ αυτόν τριών μηνών μισθόν. 98. Give the principal parts of θνησκω, βιβρώσκω, γιγνώσκω, τιτρώσκω, άλίσκομαι (used as the pass, to αιρεω), πάσχω, γαμεω, δοκέ ω, γίγνομαι, πίπτω, τίκτω, αιρεω, έρχομαι, εσθίω, όραω, τρέχω, φέρω, ώνεομαι, εΐπον. 99. What is reduplication 1 What tenses take it 1 What if the verb begin with a vowel ] What verbs reduplicate % Do all that begin with a single consonant or a mute and a liquid reduplicate ? What do verbs beginning with two consonants (not a mute and liquid) or a double one take 1 If the verb begins with a rough mute 1 What verbs prefix ει instead of the reduplication 1 100. Where are the following words found? φυλάξαι, φύλαξαι; ποιησαι, ποιησαι, ποίησαι. 101. Write the following words and properly dispose the accent : άνθρωπος τις \ φίλος τις ; καλός τε ; σώμα τι ; φιλεϊ τις ; άνθρωποι τίνες ; φίλοι τίνες ; καλός εστί ; σώμα ποτέ ; φώς εστί. 102. Give the general rule for the dative. For the dative after transitive and intransitive verbs ; the dative of advantage and disadvantage; the dative of possessor; the dative with respect to which ; the dative of resemblance and union ; after compound verbs. 103. Translate and parse the following : έδωκε Κύρω χρήματα; ενταύθα Κύρω βασίλεια ην ; Κύρω εις χείρας Ιεναι ουκ ήθελεν. 180 GREEK LESSONS. 104. What is voice in grammar 1 How many ? Define each. Translate πισπύουσι τω βασίλεϊ; change this to the pass. 105. The following verbs have a different meaning in the middle and active voices. Give their principal parts : παύω (I cause to stop) ; παύομαι (I stop myself, cease) ; φαίνω (I shoiv) ; φαίνομαι (I show myself, appear) ; ΐημι (I send) ; Ιψαι (I send myself hurry). 106. Give the rule for the causal and instrumental dative ; of manner ; after verbals in -τίος ; of accompaniment ; of time. 107. Translate and parse the following : επεσθαι υμϊν βούλομαι ; Ζβαλεν αυτόν λίθω \ χαλεπώς φέρω τοΊς παροΰσι πράγμασιν j τ}] αυτή ημέρα ηκεν άγγελος. 108. When does the article in Attic prose retain its demon- strative force ? Translate τους μεν άπέκτεινε, τους δ' εξέβαλεν. 109. How many tenses are there *? Define each. Write γράφω in the first person singular of each tense, and translate it. Mention two verbs whose present has the force of the perfect ; several whose perfects have a present meaning. 110. How many distinct uses has the present infinitive] When it stands in direct discourse, what tenses are used Ί De- fine a participle. 111. Perform crasis and elision on the following: το όνομα; που iariv * του ημέτερου) τοι αν', 6 έτερος j και αιτινςς', διά εμού; έπ\ ήμϊν ; άντ\ ων. 112. Mention the chief uses of the particle av. Translate the following in as many ways as possible : εφη ποιησαι αν τοΰτο. 113. Give the rule for final clauses. Translate έπορευόμην Ινα ωφίΚοίην αυτόν ; change the leading verb to the present tense, and write the clause depending on Ίνα correctly. 114. Give the rule for object clauses after verbs of striving; after verbs of fearing. Translate Έθισαν (feared) ol "Ελληνες, μη προσάγουν προς το κέρας. 115. Give the rules for the use of αυτός. Translate : the king himself ; the same king ; αυτός ουκ εφη Ιέναι. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 181 116. How are conditional sentences classified? How many- kinds of particular suppositions 1 General suppositions 1 What negative particle is used 1 117. Write the following sentence in all the different forms of particular suppositions : iav π άμάρτ^ς, άΧγησ€ΐς. The follow- ing in the different forms of general supposition : et που έξεΧα- vvol Αστυάγης, nepirjye rbv Κυρον ; if (ever) Astyages rode ou% he took Cyrus with him. 118. Translate and parse the following : d δοκύ πΧέωμεν ; iav άΧηθεύσ^ς υπισχνουμαί σοι δέκα τάλαντα ; ei θεοί τι δρωσιν αϊσχρον ουκ €ΐσ\ν θ€θί ; ei μη τι και (also) ναντικον (naval force), *ΐχονουκ αν νήσων €κράτ€ΐ j ft τίνα φ({τγοντα Χηψομαι ως ποΧεμίω χρησομαι (if I shall catch any one fleeing I will treat him as an enemy); προηγόρευεν ότι ft τινα (f)€vyovra Χηψοιτο ως πολίμίω χρησοιτο ] νικώντας τίνα αν άποκτ€ΐναιμ€ν. 119. How are relative sentences classified ? How many forms of conditional relative sentences ? What is the negative particle 1 Translate and parse : e^ei δύναμιν ην πάντες 6ρώμ€ν ; Κύρος Ιθηρ€υ€ν από Ίππου, 6πότ€ γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο εαυτόν Τ€ κα\ τους ίππους \ ίκεΧευσεν αυτοϊς Ζπεσθαι, οποί τις ηγοϊτο, 120. How is the indirect discourse introduced? What general rules do indirect quotations follow ? Rule for indirect questions 1 How is the principle of indirect discourse applied to any dependent clause ? 121. Translate and parse : Xeyet 6Vt γράφει; εΧεξεν oVt γράφοι ; eXeyov οτι ουπώποθ* ούτος 6 ποταμός διάβατος γένοιτο πεζή ei μη τότ€ ) ούτοι εΧεγον οτι Κύρος τεθνηκεν ) Χεγε ι οτι τούτο αν εγενετο \ εΧεγεν οτι τούτο αν εγενετο ) αυτω Κυρον στρατευοντα πρώτος ήγγειΧα \ Τισσαφερ- νης διαβάλΧει (§ 200, Ν. 1) τον Κυρον προς τον άδεΧφον ως επιβουΧευοι αυτω ; αν υμάς όρωσιν άθύμους, πάντες κακοί Έσονται \ Χεγει οτι αν υμάς όρωσιν άθύμους, πάντες κακοί Έσονται \ ΐΧεξεν οτι et υμάς όρωεν άθυμους, πάντες κακοί εσοιντο. 122. How is a periphrastic future formed? Translate μίΧΧω υμάς άγειν εϊς Άσίαι>. 182 GREEK LESSONS. 123. Give the rule for causal sentences. Translate and parse the following : τον στρατηγον εκάκιζον οτι ουκ επεξάγοι (they found fault with the general, because (as they said) he did not lead them out). 124. How is a wish expressed in Greek] Translate into Greek : Ο that this may happen ! Ο that this had happened I 125. Define the imperative mood. What person is used in exhortations ] in prohibitions Ϊ How is the first person of the subjunctive used? 1 #6. Translate and parse : λέγε ; φείγε ίλθέτω, χαιρόντων, *ίδω- μ€ν , μη ποίει τούτο, μη ποίησες τούτο, βονλ€ί ειπώ τούτο. 127. The following verbs use the future middle in a passive Sense ; form the future : άδικϊω, αλίσκω, βλάπτω, όμολογίω, τιμάω, φυλάττω, 128. Give the principal uses of the infinitive when not in indirect discourse. 129. Translate and parse the following: εξεστι μενειν; δέομαι νμων μενειν ) δεινός λέγειν ) ε'ίργει σε τούτο ποιεϊν \ εγω τριήρεις ώστε ελεϊν το πλοϊον \ πριν καταλΰσαι το στράτευμα βασιλεύς εφάνη \ Μένων δήλος ην επιθυμών πλούτων. 130. Define a participle. Mention the chief uses of the participle. 131. Translate and parse the following: τούτο ποιουσιν νομί- ζοντες ', ταύτα εΙπών άπ-ηει ', συλλαμβάνει Κνρον ως άποκτενών j αρξομαι λέγων', μεμνημαι αυτόν τούτο ποιήσαντα', δήλος ην Κύρος ως σπεύδων ) ταύτα άκούσαντες άπήλαυνον \ ετυγγανεν απών \ το ύδωρ εύωνότατον (cheapest) άριστον ον ) τους φίλους εύεργετοίιντες κα\ τους εχθρούς δυνήσεσθε κολάζειν (if you benefit your friends you will also be able to punish your enemies) ', Κνρος ετι παις ων εθανμάζετο ; οΐδα αυτόν λυπηρον (troublesome) οντά. 132. What constructions are used with verbal adjectives in -τεος ] Translate the following : 6 πατήρ σοι τιμητεος εστίν \ διωκτεον την άρετήν ) ταύτα ήμϊν ποιητεον εστί. 133. How are questions asked in Greek] Translate the MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 183 following: tp 9 ofa ίστιν ασθενής; &λλο τι $ άδικου μεν ; πότερον δί- δρακεν ή ου. 134. How many negative adverbs 1 Which is used with the indicative in independent sentences 1 Which with causal sen- tences 1 With the infinitive J With conditional sentences] With the participle expressing condition ] 135. Translate and parse the following: εϊ τοντο αληθές εστί, χαίρω \ εΐ εγραψεν, ηλθον αν \ είθε τούτο αληθές ην; έρωτα τι έγράψαμεν; ου μη τούτο γένηται ; δοκεϊ μοι κατακαυσαι τας άμαξας, Ίνα μη τα ζεύγη ημών στρατηγτ}, άλλα. πορευώμεθα οπη αν ττ] στρατιά συμφέρτ} ; τούτου επεθυμει, ίνα ευ πράττοι ; Κλέαρχος εβουλεύετο, εϊ πέμπουν τινας η πάντες ΐοιεν (what was the direct question 1 πέμπωμεν, &c.) ; τί ποιώμεν ; φησ\ γράφειν \ εφη γράφειν ; Κλέαρχος τους αυτού στρατιώτας εβιάζετο (§ 200, .Ν. 2), ιέναι ; ήρετο τις 6 θόρυβος εΐη ; έλεγε το στράτευμα μάχεσθαι ; έλεγε το στράτευμα τη προτεραία μάχεσθαι (§ 203, Ν, 1) ; φησϊ τούτο πεπραχεναι ; εφη τούτο πεπραχεναι ; ταύτα ποιησαντες άπελ- θεϊν βούλονται , βουλοίμην αν λαθεϊν αυτόν άπελθών ; μέλλει τούτο πράττ€ΐν ; ειπεν οτι βουλεται ; tore ημάς ελθόντες Ίνα τούτο ϊδοιμεν. 136. The following verbs use the future middle in an active sense; form the future middle, and account for the euphonic changes : αδω, ακούω, άμαρτάνω, βαίνω, βιόω, βοάω, γελάω, γιγνώσκω, δείδω, διδράσκω, διώκω, εϊμ'ι, θαυμάζω, θνησκω, κλαίω, λαγχανω, μαν- θάνω, οΐδα, πάσχω, ομνυμι, πίνω, πηδάω, πίπτω, σιγάω, σιωπάω, τρέχω, τυγχάνω, φεύγω. VOCABULARIES. I. GEEEK AND ENGLISH. ά- (άζ>- before a vowel), called alpha privative, denoting privation or negation, like Eng. un-, Lat. in ; as d-7rai?, childless. Άβροκόμας, -α, (ό), Abrocdmas, sa- trap of Phoenicia, and general under Artaxerxes. "Αβυδοε, -ov, (η), Abydus, a city of Asia Minor. epeiv, being used of things, to bring ; mid. to lead away for one's self; ά'γβσθαι yvvouKa, to take to one's self a wife, like Lat. ducere uxorem. From same root as Lat. ago, Eng. Agile. άγων, -ώνος, (ό), an assembly met to see games ; hence, a contest, a game ; cf. Eng. Agony. άδ€ΐ7τνος, -ov, without supper. αδελφός, -ου, (ό), α brother, regular except the voc. which is &8e\s, -a, -ov, of like value, worth as much, w. gen. ; worthy, valuable; πολλού αΊ-ιος, worthy of much ; ανω- τέρας τιμής, more adequate honor, 61, 16 ; &ρχ€ίν άξιώτατος, most worthy to ride ; adv. άζίως. άξιοω, (ώ), f. -ώσω, pf. ήξίωκα, to think or deem worthy of a thins:, W. and inf. ; to think ft to do or be ; to think, to demand, to ask ; ήξίου δοθήναί οι ταύτας τας πόλεις, he asked that these cities might be given to him. άξων, -ovos, (6), an axle. άοπλος, -ov, without armor. άπαγγ€λλω (από, άγγέλλω), to an- nounce. απάγω (air 6, &*γω), to lead back, to bring back, to march. άπαιτ€ω, (ω), (άπό, αιτέω), f. -ήσω, pf. άπήτηκα, to demand ; pass, to have a thing dtmanded of one. άιταλλάσ•<Γω, Att. -ττω (άλλάττω, f. -άξω, a. ^λλα^α, pf. ήλλαχα, 2 a. pass. ήλλά*γην), to set free, release, to get rid of a thing ; to free from ; to go away, to withdraw ; pass, to withdraw. απαλλαγή, -ης, (ή), deliverance, re- lease. άπαξ, adv. once for all. άΐΓαρασ-κ€ΰα<Γτος, -ov, unprepared. άπαράσ-κευος, -ov, unprepared. airas, απασ-α, άπαν, strengthened form of was, all, quite all, all together. άΐΓ6ΐθ€ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to disobey. dirciat (από, είμι), to go away. § 200, N. 3 (end). άιτ€ΐ|ΐι (από, elpl), to be absent. aimirov (από, €Ϊπον), f. άπερω, pf. άπείρηκα, to refuse, deny, renounce. aircXavva) (από, έλαύνω), to dislodge, to inarch away, to ride away. απέρχομαι (από, έρχομαι), to go away, to depart from, to go over ; παρά βασιλέως πολλοί προς ~Κΰρον άπηλ- θον, many went over from the king to Cyrus, p. 61, 16. άιτ€χω (από, έχω), to hold back, to abstain or desist from ; intrans. to be distant, p. 70, 8. άπήλθον, see απέρχομαι. από, prep. w. gen. only, from, away from. Sometimes denotes means, and then rendered by. See § 197, N. 1. αποβιβάζω (από, βιβάζω, f. -άσω, &c. ), to cause to go forth, to land. αποβλέπω (άπό, βλέπω), to look away. άπο8€ίκνυμι (άπό, δείκννμι), to show forth, appoint; mid. to express one's opinion. άποδ€ρω (άπό, δέρω, f. δερω (§ 120, 1), a, έδειρα (§ 121), pf. pass. δέ• δαρμαι), to flay. άποδώράσκω 6 'Αρίστιππος άποδιδράσ-κω (άπό, διδράσκω), to run away. άποδίδωμι (από, δίδωμή, to give back, to pay. ά*ττοθνή<Γκω (από, θνήσκω), to die, to be killed ; used in Attic as pass, of άποκτείνω. άπόκ€ΐμαι (από, κεΐμαή, to be laid away. αποκόπτω (από, κόπτω), to cut away. αποκρίνομαι (από, κρίνω), i. άπο- κρινοΰμαι (§ 120, 1), pf. άποκέκρι- μαι, to reply, to answer, άποκτ€ΐνω (ά7τό, κτείνω), to kill, to put to death ; for pass, see άποθνή<τκω. απολαμβάνω (από, λαμβάνω), to take back, to receive. άπολβίπω (από, λείπω), to leave be- hind, to abandon. άπόλλυμι (από, δλλυμι), f. απολέσω, pf. άπολώλεκα, 2 pf. άπόλωλα, to destroy utterly, to slay, to loose; in 2 pf. and 2 plupf. act. and mid. to die, to pensh. 'Απόλλων, -ωνο$, (ό), voc. "Απολλον, § 48, 2, d. Κ., Apollo. αποπέμπω (από, πέμπω), to send back, to send ; mid. to dismiss. αποπλέω (από, πλέω), to sail away. άπορέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to be in want, to be perplexed. άπορος, -οι>, impassable, impracticable, insuperable. άπο<τπάω, (ώ), (από, σπάω, f. σπάσω, a. Ισττασα (§ 106, Ν. 2), pf. ίσπα- κα (§101, 3), p. pass, ϊσπασμαι (§113, Ν. 1), to draw away, to with- draw. αποστέλλω (α'πό, στέλλω), to send away, to send, to despatch. Eng. Apostle. άποσ-τροφή, -fjs, (ή), act of turning away, a place of refuge. άποτ€ίνω (από, τείνω), to extend, to stretch out άποτέμνω (aVo, τέμνω), to cut off. άποτίθημι (aVo, τίθημι), to put away ; mid. to lay aside. άποτίνω (από, τίνω, f. -ίσω, a. ίτισα, pf. τέτικα), to pay back, requite. αποτρέπω, f. -ψω, to turn away from a thing ; w. ace. to turn away or back ; mid. to turn from a thing. άποφαίνω (από, φαίνω), to show forth. άποφ€νγω (από, φεΰγω), to escape. άποχωρέω, (ώ), (από, χωρέω, -ήσω, &c.), to withdraw. απτω, f. &ψω, a. ήψα, pf. ήφα, ρ. pass, ήμμαι, a. ήφθην, generally used in the mid., άπτομαι, f. άγο- μαι, a. mid. ήψάμψ, to touch. άρα, illative conj. like οΰν, then, therefore, accordingly; ουκ άρα ετι, then not at all. άρα, interrog. particle, stronger than άρα, implying nothing as to the answer expected ; άρα ου, implies that an affirmative, and άρα μή that a negative, answer is ex- pected ; see § 282, 2. άργύριον, -ου, (τό), (dim. of άρ"/υρος, silver), a piece of silver, silver money. άρ€τή, -ijs, (ή), virtue, good conduct, valor. άρήγω, f. άρήξω, to help, to succor. Άριαϊος, -ου, (ό), Ariaeus, com- mander of the Asiatics in the army of Cyrus. άριθμέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to number, to reckon, to count. αριθμός, -ου, (ό), a number, an enu- meration. άρκτος, -ου, (ό), a bear. άρισ-τάω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, pf. ήρίστηκα, to breakfast ; to take any meal. 'Αρίστιππος, -ου, (ό), Aristippus, άριστος αφανής άριστος, best, noblest ; sup. of ά-γαθό*. 'Αρκάς, -άδος, (ό), an Arcadian. άρμα, -ατός, (το), a chariot. άρμάμαξα, -ης, (ή), a covered chariot. άρνός, του or της, gen. of an obsolete nom. (dps), the nom. in use being αμνός ; dat. αρνί, ace. &pva, du. &pve ; pi. ap^es, gen. άρνων, dat. άρ^άσι, ace. &ρνας, a lamb ; a sheep. αρπάζω, f. άρπάσω, and άρπάσομαί, a. ήρπασα, pf. ήρπακα, pf. pass. ήρπασμαι, a. ήρπάσθψ, to plunder, to carry off. *Αρταγή>σης, -oi', (ό), Artagerses. 'Αρταξέρξης, -ου, (ό), Artaxerxes, the name of three kings of Persia. Artaxerxes II., surnamed Mnemon, from his good memory, 1 brother of Cyrus, and reigned from B. - Ml. Άρταττάτης, -ov, (ό), Artapates. άρτι, adv. /j/n/, exactly, just now. αρχαίος, -α, -ov (αρχή), from the be- ginning, old, ancient ; Κύρος 6 αρ- χαίος, Cyrus the .Xlder. α ΡΧή> "β*ι (ή)ι beginning, government, prori άρχω, f. ά>$ω, a. %>£a, pf. ^ρχα, pf. I. fyry/iat, a. pass, ήρχθην, to b* gin , govern, rule, command. Arc II -, in compounds. άρχων, -euros, (6), a ruler, commander. άσ€βής, -ές, ungodly, impious. άσθ€ν€ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to be weak. άσθ€νής, -ές, witfout strength, weak, feeble, sickly. άσινώς, adv. without harm. ασκός, -οΰ, (ό), a leathern bag. *Ασττ6ν8ιος, -ov, (6), an Aspendian. άσττίς, -ίδος, (η), a shield; άσπις μνρία, ten thousand shield, i. e. ten thousand hoplites, or heavy armed infantry. άστράΐΓτω, f. -ψω, to lighten, to gleam ; impers. άστράπτει, it lightens. 'Αστυάγης, -ous, (ό), Astyages, king of Media. ασφαλής, -is, firm; of persons, sure, trusty ; of things, sure, certain; ev άσφαλεστάτφ, in the safest position. ασφαλώς, adv. firmly ,securely ; comp. άσφαλέστερον, sup. -έστατα. άτακτος, -ov, in disorder. ατιμάζω, f. ατιμάσω, a. ητίμασα, pf. ήτίμασμαι, to dishonor. ατυχής, -h (a priv. and τνχείν), luckless, unfortunate; adv. ~χως. αΰ, adv. again, back. It often de- notes merely the continuation of the narrative, and cannot well be rendered in English. αύθις, adv. again, back again. αυλών, -ωνος, (6), a canal. αυξάνω or αΰξω, f. αυξήσω, a. ηϋξησα, pf. ηνξηκα ; pf. pass, ηΰξημαι, a. ήνξήθην, to make grow, increase; pass, to be increased, to grow. αΰριον, adv. to-morrow. αύτίκα, adv. forthwith, immediately. αυτόματος, -η, -ou, acting of one 9 sown will; of plants, spontaneous; από του αυτομάτου, of one's own accord. αυτομολ&ο, (ώ), f. -ήσω, a. ηύτομό- λησα, to desert ; oi αύτομο\ήσαντες, those who (had) deserted. αυτός, -ή, -ό, intens. pron. self; pre- ceded by the article, the same, in the oblique cases, him, her, it, them. Auto-, in compounds. αύτοΰ, adv. here, in this place. αύτοΰ, -ης, contr. from εαυτού, -ης, §80. άφαιρ€ω, (ώ), (αϊτό, αίρέω), to take away, to deprive. αφανής, -ες (ά-, φαίνω), unseen, out of sight, invisible, vanished ; missing. άφαρττάζω 8 βιάζα άφαρπάξω (από, αρπάζω), f. -ά£ω, Att. -άσω or -άσομαι, a. pass. -ηρπάσθην, pf. -ήρπασμαι, to steed from, to plunder. άφεΐλον, see άφαιρέω. άφίηαι (αϊτό, away, ϊημι, to send), f. αφήσω, a. άφήκα, pf. άφεΐκα, pf. pass, άφεΐμαι, a. pass, άφείθην, to send away, let go, dismiss, suffer to escape. άφικνέομαι (αϊτό, ϊκνέομαι, f. ϊξομαι, pf. ΐ~/μαι, 2 a. Ικόμην) , to come to, arrive ; ύστεροι άφ'ικοντο, came later. άφ ιππεύω (από, Ιππεύω), f. -εύσω, &c, to ride away. άφίστημι (aVo, ΐστημι, which see), impf, άφίστην, f. άποστήσω, a. άπέστησα, a. mid. άπεστησάμην, ill these tenses itis trans, to put away, remove, to make revolt; intrans. in the pass, with 2 a. act., pf., plupf., and f. mid. to stand, to withdraw from, to retire ; άφεστή- κεσαν προ* Kvpov, revolted to Cyrus, I. 1. 6 ; άποστηναι προς, (namely) to revolt to, I. 1. 7. 'Αχαιός, -οϋ, (6), an Achaean. αχάριστος, -op, unpleasing, unre- warded ; adv. άχαρίστως, without gratitude. αχθομαι, f. αχθέσομαι or άχθεσθή- σομαι, a. pass, ήχθέσθην, to be dis- pleased ; ουδέν ήχθετο αύτων πολε- μούντων, he was displeased in no respect because (§ 277, 2) they were engaged in war. &χρι, before a vowel αχρις, up to, w. gen. ; conj. until; see § 239, 1. B. Βαβυλών, -ωνος, (ή), Babylon, a city upon the river Euphrates, βαθύς, -ela, -ύ, deep or high ; comp. βαθύτερος, sup. βαθύτατο*. βαίνω, f. βήσομαι (poet, except in comp.), pf. βέβηκα, pf. pass, βέβ- αμαι, a. pass, έβάθψ (rare), 2 a. Ζβψ, like ί-στην, to go, to step, walk; (the fut. and aor. are transitive, to make to go). βακτηρία, -as, (η), a staff. βάλλω, f. βαλώ (§ 120, 1), pf. βέβ- ληκα, 2 a. Ζβαλον, pf. pass, βέβ- λημαι, 1 a. pass, έβλήθην, f. mid. βαλοΰμαι, to throw at, cast at ; the object thrown, when expressed, is in the dative. βαρβαρικός, -ή> -όν, barbarian. βαρβαρικώς, adv. in a barbarian (e. g. Persian) language. βάρβαρος, -ου, (6), a barbarian. βαρέως, adv. heavily. βαρύς, -εΐα, -ύ, heavy, burdensome; comp. βαρύτερος, sup. βαρύτατος. βασίλεια, -as, (ή), a queen. βασιλεία, -as, (η), a kingdom ; κατέ- στη εις την βασιλείαν, he became established in the kingdom• βα<τίλ€ΐος, -ov, belonging to a king, royal ; (το) βασιλέων or (τα) βασί- λεια, palace. βασιλεύς, -έως, (6), a king. βασιλεύω, f. -εϋσω, to be ling, to reign. βασιλικός, -ή, -bv, royal, of a king ; subst. βασιλικός, -ου, (δ), a courtier, a nobleman, βελτίων, βελτιον, comp. of αγαθός, better. βία, -as, (η), force, violence. βιάζω, f. -άσω, a. pass, έβιάσθην, pf. βιαίως γίγνοααι β€βίασμαι, to force, w. ace; to compel, w. infin. βιαίως, adv. violently, severely. βιβλίον, ~ου, (τό), a small book; a treatise. βίκος, -ου, (6), a large earthen vessel, βίος, -ου, (ό), life. βλακ€υω, f. -ενσω, to biter, to be slug- gish. βλάπτω, f. βλάψω, a. έβλαψα, pf. βέβλαφα, pf. pass, βέβλαμμαί, to injure, βλέπω, f. βλέψω, a. -ψα, pf. -φα, pf. pass, βέβλεμμαι, a. έβλέφθψ, to look, to look towards. βοάω, (ώ), f. mid. -ήσομαι, w. active meaning, pf. βεβδημαι, to cry aloud, to shout. βοηθέω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to assist, to bring aid. Βοιώτιος, -ov, (ό), a Boeotian. βουκεφάλας, gen. -a (§ 39), Buceph- alus, name of the horse of Alex- ander the Great. βουλέυω, f. -ενσω, reg. to counsel, advise, pbt ; mid. to deliberate; τα αύτα ταύτα βονλευομένους, plot- ting tlvese same things. βούλομαι, f. βονλήσομαί, pf. βεβού- λημαι, impf. έβονλόμην, Att. ήβου- λδμην, § 102, Ν., to wish, be willing; έ~/ώ ύμων τον μεν οΐκαδε βονλύμενον dirUvai toIs olkol ζηλωτόν ποιήσω άπελθεΐν, I will cause any one of you who wish to go home to depart envied by those at home; έδίδοτο λέγειν βονλομένω, it ivas granted to him wishing to speak, p. 37, 13. βονς, jSoos, (o or ή), § 54, an ox or cow. βραδέως, adv. slowly. βραχύς, -εΐα, -ύ, comp. βραχύτερος, snp. βραχύτατος,οΐ time and space, short ; of numbers, Jew, little. βρέχω, f. βρέξω, a. £ft>e£a, pf. pass. βέβρε^μαι, to wet. βροντή, -rjs, (η), thunder. βωμός, -ov, (6), any raised place for standing, an altar. γαρ, conj. for. It is never the first word in the clause ; usually the second, γέ, enclitic, even, at least, foo, = Lat. quidem. γίίτων, -ovos, (6 or η), a neighbor; as an adj. neighboring, w. gen. ordat. γελάω, (ω), f. mid. ^ελάσομαι (§ 106, Ν. 2, and § 120, 2), w. active meaning, a. γέλασα, pf. 7cy^- Χασμαι, to laugh. γέλως, -ωτοϊ, (ό), laughter. γένος, (eos), -ovs, (τό), birth, descent. (From a root which appears in Lat. genus, Eng. Generous). γέρρον, -ου, (τό), a wicker-shield. γερροψόρος, -ου, (ό), wicker-shield- bearer. γέρων, -ovtos, (ό), an old man. γέφυρα, -as, (ή), a bridge. γη, -ή* (contracted from ye-a or 7α-α), (η), earth, land; κατά yrjv, by hnd ; επί yyjs, upon the ground. Ge-, in compounds, as geology. γήλοφος, -ου, (δ), a hill. γήρας (yrjpaos), y -ηρωϊ (§ 56, 2), (τό), old age. γίγνομαι, f. yevr^o^i, pf. yeykv^ai, 2 pf. (§109, 1) ytyova (§200, N. 6), 2 a. mid. ε^ενόμψ, to become, to γιγνωσ-κω 10 Set be, happen, occur, be born, to come ; άπέπεμπε roi)s Ύΐ^/νομένους δασμού* βασιλεΐ εκ των πόλεων, he sent the revenues accruing from the cities to the king. Lat. gigno, Lat. and Eng. Genius. γιγνώσκω, f. Ύνώσομαι, pf. ^νωκα, 2 a. ε^νων (§ 127, Ν. 1), pf. pass. ^νωσμαι, a. έ^νώσθψ, to know, to recognize, to judge, to determine, w. ace; w. partic, § 280. Cf. Lat. nosco (gnosco). γλυκΰ$, -e?a, -ύ, sweet to the taste; agreeable ; comp. Ύλυκίων, sup. 7X1$- κιστος, also "γλυκύτερος, -tcltos. rXovs, -οΰ, (δ), Glus, an officer in the army of Cyrus. •yvovs, 2 aor. partic. of 'γΐ'γνώσκω. γνώμη, ~η$, (ή), opinion, judgment, plan. Eng. Gnome. γοΰν, adv. tJierefore, now, at least. γράψω, f. Ύράψω, a. έγραψα, pf. yeypafa, pf. pass. Ίέγραμμοα, 2 a. pass. έ7ράφψ (§ 199, Ν. 3), 1 a. pass, not used, to write, to paint, to engrave. γυμνάζω, f. -άσω, pf. Ύ€~/ύμνακα, pf. pass, -ασμαι, a. pass, -άσθην, to exercise, to train. Eng. Gymnas- tic. γυμνήτηδ, -ου, (ό), a light armed soldier. γυμνόε, -ή, -όν, naked. γυνή, (η), gen. yvvaucos, dat. ywaad, ace. yvvaiKa, voc. 71/vat ; dual, yvvcuKe, gen. and dat. yvvaucolv ; plur. nom. yvvcuKes, gen. yvvaiicQv, dat. ywail -ί, ace. 7ΐ>ί>α?κα$, voc. 7wai/ce$, a woman, wife. Δ. δαίμων, -ows, (6), a divinity. δάκνω, f. δήξομαι, pf. δέδηχα, 2 a. Ζδακον, pf. pass, δέδττγμαι, 1 a. pass, έδήχθψ, to bite (esp. of dogs). δακρύω, f. -υσω, 1 a. έδάκρυσα, pf. δεδάκρυκα, to weep. Δάνα, -975, (ή), Ζ)α?ια. δαπανάω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, 1 a. pass. έδαπανήθην, pf. δεδαπάνημαι, to expend, to incur expense; mid. to spend of one's own ; causal, to cause one to incur expense ; άμφί, w. ace. δαρ€ΐκ05, -ου, (0), a daric = about $3.33 in silver, a Persian gold • coin = 20 Attic drachmae (said to have been coined first by Darius, but prob. derived from dara , a king) ; the monthly pay of a com- mon soldier. Δαρ€ΐο$, -ου, (6), Darius, king of Persia ; ascended the throne b. c. 423. δασ-μο$, -ου, (δ), a division ; in Att. revenue, tribute. δέ, conj. but, and; corresponds to μέν in the preceding clause ; it often serves to pass from one thing to another, then rendered and, further ; inseparable enclitic added to names of places to denote mo- tion towards. See § 143, and N. 2. Se'SoiKa (perf. w. meaning of pres.), see δέίδω. δ€ΐ (from δέω), impers. f. δεήσει, a. εδέησε, it is necessary, there is need ; § 172, 2, N". 1 and 2 ; καΐ <ώ* ύμΐν 6 tl άν δέτ) πείσο^κα, and with δε£5ω 11 διακοτττω you I will suffer whatever may be necessary (§ 232, 3), p. 55, 12. δείδω (pres. only used in first pers.), f. mid. δείσομαι, a. Ζδεισα, pf. δέδοικα (§ 109, 2), 2 pf. δέδια, § 130, 1, N. 2, to /ear. δείκνυμι, f. δείξω, a. ϊδειζα, pf. δέ- Seixa, pf. pass, δέδειτγμαι, a. έδαχ- ^77*/, ίο snow, to point out. δείλη, -η*, (η), afternoon, evening. δεινός, -ή, -ov, terrible; prudent, skil- ful ; as a subst. δεινόν, -ου, (το), danger, peril. δεΐττνον, -ου, (τό), a meal, meal-time; either early or late, dinner or sup- per ; in Att. the chief meal, dinner; a supper. δέκα, indeclinable, ten. δένδρο ν, -ου, (to), a tree. δεξιό?, -ά, -όν, right, on die right hand; ce£ias ίδοσαν, they gave their right (hands) or pledges. δέομαι, f. δεήσομαι, pf. δεδέημαι, a. >. έδεήΟην, to need, to want, to ask, entreat, w. gen., see δέω ; δεΐται αύτου, he asks him, p. 66, 18. δέρμα, -ατός, (to), skin, hide. δέρω, f. δερω (§ 120, 1), a. ίδειρα (S 121), pf. pass, δέδαρμαι, 2 a. pass. ^5ά/>τ7ΐ/ (§ 109, 3), to flay. δεσ-μόδ, -oD, (ό), α 6an, ίο iuW, to fasten. δέω, f. δεήσω, a. εδέησα, pf. δεδέηκα, pf. pass, δεδέημαι, a. pass, έδεήθην, to want, need; mid. δέομαι, to ask; impers. δεΓ, inere is need, (om) ougfa ; f. δεήσει, a. εδέησε. δή, intensive particle, now, already, indeed. δήλος, -η, ~ov, plain, clear; with participle, see § 280, Ν. 1 ; δήλος ijv προσιών, it was plain that he was approaching; δήλος ijv ανιώμενος, it was plain that he was troubled. δηλόω, (ω), f. -ώσω, to show, to set forth. δήμος, -ου, (6), the common people, AC, for Δία, see Ζευς. δια, prep, with gen. through ; of time, place, means ; w. ace. poet. Δία, ace. of Ζευς. διαβαίνω (διά, βαίνω), to go through, to cross. διαβάλλω (διά, βάλλω), to attack, slandei-, accuse falsely. διάβασ-ις, -εως, (η), a crossing ova*, a means of crossing ; bridge, ferry. διαβατέος,- α, -ov, verb. adj. that must be crossed; § 281, 1 and 2 ; ποτα- μός δ' ει μέν τις καΐ άλλος άρα ημΐν έστι διαβατέος, ουκ οΐδα, but whether there is then any other river for us to cross, I do not know, p. 52, 11. διαβολή, -ης, (η), calumny. διαγγέλλω (διά, άγγέλλω), to an- nounce, to pass the word. διαγίγνομαι (διά, Ύί^γνομαι), to con- tinue, to pass. διάγω (διά, ά*γω),ίοΙβαάονβτ, tocontinu& διαδίδωμι (διά, δίδωμι), to distribute. διακινδυνεύω (διά, κινδυνεύω), to incur danger. διακόπτω (διά, κόπτω), to cut in pieces. διαλέγω 12 δουπέω διαλέγω (δια, λέ^ ω), to pick out; mid. ίο converse. διαλείπω (διά, λείπω), ίο Zeaye an interval, to be distant. διαρττάζω (δια, αρπάζω, f. αρπάξω, Att. άπάσω or άρπάσομαι, a. ηρπαξα or ήρπασα, pf. ήρπακα, pf. pass. ηρπα'γμαή, to plunder, to carry off as plunder ; καταλαμβάνουσι . . . διηρ- πασμένα, and they, also, found most of their other effects plundered,^. 73, 5. διαπράττω (διά, πράττω), to accom- plish ; mid. ίο effect for one y s self. Ζιασ-ττίίρω (δια, σπείρω, f. σπερώ, pf. pass. Ζσπαρμαι), to draw apart, to scatter, to spread abroad. διατ€λέω (ώ), f. -ήσω, to bring quite to an end ; to continue doing. διατίθημι (διά, τίθημι), to dispose; πάντα* οΰτω διατιθεις άπεπέμπετο, so disposing all, he sent (them) back, p. 55, 6. διαφθαρώ (διά, φθείρω, f. ~ερώ, a. -eioa, pf. -αρκα), to destroy. διδάσκω, f. -ά£ω, pf. -αχα, pf. pass. δ€δίδα~/μαι, a. έδιδάχθψ, to teach; mid. to have a person taught. διδράσ-κω, f. δράσομαι, pf. δέδρακα, 2 a. έδραν, to run away, to es- cape; only found in compounds; 2 a. έδρα?, δρω, δραίψ, δράναι, δρας. δίδωαι, f. δώσω, a. έδωκα, pf. δέδωκα (§126), pf. pass, δέδομαι, a. έδόθψ, to give, present, Cf. Lat. do, Eng. Dose. διέρχομαι (διά, έρχομαι), to go through ; διήλθε \oyos, a rumor spread abroad, p. 68, 8. διέχω (διά, έχω), to be distant from, separated from. διΐστημι (διά, ϊστημι), to cause to stand apart ; intrans. in the mid., and 2 a., pf., and plupf. act., to stand apart. δίκαιος, -αία, -αιον, just ; έκ του δι- καίου, according to justice; adv. δικαίως; ει μεν δη δίκαια ποιήσω, whether, indeed, I shall act justly, p. 6Q, 13. δικαιοσύνη, -ψ, (ή), justice ; efs ye μην δικαιοσύνην . . .έπιδείκνυσθαι βου- λόμενος, and as regards justice . . . wishing to show himself (a just man), p. 61, 8. δικαιάτης, -rrros, (η), justice. δίκη, -ης, (η), right, justice, an action at law, a penalty, punishment; μη λαβών με δίκψ έπιθτ}, lest having seized me he shall inflict punishment. δισχίλιοι, -αι, -α, two tfousand. διφθέρα, -as, (ή), a tanned skin. δίφρος, -οι/, (ό), a seat in a chariot. διώκω, f. -|ω, a. -ξα, pf. δβδίωχα, pf. pass. -7μαι, a. έδιώχθην, to pursue- διώρυξ, -νχος, (ό or η), a trench, a canal. δοθήναι, see δίδωαι. δοκέω, (ω), (most of the tenses are formed from assumed pres. δόκω), f. δόξω,ζ. ϊδοξα, pf.pass. δέδο^μαι, to seem, to appear good ; impers. δοκεΐ, it seems, it seems good or expedient ; δ δέ άπεκρίνατο ό'τι ούδ' . . . δόξαιμι, and he replied ...I should never seem so at least to you, p. 68, 13 ; to think, 1, 8, 2. δόλιος, -α, -ov, treacherous, deceitful. Δόλοιτ€ς, -ων, (οί), Dolopians. δόξα, -ης, (η), opinion. δόρΊτη<Γτος, -ου, (ό), supper-time. δόρυ, -aros, (τό), a spear; regular in prose. δονλος, -ου, (δ), α slave, subject. δουπέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to make a loud noise ; to fall in battle. δράω 13 άκάζρ δράο», f. δράσω (§ 10G), a. έδρασα, pf. δέδρακα, pf. pass, δέδραμαι, to do. δρίΐτανον, -οι», (τό), a scythe. δαπάνη φόρος, -ον, scythe-bearing. δρόμο?, -ου, (ό), running, flight ; δρό- μω θεϊν, to run hastily ; δρόμος βένετο τοΊς στρατιώταις, lit. α run- ning όβ^απ to the soldiers, or ffe sol- diers began to run. δύναμ-αι, inflected like ίσταμαι in pres. and impf. (for accent, see §127, 6, N. 2), f. δυνησομαα, pf. δεδύνη- μαι, a. pass, έδυνήθην, ήδυνήθην (§ 102, Ν.), impf. έδυνάμην, to be f able, can ; often used with super- latives, ώς μάλιστα έδύνατο, as mwh as he was able. δννοψΛ*, -εως, (ή), power, force, mili- tary power; κατά. δύναμιν, to the best of one's power ; υπέρ δύναμιν, beyond one's power, δυνάστη?, -ov, (6), a ruler, an influen- tial man. δυνατός, -η, -° v i possible, able ; comp. -ώτερος, sup. -wraros. δύνω, imperf. Ζδυνον, see δύω, to set. δύο (§ 77 and N. 1), two. Lat. duo, Eng. Dual. δύσ-βάτο?, -ov, difficult to cross. δύω, fut. δύσω, 1 a. έδυσα (trans, in the 1 a. and fut to put clothes on another), pf. δέδυκα, 2 a. Ζδυν, a. pass, έδύθην, intrans. in all other tenses in act. and mid., of clothes, to put on; of places, to enter ; of the sun and stars, to set. δώδ€κα, indeclinable, twelve. δώρον, -ου, (τό), a gift, present. Iciv, (εί, Αν), contr., ifv, Av, if, used w. subj.; see § 207 and § 223. ίαυτού, -775, -ου, or αύτου, αυτής, αύτοΰ, >n.,of himself, herself, itself, his own, § 80. lata, f. -άσω, a. €Ϊασα, pf. εϊακα, pf. pass. εΐαμαί, a. είάθην, impf. efwv, f. mid. in pass, sense, έάσομαι, to let, suffer ; to permit ; ούδενΧ ττώποτε αχάριστον εΐασε την ττροθυμίαν, he never at any time allowed the zeal of any one (to go) unrewarded, lit. he r alloiced any one his zeal, &c, p. 61, 15. Ίγγύ$, of place, near ; of time, nigh at hand; of numbers, nearly; comp. iyym -έρω, sup. έγγυτάτω (or iyy ύτερον, tyyirrara). iyivero, see γίγνομαι. εγκρατής, -ε 1 ς, master of, w. gen.; toi>s ημετέρους even if; el και, although. cl γαρ, Oif..., that ! ... would that ; see § 251 ; = Lat. utinam. ciSov (the pres. is supplied by δράω), 2 pf. οίδα (as pres. § 130, 2), f. εϊσομαι, to see, to know. ctGe, interj. Ο that! would that; see § 251 ; = Lat. utinam. €ΐκάζω, f. εικάσω, a. -§κασα, pf. pass. cIkos 14 έκττλέω εϊκασμαι, to make like, to liken, to compare, to conjecture. cIkos, -6tos, (to), neut.partic. of εΌικα, likely, probable, reasonable. cI'kocti, indeclinable, twenty. €Ϊκω, f. εί|ω, to be like ; pf. εΌικα with pres. sense, pf. part, έοίκώς, -via, -os, Att. είκώς, -νια, -os ; έοικε, it seems ; ώ$ έοικε, as it seems. ctXov, 2 a. of αίρέω. clfil, έσομαι (see § 129, I.), to be; w. gen. to belong to. The root έσ- is seen in Lat. est ; δια τό έν τοιούτω είναι του κινδύνου προπαντός, lit. on account of being in such (a crisis) of approaching danger, i. e. in such extreme danger; αλλ' έπει ήκουσε Κΰρον έν Κιλικία Οντα, but when he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia, § 280, p. 55, 11. ctju (§ 129, II.), to go. Lat. eo, ire. ciircp (el, πέρ intens.), if indeed. cIttov, 2 a./ said ; 1 a. εΐπα ; the pres. is supplied by φνμί, λέγω, or ay ορεύω, the fut. and pf. by έρώ, εϊρηκα. For the use of εϊπον, φημί, λέyω, in construction of in- direct discourse, see § 260, 2, N. 1. els, w. ace. only, into, to, among. els, \ιία, ϊν (§ 77), one. €ΐ<τβάλλω (ets, βάλλω), to throw into, to make an entrance into. €ΐσβολή, -ης, (ή), an entrance, a pass. clcrcXavvc* (els, έλαύνω) , to march into. ίίσφχομαι (eis, έρχομαι), to enter. clcnrqSaa), (ώ), to leap into; σύν τούτοις είσπτιδήσαντες els τόν πηλον, leaping with these (equipments) into the mud, p. 61, 18. €ΐ<πτίΐΓτω (els, πίπτω), to fall into. 6Ϊσ-ω, adv. within; prep. w. gen. within. ctro, adv. then, after that. €Ϊτ€...€Ϊτ€, €ΪΤ€...ή, whetlier ..or, either ...or. 4k, before a vowel eg, w. gen. only, from, out of; έκ τούτου, hereupon, έκ του αδίκου, by unjust means. ίίκα<Γτο$, -η, -ov, each. CKctrepos, -o, -ov, each. €κατ€ρωθ€ν, adv. on both sides. 4κατ€ρω(Γ€, adv. in both directions. Ικατόν, indeclinable, one hundred. €κ βαίνω (έκ, βαίνω), to go forth. 6 κ βάλλω (έκ, βάλλω), to cast out, banish. έκδέρω (έκ, δέρω, f. δερώ, a. έδειρα, pf. pass, δέδαρμαι), to flay. €K€t, adv. there. €Ketvos, -77, -o (§ 83 and § 148), that, he, = Lat. ille. Ικ€ΐ<τ€, adv. thither. εκκολάπτω (έκ, καλύπτω, f. καλύψω, a. έ κάλυψα, pf. pass, κεκάλυμμαι), to uncover. Ικκληοτία, -as, (ή), an assembly. 4κκλίνω (έκ, κλίνω, f. κλίνω (§ 120,1 ), pf. κέκλικα (§ 109, 3, N.l), pf. pass. κέκλιμαι, a. έκλίΰην), to bend aside, to give way. Ικκομ£{ω, f. -ήσω, Att. -*ώ, (έκ, κομίζω, f. -ίσω, Att. -ιώ (§ 120, 3), a. έκόμισα, pf. pass, κεκόμισμαι), to carry out. Ικκυμαίνω (έκ, κυμαίνω, f. κυμάνω), to be uneven, to bend out. εκλέγω (έκ, λέγω), to choose, to select. εκλείπω (έκ, λείπω), to leave, to aban- don. Eng. Eclipse. €ΚΐΓΐ7Γτω (έκ, πίπτω), to fall out, to be driven out, to be banished ; έπειρατο KaTayeiv τoύs έκπeπτωκ6τas, he at- tempted to restore those who had been j banished. Ικιτλέω (έκ, πλέω, f. mid. πλεύσομαι, a. έπλευσα, pf. pass, πέπλευσμαι), to sail out; see § 123, ΕΓ. 1. Ικττλήττω 15 Ένυάλΐ05 Ικιτλήττω (εκ, πλήττω, ί. πλήξω, a. έπληξα, pf. πέπλψγα), to strike out, to terrify. εκποδών, adv. out of the way. εκφεύγω (εκ, φείτγω), to escape. εκών, -ούσα, -6v, willingly, § 66, X. 1. 2λαβον, see λαμβάνω, ίλαύνω, f. έλάσω, Att. έλω (§ 120, 2), a. ήλασα, pf. έλήλακα (§ 104), a. pass, ήλάθην, pf. έλήλαμαι, to drive, to ride, sc. αομα or ϊππον, march, sc. στράτευμα. 4λεγχω, f. -£ω, 1 a. ^Xc-yfa ; pf. pass. (\ή\€Ίμαι. (§ 113, Ν. 3), a. fkdy- χ0τ/»', /ο convince, confute. ίλελίζω, f. -£ω, ίο reuse ίΛθ cry of ε\ελευ, ίΛβ ivar-cry. ελε'ο-θαι, see αίρε'ω. ελευθερία, -as, (ή), freedom. ελεύθερο*, -a, -ov, Att. -os, -ov,free. Έλλά$, -άδο$, (ή), Grm "Έλλην, -ηνος, (ό), a Gr Ελληνικός, -ή, -6ν, Grecian, G Ελληνικά»?, adv. in the Greek tongue. Έλλησττοντιακόε, -ή, -bv, situated on tpont. Έλλήσ-τΓοντο$, -ου, (b), Ucllespont. 1\πί\ω, -ίσω, Att. -<ώ (§ 120, 3), a. ήλπισα, to hope; in a bad sense, to fear ; w. ace. to hope for ; w. dat. to hope in. corn's, -foOs, (ή), hope. «"μαντοΰ, -77s C§ 80), reflex, pron., of myself. ί*μβαίνω (iv, βαίνω, f. mid. βήσομαι, pf. βέβηκα, 2 a. ϊβην, like ίστην), to go wto or on board, embark, toleap into. εμβάλλω (εν, βάλλω), to throw in, to empty into, to make an attack. ε'μοϋ, €μοί, ε'με', oblique cases of ε'γώ. €μ09, -ή, -or, my, mine. €μττ(πλημι (εν, πίμπλημι, f. πλήσω, a. ξπλησα, pf. πεπληι:α), to fill. ε'μττίτττω (εν, πίπτω), to fall into or upon. εμττροσ-θεν, adv. w. gen., before, in fwnt of. €v, prep. w. dat. only, in, among; of time, during. €vavrtos, -a, -ov, w. gen. or dat., opposite, opposed to. Ινδεια, -as, (ή), need, want. ενδε'κατο$, -77, -ov, eleventh. ε'νδύω (εν, δύω, see δυνω), to put on. ενεδρεύω, f. -εύσω, to lie in wait or ambush. ενειμι (εν, εΙμί), to be within. ?νεκα, w. gen. on account of, for the sake of. ένενή κοντά, ninety. Ι νθα, adv. there ; as relative, where ; with idea of motion, whither; of time, when. ένθεν, adv. thence; as a relative, whence ; of time, thereupon. ενθε'νδε, /ie?jce. ενιοι, -ai, -a, some. ε'ννε'α, m'/ie. ένοικε' ω, (ώ), f. -ψτω, fo inhabit. ενταύθα, adv. of place, there, in that place ; of time, at the very time, then. εντελής, -is, full, complete ; δώσειν τόν μισθον εντελή, to give full pay ; adv. -XcDs, sup. -λεστατα. εντεύθεν, adv. thence, hence ; of time, henceforth. έντίθημι (iv, τίθημή, to place in; to put on board; mid. store up, to hoard. fc'vrcs, prep. w. gen., within; of place or time, adv. within. έντυγχάνω (iv, τυγχάνω), to fall in with, to meet. Ένυάλιο$, -ου, (ό), Enyalius ; (the warlike) name of Ares (Mars). η 16 €ττιλαν9άνω €ζ, prep. ; see €κ. ϊξ, indeclinable, six. 4ξά\ω (εξ, οί^γω), to lead, to induce. έξαιτέω (εξ, αίτέω), to demand, ask for ; mid. to beg off, gain a person's release; ή μητηρ εξαιτησαμένη, his mother having begged him off, p. 77, 6. €ξακι<τχίλιοι, -cu, -a, six thousand. €ξακό(τι<Η, -αι, -a, sz# hundred. ejeivai, inf. of ϊξεστι. c^eXavvo) (e£, βλαώ>ω), ίο dnVe, march ; sc. πόδα, άρμα, ϊππον, στράτευμα, to go, to ride, to march; εντεύθεν εξελαύνει, thence he marches. εξέρχομαι (εξ, έρχομαι.), to go out. 2ξ€<Γτι, impers., it is allowed, or permit- ted. Ιξέτασις, -εως, (ή), a searching out, a military inspection or a review. 4ξή κοντά, sixty. €ξικν€ομαι, f. (-ουμαι), (f. ϊξομαι, pf. Γγμ,αι, 2 a. Ικόμψ), to come up to. ίξίστημ,ι (εξ, ϊστημι), to place out ; in trans, parts, ίο sicwoJ aside from, to withdraw. €|ο•π•λΙζομαι, f. -ίσομαι, to arm com- pletely; pass, and mid., to arm one's self completely. c£cirXicria, -as, (η), full military equip- ment, wider arms, ενταύθα δη εν ttj εξοπλισία .... τετρακόσια, there at that time under arms, the number of the Greeks was ten thousand and four hundred heavy armed men (lit. shield), p. 19, 11. 2ξω, adv. without; prep. w. gen., out- side of, without; of time, beyond. έ-ϊταινέω, (ώ), f. -έσω, Att. -έσομαι, a. t 'πόνεσα (§121, Ν. 1), pf. επήνεκα, to praise, ίο thank, to applaud. €irav (επεί, αν), when, whenever. itrdj conj. when, after, since, for. !ιτ€ΐδάν (επειδή, αν), conj. when, whenever, as soon as, after that. €ΤΓ€ΐδή, when, after, since. hr&jp* (επί, ειμί), to be upon; επτ,ν, there was upon (it). &Γ€ΐμι {επί, ειμί), to march forward, to advance; κωλύσειε τον κάειν επών- Tas, he would hinder them from burn- ing (everything) as they advanced; ή επιουσα 'έως, the following morning. eircCircp (επεί, x^pintens.), since. ^ττ€ΐτα (επί, είτα), then, thereupon. eiri, prep, radical sense, upon; w. gen., rest at a place, upon, at, near, for ; έπι τούτω, for this purpose; εφ εαυτού, by himself; επ ειρήνης, in the time of peace; w. dat., near (when hostility is implied), against; of time, in, on, or at, επί τούτω, on ac- count of this ; depending on, in the power of in addition to; w. ace. to, towards, against. ^ττιβουλεΰα) (επί, βουλεύω), to plot against, § 187. €7Γΐβουλή, -ijs, (ή), a plot. €ΐτιγΙγνομαι (επί, Ύί~/νομαι), to make an attack; to come on. €τπ8€ίκνυ|ΐι (επί, δείκνυμι), to show, exhibit. €ΐηδιώκω (επί, διώκω), to pursue. ίπιΟνμίω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to set one's heart upon a thing, to desire. €7ΓΐκάμΐΓτω (έπί, κάμπτω, f. κάμψω), to wheel around. €ΐτικ€ΐμαι (ετί, κεΐμαι), to attack. cttikCvSuvos, -ov, dangerous, insecure. €7π.κονρημ.α, -aros, (τό), aid, protec- tion. €ΐπ.κρντΓτα> (επί, κρύπτω), to hide, to conceal. €*πιλανθάνω (επί, λανθάνω), to escape notice; mid. to forget, w. partic. see § 279, 2. Ιπιλίίττω cViXcIttcu [hi, \€ΐνω), to fail, to be left ; το eviXeivop^vov, the part left, {ιτιμέλαα, -as, (ή), care, kind atten- tion. «ΐΓΐ|Λ€λ&>μαι (evt, μέλομαι, f. μέ\-ησο- μαι, pf. μεμέΧημαι., a. Ιμβλήθην), to take care of, observe carefully, § 171, 2. €7ημΛγνυμι (ivi, μι•)νυμί), to mingle with, have intercourse tcith. cmmirrco (eVi, νίπτω), to fall upon, to attack, § 1 1 itrCvovos, -ov, painful, toilsome. cm'ppvTos, -ov, well -watered. Έττκτθί'νη?, -oiy, (o), EplsthPnes. ^πίσταμαι, f. έπιστήσομαι, a. pass. ήνιστήθψ, impf. ήνιστάμην, in- flected in the present like the pres. pass, of ϊστημι, for accent, § 127, t, X. % to know. €ΐη<Γτολή, -ijs, (ή), ^Ίτισ-φάττω, f. -£ω, to slat/ upon. ^ττιτάττω (eVi, τάττω), to enjoin upon. fnvrrjSiios, -ov, suitable ; neut. pi. pro- be•. ^ιτιτίθημι (evl, τίθημι), to place upon, /K>se, to attack. imrpiiro» (kvi, τρένω), to turn to, to permit. ίττιτνγχάνω (evl, τιηχάνω), to fall u}»m, to find. €7τιφ€ρω (evi, φέρω), to bear against ; mid. to rush ujwn ; και άρκτον vore ΐνιφ^ρομένην ουκ trpeaev, upon one occasion, also, he did not shrink from a bear rushing upon (him), p. δ 4, 10. ΙιτιχωρΙω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to advance. frrofias t m i^• ϊψομαι, 2 a. mid. βσνόμην, impf. €ΐνόμψ, to follow, to pursue. In the active, eVa>, f. 2ψ ω, 2 a. Ισνον, to be engaged, to be busy about. ctttcL, sera». 17 iircpos €*τττακό<Γΐοι, -αι, -a, seven hundred. Έιτναξα, -t?s, (ή), Epyaxa, wife of Syennesis. εργάζομαι, f. mid. εογάσομαι, pf. €Ϊρτγασμαί, a. είρ^άσθην, to work. ίργον, -ου, (to), worfc. *ρημο$, -of, deserted, unprotected. ερίζω, f. -iVw, a. ψισα, ίο contend with, w. dat. ; νίκησα* ερίζοντά ol vepl σοφία?, (Apollo) conquering him (Marsyas) contending with him (Apollo), (§ 144, 2) concerning (mu- sical) skill. Ιριον, -ov, (to), wool. ΐρμαιον, -ου, (τό), windfall, good luck. €pfiT|V€vs, -6ω5, (ό), an interpreter. ΐρομαι, f. mid. έρήσομαι, 2 a. mid., ηρόμην, impf. €ΐρόμψ, to ask, to in- quire. ίρυμα, -aros, (ro), a fence, a guard, a fortification ; αντί έρνματο*, to serve as a fortification ; έρύματα fyovres, having as defences, p. 71, 25. έρυμνάς, -ή, -6v, strongly fortified. Ερχομαι, f. έλεύσομαι, 2 p. έλήλνθα, ή\θον, to come, to go ; in Attic prose, €Ϊμι is used for έλβύσομαι (J 200, Ν. 3). ερωτάω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, pf. -ηκα, to ask, to ask a question. «σθίω, f. ϊδομαι, pf. ϊδηδοκα, pf. pass. έδήδεσμαι, a. pass, ήδέσθην, 2 a. 1!φα"γον, to eat. «τττφα, -as, (r/), evening. ?(tt€, conj. Μπίέ7; see § 230, 1. ?σχατο$, -τ;, -ov, the furthest; the high- est, lowest, like Lat. summus, the last, the worst, § 142, 4, X. 4 ; vo- \ιν έσχάτην, a frontier city, p. 17, 15 ; adv. εσχάτως, comp. -ώτερον, sup. -ώτατα, &zs£. fcrcpos, -a, -ov, the one or the other of two. In 18 ?ως Ιτι, adv. of present, past, or future time, yet, as yet, longer, still; w. a neg., no longer, at all; μήττοτε £rt, never again ; ούκ &pa tn, then not at all ; Ztl οΰν αν γένοιτο, can you then still be ; p. 68, 13. ΐτοιμοε, -η, -ov, or -os, -ov, ready, of persons, ready; of the mind, ready, quick. Itos, -eos (-ous), (to), a year. Ιτυχον. See τυγχάνω. c$, adv. well. cvScupovia, -as, (ή), prosperity, happi- ness. €υδ at μονί£ω, f. -ίσω, to esteem happy. €νδαίμων, -ov, g. -ovos (εΰ, δαίμων), with a good genius, happy, prosper- ous ; neut. εϋδαιμον. €ύ€ργ€τη$, -ov, (6), a benefactor. €νή9€ΐα, -as, (η), goodness of dispo- sition, simplicity; in a bad sense, silliness, stupidity. €ΐ5ήθη$, -es, (εΰ, fjdos, character), well disposed, simple-minded ; in a bad sense, simple, silly; adv. εύηθως, sup. -ύστατα. €ΰθΰμο$, -ov, cheerful. cv0vs, -εΐα, -ύ, straight, direct; as an adv. ev6os or ευθύ, of place, straight to, direct for; of time, straightway, at once, immediately ; also reg. adv. ευθέως. ctfvoia, -as, (ή), good-will, friendship. €ύνοϊκώ$, adv. friendly ; εννοϊκώς ε*χοι- εν αύτφ, that they might be friendly to him, p. 57, 3. ctfvoos, -oov, contr. euVovs, -ovv (εΰ, voos), well-minded, kind; see § 71, N. 3. €υνρακτο$, -ov, easily done, practica He. €νρημ,α, -aros, (τό), that which is found, windfall. ciipto -κω, f. ενρήσω, pf. ενρηκα, pf. pass, ενρημαί, a. ειφέθην, 2 a. εΰρον 2 a. mid. εύρόμην, to find, to dis- cover. cipos, (-eos), -ovs, (to), breadth, width. cvpvs, -eta, -ύ; g. εύpέos, -etas, -eOs, wide. €ΰτολμο$, -ov, brave. ΕνφράτηΞ, -ov, (6), Euphrates. €ΰχομαι, f. mid. ενξυμαι, a. mid. ηύξά- μην, pf. ηυγμαι, to wish, to pray, tcai oi μεν εΰχοντο (without the aug- ment, § 102, 2) ws 5o\iovs fvras avTovs ληφθήναι, and some prayed that they might be taken on the ground that they were treacherous, p. 61, 17. €Viuvi»p.os, -ov (εν, 6νομα), of gcod name; euphemistic for the ill- omened word apiarepos, left, on the left hand; το εύώννμον (KUpas), the left wing. *E<)>€), f. mid. -ήσομαι, pf. ί}"/ημαι, to go before, to lead an army, Uld titiand : w. dat. to go . gen. *o feat/, command ; to _' ; to Mw& (like . ducere), w. ucc. and infin., 1, 2, 4. ήδ€ω$, adv. comp. -ήδιον, sup. -ήδιστα, with pleasure, gladly. ή8η, adv. now, already, at once. ήδομαι, f. mid. ησθήσομαι, a. pass. -ήσθψ, to be pleased with, glad. ηδονή, -7Js, (ή), pleasure, favor. ήδύ$, ~€ia,-v, sweet, agi-eeable, pleasant; comp. ηδίων ; sup. ήδιστοτ, § 72. ήλθον, see άρχομαι. ήκιστα, sup. adv., comp. ήττον, inihe m\ degree. ήκω, f. ήξω, impf. ηκον in sense of plupf.,fo come, have come; see § 200, Note 3. 'HXctos, ~ov, (ό), an Elean, native of Hie. ηλικία, -ay, (η), age; eirel rfj ηλικία tirpeire, when it became his age, p. 51, 5. 77X10$, -ov, (ό), the sun. ήμ.€λημ^νω$, adv. carelessly. ή|λ€>α, -ay, (77), day; άμα rjj ημέρα, at break of day. ήμ€Τ€ρο$, -a, -ov, our (§ 82). ήαιδ€ή$, -h, half full. T)|itovos, ov, (ό), a mule. ήμισ-υ$, -eta, -v, half. ήν = eav, if; w. sub . fy ημεπ νικήσω- μ€ν, if we shall conquer. ήνικα, adv. when. ηνίοχο?, -ου, (ό), α driver. ήνττ€ρ (τ>, trip intens. ), if. Tj-rrcp, where. ήρόμ,ην, see ?ρομαι. ήσ-υχη, adv. quietly. ήσ-υχία, -as, (77), rest, quiet. ήσσάομαι 20 ϊδιος ήσσάομαι, (ώμαι), Attic ήττάομαι, ί. ήσσηθήσομαί, a. pass. ήσσήθψ, to be inferior, to be conquered. ήσσων, Att. ηττωρ, -ov (§ 73, 2), weaker, comp. of κακοί ; adv. ήττον, less; sup. ήκιστα, least. Θ. θάλασσα, later Attic θάλαττα, -ψ, (ή), the sea; κατά θάλατταν, by sea. θάνατος, -ov, (c), death. θαρσ€ω, (ώ), later Att. θαρρέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to be of good courage. θάρσος, later Att. θάρρος, (-eos), -ovs, (to), courage. θάσ-σ-ον, Att. θάττον, adv. comp. of ταχύ (§ 73). θαυμάζω, f. mid. θανμάσομαι, rare θαυμάσω, a. e^at^acra, pf. τεθαύ- μακα, to wonder, to admire. θαυμάσιος, -a, -op, wonderful. θαυμαστός, -ή, -op, to be wondered at, wondrous, curious; adv. -τώ$, won- derfully. Θάψακος, -ov, (ή), Thapsacus. θ€άομαι, (ώμαι), f. mid. θεάσομαι, a. έθεασάμψ, pf. τεθέαμαι, a. pass. έθεάθην, to behold, to witness; to look on. 0etos, -a, -op, of or from the gods; τα θβΐα, religious observances, omens. 0€λω, f. θελήσω, a. ε θέλησα (not in indie), pf. τεθέληκα, to be willing. Θίμιστοκλής (-έεος), -έονς, (6), The- mistocles, a celebrated Athenian general. 0€os, -ov, (6), God. Eng. Atheist. θεράττων, -optos, (6), an attendant. Θζτταλια, -as, (ή), Thessaly. 0€τταλός, -ov, (6), a Thessalian. 0€ω, f. θεύσομαι (the other tenses are supplied by τρέχω), to run. 06ωρ€ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to view, observe, review. Θηβαίος, -ov, (6), a Theban. θηράω, (ώ,) f. -άσω or -άσομαι,ίο hunt wild beasts. θηρ€υω, (ονθηράω, (ώ), -άσω), f. -εύσω, to hunt. θηριον, -ov, (τό), wild animal, game. θησαυρός, -ov, (τό), a treasure. θνήσκω, f. mid. θαρονμαι, f. pf. re- Mf « (§ 120, 3, Κ. and § 98, 2 Κ), pf. τέθρηκα, § 200, Ν. 6, 2 a. £0α- pop, to die, to be slain ; used as pass, of άιτοκτείρω. θόρυβος, -ov, (6), noise, a confused sound. Θραξ, Θρακός, (ο), a Thracian. θνγάτηρ, -Tpos, (ή)) a daughter. θυμός, -ov, (6), soul. θύρα, -as, (ή), a door; επί ra?s, βα- σιλέως, θύραις, at the, doors of the king, i. e., at court. θυσία, -as, (ή), a sacrifice. θύω, f. θϋσω, a. εθνσα, pf. τέθνκα, pf. pass, τέθυμαι, a. έτύθηρ, § 17, 2, X., to sacrifice, to celebrate with sacri- fices. θωρακίζω, f. -ίσω, to arm with the breastplate. θώραξ, -α /cos, (ό), a breastplate. I. Ιάομαι, (ωμαή, f. mid. ίάσομαι, a. pass, ιάθψ and pf. ϊαμαι in a pass, sense, a. mid. Ιασάμψ, to heal; of wounds, to dress. Ιατρός, -ov, (6), a physician. ISeiv, see όράω. 1'Sios, -ία, -op, private; as subst. τ 6 ϊδωρ; εις τό tdiop,Jbr one's private use. Ιδιώτης 21 καθίστημι Ιδιώτης, -οι», (ό), a private person, one in a private station, a common soldier, ίδρόω, (ώ), f. -ώσω, § 123, Ν. 3, to perspire, to sweat. Ιδών, see όραω. Upciov, -ου, (το), a victim for sacrifice. Upov, -ου, (τό)\ anything sacred; τα iepd, the omens from the entrails of a victim. Upos, ά-, -6v, sacred. fyus f. Κ a. ϊ,κ* (§ 121, Note 2), pf. dfctt, pf. pass, ei/xcu, a. pus. «ftfyi', to send, to throw; mid. /o rush; see § 129, III. Ικανός, -ή, -6v, befitting; of persons, sufficient, able ; of things, enough. ίκάνώς, adv. sufficiently. Ίκόνιον, -ου, (τό), Iconium, a city of 'iiia. ϊλη, -*7*> (η), a croicd, a band, a troop of horse ; κατ l\as, in companies of horse. ίμάτιον, -oi', (τό), an outer garment, a cloak worn above the χιτών. "lij. (§ 215), that, in order that. ΐ-ϊΓτταρχος, -ov, (ό), a commander of tJit horse. Imrcvs, -ίως, (ό), horseman. ίτπτόδρομος, -ου, (ό), a race-course for horses. ΐτπτος, -ου, (ο, η), a horse, a mare; άφ' ϊπττον θηρ€ν€ΐν, to hunt on horse- back ; (ή) tnwos, cavalry. ΐ<τος, ΐση, ΐσον, Att. ίσος, -η, -ov, equal to, like ; of place, level ; Att. comp. ίσαίτερο* ; έν ϊσω, in an even line. Ίσσ -ot, -ων, (oi), Issi, commonly Issus. ΐστημι, f. στήσω, a. έστησα, pf. 'έστη- κα, a. pass, έστάθην, pf. 'έστάμαι. ; f. pf. έστήζω (§ 120, 3, Ν. and § 98, 2, Ν.), 2 a. ϊστην, to place, sta- tion ; trans, to make to stand, to place, to station, in the pres., impf., fut. and a., act. ; intrans., to stand, to be set or placed, in pf., plupf., 2 a. and fut. pf., act. and in pass. ; mid. to place one's self, to stand, except in the pres., impf. and a. which is trans., to place or set up for one's self; 2 pf. as pres. § 279, 2 ; 2 plupf. as impf. both in- trans. ; δττον ϊτνχεν 'έκαστος έστη- κώϊ, wherever each one happened to be standing; ίστασαν, they stood still, p. 66, 16, see § 130, 1. 1<τχϋρός, -ά, -6v, strong. Ισ-χνρώς, adv. strongly, exceedingly, very severely; sup. ισχυρότατα. ίσ*χύς, -ύος, (ή), strength esp. of the body ; military force. ιχθύς, -vos, (6), a fish. ϊχνιον, -ov, (τό), a track. Ιωνία, -as, (η), Ionia, a district on the coast of Asia Minor. 'Ιωνικός, -η, •όν, Ionian. καθίζομαι (κατά, ίξΌμαι), f. mid. καθβδοΰμαι, impf. έκαθεζόμην, to sit down ; of an army, to take up a po- sition, to halt. καθηδνιταθ^ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω (κατά, ηδύς, παθ€Ϊν), to squander in luxury. καθήκω (κατά, 'ήκω), to come down, to extend down. καθίσ-τημι (κατά, ΐστημι), to station, appoint, make, arrange, to become established; intrans. in 2 a., pf., and plupf., and in all tenses of pass., καθοράω 22 κατακαίνω to be placed, to set down, to be estab- lished; κατέστη εις την βασι,Χείαν, he became established in the kingdom. καθοράω, (ώ), (κατά, όράω), to look down upon, to descry, to observe. κα£, conj. and, also, even; και . . . και, both . . . and. καίττερ (/cat, πέρ), although, § 277, 6, N. 1. καιρός, -ου, (ό), due measure; of time, a fitting time, occasion ; of place, the right spot. καίω, Att. κάω, f. καύσω, a. ϊκαυσα, pf. κέκαυκα, impf. ΐκαιον, Att. Ζκαον, a. pass, έκαύθην, (2 a. έκάην), pf. κέκαυμαι, to bui'n. κακός, -ή, -op, bad, evil, wicked; (rb) κακόν, subst. evil, harm; comp. κα- κίων, sup. κάκιστος, § 73, 2 ; κα /ci- ous ασι των βαρβάρων , they are worse (more cowardly) than the barbarians, p. 18, 13. κακώ$, adv. ill, badly ; ποιεΐν κακώς, to treat ill; see § 165, Note 1. καλεω, (ώ), f. καλέσω, Att. καλώ (§ 120, 2), a. i κάλεσα, pf. κέκληκα, a. pass, έκλήθην, pf. κέκλημαι, to call, to summon, name. κάλλος, -eos, Att. -ovs, (τό), beauty. καλός, -ή, ~6v, beautiful, honorable; of sacrifices, auspicious, favorable; comp. καλλίων, sup. κάλλιστος, see §73. καλώς, adv. fairly, well; καλώς ϊχειν, to be well; καλώς πράττειν, to be for- tunate, § 165, N. 2 ; comp. κάλλιον, sup. κάλλιστα. καν = και &v (εάν), and if. κάν€ον, Att. contr. κάνουν, -ου, (τό), a basket. καπηλεΐον, -ου, (τό), an inn; ol τα καπηλεία ίχοντες, those having inns, innkeepers. καιτνός, -ου, (6), smoke. ΚαΊηταδοχια, -α?, (η), Cappadocia. κάπρος, -ου, (ό), α wild bo„cr. κάρφη, -ης, (η), hay. Καστωλός, -ου, (b), Castolus; Καστω- λου πεδίον, the plain of Castolus. κατά, prep, primarily denoting mo- tion from above, down; w. gen. down from, down ; against, λόγο? κατά τίνος, a speech against one (ac- cused) ; but προς τίνα, a speech in answer to one (an opponent) ; w. ace. down along; of time, through- out; of numbers, nearly ; of fitness, according to; of place, by; κατά yrjv, by land; κατά £θνη, by nations; κατά ϊλας, in companies. καταβαίνω (κατά, βαίνω), to go down (from the interior to the coast, op- posed to αναβαίνω, to go up). καταγγέλλω (κατά, άyyέλλω), to an- nounce, to declare, to give information against (a person gen.), of (any- thing ace). κατάγω (κατά, άγω), to lead down, to restore especially from banishment. καταδύω (κατά, δύω, δύνω), trans, in thepres., f. and a., (δύω, f. δύσω, a. έδυσα), to make to sink; intrans. in 2 a., pf., plupf., act. and in mid., to sink, set of the sun ; μη ημάς αύταις τα?9 τριήρεσι κατάδυση, lest he should sink us together with the tri- remes themselves, p. 53, 12. καταθεάομ,αι, (ώμαι), (κατά, θεάομαι), to look down upon, to view. κατακαίνω (κατά, καίνω, f. κανώ § 120, 1), pf. κέκονα (§ 109, 1), 2 a. Ζκανον), to kill ; to cut off, ότι τους προκατακάοντας .... Ζλοι,ύαί he would either cut off, by lying in ambush, the cavalry burning (all) before, &c, p. 63, 12. κατακαίω 23 Κλ.€αρχ<>8 κατακαίω, Att. -κάω (κατά, καίω), to burn down. κατακότττω (κατά, κόπτω), to cut in pieces. καταλαμβάνω (κατά, λαμβάνω), to seize upon, occupy ; pass, to be taken. καταλείπω (κατά, λείπω), to leave; pass, to be left, abandoned. καταλλάττω (κατά, άλλάττω, f. αλ- λάξω, pf. ^λλα£α, pf. pass, ^λλαγ- μαι), to change, to reconcile. καταλύω (κατά, λύω), to dissolve; to bring to an end; mid. to make » ; προς w. ace. to terminate the war against, to come to an agreement with ; πορείαν, to halt. κατανοέω, (ώ), (νοέω), (ώ), f. -ήσω, to remark ; to observe, 1, 2, 4. καταντητέρας, adv. ojiposite w. gen. καταττηδάω, (ώ), f. -ήσομαι, to leap down from. καταιτράττω (κατά, πράττω), to ac- complish ; el καλώ* καταπράξειεν, if he should successfully accomplish ; § 16δ, N. 2. κατα<τκ€υάζω (κατά, σκευάζω, f. -άσω), to prepare, regulate ; mid. to build, to furnish a house. κατα<πτάω (κατά, σπάω, f. σπάσω), to drag down ; άλλα συμπασών κατε- σπάσθη άπό του Ιππου, but falling with (her) he was dragged from his horse, p. 54, 10. κατατίθηαι (κατά, τίθημι), to place down, to place away, to hoard. καταφανής, -^s, in plain sight, clearly visible. καταφεύγω (κατά, φεΰγω), to flee for refuge. κατεΐδον, see καθοράω. κατέχω (κατά, £χω), to hold back, to restrain. κατιδεΐν, see καθοράω. κάτω, adv. downwards, w. verbs of motion ; w. gen. down from, below. Καύσ*τρου πεδίον, the plain ofCaystrus. κάω, see καίω. κε'γχρος, -ου, (ό or ή), millet. Kctuat, f. κείσομαι, imperf. εκείμην, to lie, to lie (dead) ; αποθανόντες Ζκειντο επί τη yrj, they lay dead (lit. having died) upon the ground; used as pass, to τίθημι. Κελαιναί, -ων, (at), Celainai. κελεύω, f. -εύσω, a. έκέλευσα, to order, bid, w. dat. of person, κενός, -ή, -όν, empty ; w. gen. without; comp. -ότερος, sup. -ότατος ; also regular -ώτερος, -ώτατος. Κεράμων αγορά, (ή), the market of the Ceramians. κεράννυμι, f. κεράσω (Att. κερω, (§ 120, 2), a. έκέρασα, pf. pass. κέκραμαι, a. pass, έκράθην, to mix, mingle; οίνω κεράσας αυτήν, having mingled it with wine, 1, 2, 13. κέρας, -ατός, (-αος), -ως, (τό), a horn, the wing of an army, § 56, 2. Κ€φαλή, -ής, (ή), the head. Cf. Lat. caput, Eng. Capital. κήρνγαα, -ατός, (τό), a proclamation by a herald. κηρνξ, -υκος, (ό), a herald. κηρυοτσ•ω, f. -£ω, a. έ* κήρυξα, to pro- claim; impers. the herald proclaims. Κιλικία, -as, (ή), Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor. Κίλιξ, Κίλικος, (6), a Cilician. Κίλισ -cra, -ης, (ή), α Cilician woman. κινδυνεύω, f. -εύσω, to be in danger, to incur danger. κίνδυνος, -ου, (ό), danger. κινε'ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to move about. Κλέαρχος, -ου, (ό), Charchus, the commander of the mercenaries in Cyrus's service. κλέπτω 24 κώμη κλέπτω, f. κλέψω, pf. κέκλοφα (§ 109, 1), a. pass, έκλέφθην, pf. κέκλεμ- μαι, 2 a. έκλάπην, to steal, κνημίς, -toos, (ή), a greave. κοινή dat. fem. of koivos used as an adv. in common, together, publicly. κοινόω, f. -ώσω, a. έκοίνωσα, to make common, to make communication; mid. like the act, to communicate. κολάζω, f. κολάσω, generally the mid. is used κολάσομαι, Att. κολώμαι, § 120, 2, a. mid. έκολασάμην, f. pass. κολασθήσομαι, to pwrish, to chastise. Κολοσ-σαί, -ων, (ai), Colossae. κονιορτός, -ου, (6), a cloud of dust. κόΊττω, f. -ψω, a. έκοψα, pf. κέκοφα, 2 pf. κέκοττα, 2 a. pass, εκόπην, to cut, to slaughter. κόσ-μος, -ου, (ό), order; ornament. κουφός, -η, ~ov, light. κράνος, -eos, (to), a helmet. κρατέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to be strong, to rule, conquer, to become master of, § 175, 2 ; to be in power. κράτιστος, best; sup. of aya96s. κράτος, -eos, (τό), strength, power; έλαύ- νειν ανά κράτος, to ride at full speed. κραυγή, -ψ, (ή), a shout, outcry, clamor. κρέας, g. (κρέαος) κρέως, (το), flesh, meat, (§ 56, 2). κρείττων, better; comp. of ay ados. Kpeiiavvvju, f. κρεμάσω, Att. κρεμώ (§ 120, 2), a. έ κρέμασα, to hang. κρήνη, -77S, (ή), a fountain. κριθή, -ijs, (η), barley. κρίνω (§ 109, 3, Ν. 1), f. κρίνω (§ 120, 1), a. έκρινα, pf. κέκρικα, a. mid. εκρινάμην, a. pass, εκρίθην, pf. κέκρι• μαί, to judge, to estimate. κρύτττω, f. -ψω, a. -ψα, pf. -φα, a. pass, -φθην, pf. κέκρνμμαι, 2 a. έκρύβην, to conceal, to hide. κτάομαι, (ωμαή, f. κτήσομαι, a. έκτη- σάμην, pf. κέκτημαι or Ζκτημαι, to get for one's self, to acquire , the pf. (/ have acquired) I possess, with meaning of present ; οπω$ οΰν eVe- σθε άνδρες άξιον rrjs ελευθερία* ^s κέκτησθε, see then that you are men worthy of the liberty of which you are possessed, before όπως sc. επιμελ- εΐσθε, p. 57, 11. κτ€ΐνω, f. κτενώ (§120, 1), a. ϊκτεινα (§ 121), pf. ϊκτονα (§ 109, 2), 2 a. Ζκτανον (§ 109, 3), a., pass, εκτάν- θην, to kill. Κτησ-ίας, -ου, (ό), Ctesias, sl Greek physician at the Persian court. Κνδνος, -ου, (ό), Cydnus, a river in Cilicia, flowing through the city of Tarsus. κύκλος, -ου, (δ), a circle; κύκλω, in a circle. Eng. Cycle. κυκλοω, (ώ), f. -ώσω, to encircle, sur- round. κνκλωσ-ις, -ews, (ή), a surrounding, as in battle. Κυρ€ΐος, -εία, -εΐον, belonging to Cyrus. Κύρος, -ου, (δ), Q/rus. In the Anabasis, Cyrus the Younger, the younger brother, of Artaxerxes, whom he attempted to dethrone, B. C. 401 ; Kupos δ αρχαίο*, Cyrus the Elder. κύων, (δ or ή), gen. κυνδς, dat. κννί, ace. κύνα, voc. κύον; plur. κύνες, gen. κυνων, dat. κυσί, ace. κύνας, a dog. κωλύω, f. -ύσω, a. h κώλυσα, to hinder; w. gen. to hinder one from doing a thing; w. infin. to hinder; w. ace. to hinder, or prevent a thing. κώμη, -ψ, (η), a viUage. λαγχάνω 25 Λυδία λαγχάνω (cl. δ), f. mid. λήξομαι (w. act. meaning), pf. εϊληχα, pf. pass. εΐλττγμαι, a. pass, έλήχθψ, 2 a. ελαχον, to obtain by lot, generally to obtain, w. gen. ; to become pos- sessed of a thing. λαγώς, -ώ, (ό), a hare, § 42, 2, Ν. λάθρα, adv. secretly; w. gen. without one y s knowledge. Λακεδαιμόνιος, -ov, (ό), a Lacedae- monian. Λακεδαίμων, -ovos, (ή), Lacedaemon or Sparta, a city in Laconia. λαμβάνω, f. λήψομαι (w. act. mean- ing), pf. €Ϊληφα, 2 a. ελαβον, pf. pass, εϊλημμαι, a. ελήφθηρ, to take, receive, obtain ; δπως .... λάβοι βασιλέα, that he might find the king as unprepared as possible, p. 57, 4. λαμπρός, -ά, -6v, brigld. λαμ-ιτρότης, -ητοτ, (η), splendor. λανθάνω, f. \ήσω, pf. Χέληθα, 2 a. Ιλαθον, to lie hid, escape the notice of (someone) ; mid. λήσομαι, pf. λέλ- ησμαι, f. pf. λελήσομαι, 2 a. ελα- θόμψ, to forget; \v. participles, see § 279, 2 ; λαθάν Kvpov άπελθών, lit. having gone a wag without the knowl- edge of Cyrus ; τρεφόμενοι έλάνθανεν, was secretly supported. Cf. Eng. Lkthargy. λαός, -ov, (6), Att. λεώ$, the people; in pi. sidy'ects of a prince. λέγω, f. λέξω, a. ελε£α, (for pf. act. εΐρηκα is used), pf. pass. λέλε*γμαι, a. pass, ελέχθψ, to say, speak, men- tion, relate; Xeyerai, it is said ; λέγ- εται και tovs άλλοι -s, and it is said that the rest, p. 44, 23. Lat. lego, Eng. Lecture. λέγω (Attic only in compounds), to gather, to count; f. λέξω, a. ελεξα, pf. είλοχα, pf. pass, είλεγμαι or \ελεyμa,L• λείιτω, f. -ψω, 2 ρί.λΑοίττα (§109, 2), pf. pass, λέλειμμαι, a. έλείφθψ, 2 a. ελιπον, 2 a. mid. έλιπόμψ, § 95, to leave ; class 2. λευκοθώραξ, -a\os, (o), Μ,-ίΥΛ it'Aite breastplate. λευκός, -ή, -6u, light, clear; of Avater, bright ; of the skin, white, fair; of sound, c/ear; of gold, pale, (i. e. alloyed ) ; root appears in Lat. lu- ceo, Eng. Look. λίθος, -ov, (6), a stone. Eng. Lith- ograph (λίθος, 'γράφω). λιμός, -ου, (ό or ή), hunger. λόγος, -ov, (ό), a uvrd, discourse, in- terview, mention; άξίως Xoyov, wor- thily of (being) mentioned; rumor, report, διήλθε Xoyos, the rumor spread abroad, p. 68, 8. Eng. Logic. λόγχη, -ψ, (ή), the point of a spear; a spear. λοιπός, -ή, -6v, left, remaining, the rest of λόφος, -ov, (6), a ridge, hill. λοχαγία, -as, (ή), the command of a company; pi. the command of com- panies; και ds φρούρια και λοχαγία?, both for garrison duty and for com- mand of companies, p. 52, 4. λοχαγός, -ov, (ό), a captain, the com- mander of a λόχο?. λόχος, -ov, (ό), a company of soldiers, = about 100 men. Λυδία, -as, (ή), Lydia, a province in Asia Minor. Λύδιος 26 μελάνια Λύδιος, -ία, -ιον, Lydian. Λυκαΐος, -αία, -αΓομ, belonging to Mount Lycozum, Lycozan ; θύειν τα Αύκαια, to celebrate the Lyccea, a festival celebrated by the Arcadians in honor of Pan. Λύκιος, -ου, (ό), Lycius, aSyracusan. λύκος, -ου, (ο), a wolf, Λυκούργος, -ου, (ό), Lycurgus, a Spar- tan lawgiver. λυμαίνομαι, f. mid. λνμανοΰμαι, pf. λελύμασμαι, to treat -with indignity, to spoil, to frustrate. λυττζ'ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to annoy; of light troops, to harass. λύω (§ 106 (end)), f. λύσω, a. ελϋσα, pf. λέλυκα, pf. pass. λΑυ /xat, a. pass, ελίθην, a. mid. έλνσάμην, to loose, to break a treaty or oath. M. μά, a particle used in oaths, by ; in Att. μά is used absol., μα Αία, by Zeus. See § 163. Μαίανδρος, -ου, (oj, <Λβ Maeander, a river separating Lydia from Caria, remarkable for its winding course. μακρός, -ά, -ύν, long, either of space or time ; reg. comp. μακρότερος, sup. μακρότατος; irreg. comp. μάσσων, μάσσον, sup. μήκιστος or μάκιστος. μάλα, adv. veiy, much; comp. μάλλον, more, rather; sup. μάλιστα, most, especially; ως μάλιστα έπικριπττόμε- νος, concealing as much as he could. μάλιστα, see μάλα. μάλλον, see μάλα. μανθάνω, f. mid. μαθήσομαι (w. act. meaning), pf. μ€μάθηκα, 2 a. εμα- θον, to learn by enquiry, to under- stand, w. partic. § 280. μάνης, -ea>s, (6), a prophet, soothsayer. Μαρσ-ύας, -ου, (ό), the Marsyas, a river of Phrygia, falling into the Maeander ; Mar spas, son of Olym- pus. μάρτυς, -νρος, (6), ace. μάτνρα, also μάρτνν, a witness. Μάσ-κας, -α (§ 39), (ό), the Mascas, a river of Mesopotamia. μάτην, adv. in vain = Lat. frustra. μάχαιρα, -as, (η), a large knife, a short sword, opp. to ξίφος, the straight sword. Η^ΧΊ» -Φ> (ΐ)> a oattle. μάχομαι, f. μαχέσομαι, Att. μαχοΰμαι (§ 120, 2), pf. μεμάχημαι, a. mid. έμαχεσάμην, to fight; φετο yap .... ρχιχείσθαι βασιλέα, for he thought .... that the king would fight, p. 53, 14. μεγάλως, adv. greatly. Mcyapefc, -έως, (6), a MegarXan. μ€ Ύ α5, μεγάλη» ρίγα (§§ 70, 73), great, large; comp. μείζων, sup. ^i^ywros. Μ€γαφ€ρνης, -ου, (ό), Megaphernes. μ€θίοτημι, (μετά, ϊστημι), trans, in pres., impf., fut., a. act. and mid. to transfer; intrans. in mid. and pres., impf. and a. pass. ; in the act. 2 a., pf. and plupf., to withdraw. μ€ίων, -ov, comp. of μικρός, less; μείον ϊχειν, to be icorsted. μ€λανία, -as, (η), b/achiess ; χρόνω δε σνχνφ ύστερον ωσπερ μβλαηα τις έν τ2 πεδίω επι 7τολυ, and in a very short time afterwards (it appeared) like something black reaching far off on the plain, p. 52, 7. μ&α* 27 μιαίνω μ*λα$, μΑαινα, μέλαν (§ 71), Hack; comp. με\άντεροτ, sup. -raroy. peXct, impers., f. μιλήσει, pf. μεμέλ- 77/ce, rt concerns. See § 171, 2, X. 1 μΛίνη, -775, (ή), mi^/ef, a kind of grain. μΑλω, f. μελλήσω, a. εμέλλησα and ήμέλλησα (| ] ■), to intend, to be about, or design to do anything. § 98, 3. μέμφομαι, f. mid. μέμφομαι, a. mid. εμεμ-γάμην, to blame. μέν, a . indeed; on the one hand . ... on the otlier; as well .... a•; to recti] what has irk an ob- jecti iirever, still, neverth* less. some between nee or 1 and another whi fa 14 but ■ αλλά, μύρτοι; μέν δή, however; μέρ οΐν, tun/, rather; 6 μέν . . . . 6 δ(, the . . the other ; the former .... the latter: it can W I ttnl in the rlause. See § 1 I juvtoi, conj. yet, however, kc. See \Uv. μένω, f. μένω (§ 120, 1), a. ϊμεινα, pf. μεμένηκα, to remain, wait, aunit. maneo, I Μένων, -ωνοτ, (ο), Menon, one of tli»- commanders uf Cyrus's Greek fur μέσ -os, -η, -oi', middle ; inAtt. W, betu >. μεσαίτερο*, sup. μεσ- αίτατοτ. -1. N»t- 4; μέσον, (τό), the centre. The ro<>: ι me as in μετά, Let medius, Bog. Middle. jic μήττω, adv. not y>t. μήτ€, and not; μήτε .... μήτε, neither .... nor. μήτηρ, μητρο'*, (ή), α mother. (§57.) μιαίνω, f. μιανώ (§ 120, 1 ), a. έμιάψα, Att. εμίανα (§121, Ν. 1 ), pf. ^e/x/o/y- κα, a. pass, εμιάνθην, pf. μεμίασμΛΐ μίγνυμι 28 νομίζω or εμίαμμαι, to paint over, to dye ; to stain, to pollute. μίγνυμι, f. μίξω, a. εμιξα, pf. pass. μέμΐΎμαι, a. pass, έμίχθψ, 2 a. εμί- ΎΨ, to mingle, to mix. Μίδας, -ου, (ό), Midas. μικρός, -a, -ov, small, little; of time, little, short ; μικρού δεΐ, it wants but little; comp. μικρότερος, sup. -ότα- τος ; irreg. forms έλάσσων or e\ar- των, μείων ; ελάχιστοι, μεΐστος ; μικ- ρόν, narrowly. § 73, 5. Μιλήσ*ιος, -ία, -ιον, Milesian ; subst. inhabitant of Miletus, Μίλητος, -ov, (ό), Miletus, a city of Caria. Μιλτιάδης, -ov, (6), Miltiades, an Athenian commander who defeated the Persians in the battle of Mara- thon, b. c. 490. μιμνήσ-κω, f. μνήσω, a. εμνησα, pf. pass, μέμνημαι, (the pf. is both mid. and pass, with present sense, § 200, N. 6), a. εμνήσθην, a mid. έμνησά- μψ, to remind ; mid. to remember. μισ-έω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, pf. μεμίσηκα ; f. mid. in pass, sense, μισήσομαι, a. pass, εμισήθψ, pf. pass, μεμ'ι- σημ,αι, to hate. μισ-9ός, -ου, (ό), pay, wages. μισ"8όω, (ώ), f. -ώσω, a. εμίσθωσα, pf. μεμίσθωκα, to let out for hire ; mid. to hire at a price ; pass, to be hired far pay, § 199, 3, N. 2 ; μισθωθη- ναι ουκ έπϊ τούτω εφασαν, they said that they were not hired for this t p. 40, 7. μνάα, contr. μνα, -ας, (ή), a mina,= 100 drachmas (8 16|). μόνος, -η, •ον, alone; neut. μόνον, adv. alone, only. μυριάς, -άδος, ten thousand; έχων... τριάκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάς, having ...an army of three hundred tfousand men, p. 55, 11 ; and p. 7S, 8. Eng. Myriad. μύριος, -ία, -ων, usually in the plur. ; μύριοι, -at, -a, ten thousand, § 77, 1, N. 3. Μνσιος, -ία, -ων, Mysian. Ν. ναυμαχ&α, (ώ), f. --ησω, to fight in a ship, tofiglit a naval battle; to fight. νανς, ν€ώς, (ή), a ship. Lat. navis. ν€ανίσκος, -ov, (ό), a youth, a young man, so called till the age of 40. ν€κρός, -ου, (ό), dead body ; in pi. the dead ; as an adj. νεκρός, -ά, -όν, dead. νψω, f. νέμω (§ 120, 1), later νεμη- σω, a. Ζνειμα (§ 121), pf. νενέμηκα, to distribute; mid. w. ace. to possess; of herdsmen, to feed, to pasture. ν€ος, -α, -ov, Att. -ος, -ov, of men, young ; of things, new, fresh ; comp. νεώτερος, sup. -ώτατος. ν€φ€λη, -ης, (ή), α cloud, a mist. νεώς, -ώ, (ό), Att. for ναός, temple. νή, particle of affirming, w. ace. νη Δία, yes, by Zeus, § 163. νηοτος, -ου, (ή), an island. νικάω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, pf. νενίκηκα, to conquer, icin ; the pres. may have the sense of the pf., I conquered or (I have conquered) a?n victorious. νίκη, -?7?, (η), victory. νομίζω, f. - ! σω, Att. νομιω, § 120, 3, pf. νενόμικα, pf. pass, νενόμισμαι, a. ενομίσθην, to hold as a custom, to think, to consider. VJJIOS 29 6ϊ$ νό*μ.ο$, -ου, (ό), a custom, a law; τ'ιθησι \ακ€ δαιμονίου νόμους, he fur the Lacedaemo- nians. voos, contr. vets, -ov, (6), mind. voWa>, f. •ήσω, to be sick, to be miserable. voVos, -ου, (ή), sickness, disease, misery. νυν, adv. now; enclit., νυν. νύξ, vwtos, (ή), night. £cvtas, -c uiv, -ώιτοί, (ό), Xenophon, an Athenian, the principal leader of the Greeks in their retreat, and the author of the Anabasis. Ξφξη*, -° l '> (ό\ Xerxes. ξίφος, (-eos,) -oi's, (τύ), a straight sword. ξνλινο$, •η, -ov, wooden, ξύλον, -οι», (το), wood. o. h, η, r \ § 78 ; 6 μίν.,.ό 67, this out that one; 6 6V, am § 1 I lore a ύγδοή κοντά, fighty. 6$€, TJSc, Τθδ«, this, ΐ. »•. \s] § 148, X. 1 ; rbvbc τό* τρότον, in the following manner, § 1»' o&o's, -ov, (ή), α u-jy, road, street, a COcv. : hence. Ον'καΓι neicard ; § 61. oIkc'iu, (u), f. -ήσω, a. φκ-ησα, ]»f. οικία, -αϊ, (ή), a house, οίκοδομ^ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to build. οίκοι, adv. at home, οικονόμο*, -ου, (ό), a manager; el 67 nva όμφη 5eiv6v tvra οίκονόμον και κατ ασκ€ ν άγοντα τ€ ή* Αρχοι χώρα?, και τροσόδονί ττοιονντα, and if he ; one that ims a skil- ful 'ing the country which he governed, and also making mm income (from it), ]>. 56 olKTclpw, f. οικτίρω (§ 120, 1), I rtipa (§Γ21), impf. ψκτ€ΐρον,ίο pity, to have pity ujhjh ; οίκ. τινά twos, to pity one f ise of a tiling. otvos, -οι•, (6), wine; w. tin* di^amma, Yotvot ; Lat. vinum, Bng. WlNE, otofiai, Att. οϊμαι, f. mid. οίήσομαι, ' ηθην, impf. ψ5μην ΟΓ φμην, to suppose, think, as opposed to knowing, always of the future ; 6v φετο ττιστον οι (§ 144, 2) elvai, whom he thought to be faithful to hi in S* If. olos, οία, οίον, rel. pro., of what kind, as, = Lat. qualis. 6'is, ό or ή, gen. 6'ios, ace. 6'Cv ; pL nom. 6'ies, gen. οίων, dat. oicai, t'ias, ; coiitr. nom. and pL ftt: Att. nom. ols, gen. oc"s, dat. oil, ace. ofr ; pi. nom. oles, gen. οίων, dat. οίσί, ace. oias: I and ace. pi. also oh, a sheep. olocrtrep 30 οττοσ -os otooircp (ohs and intens. πέρ), just as. οΐχομαι, f. mid. οίχήσομαι, pf. οϊχωκα or φχωκα, impf. ψχόμψ, of persons, to be gone ; of things, as of darts, to rush along ; of strength, to be gone, lost; see § 200, N. 3, and § 279, N. OKve'o), (ώ), f. -ήσω, impf. ώκνβων, to hesitate; εγώ γαρ όκνοίψ αν eis τα πλοία έμβαίνει,ν, for I should hesitate to embark in the vessels, p. 52, 12. οκτακόσιοι, -at, -a, ei#fa hundred. οκτώ, e^/tf . Lat. octo, Eng. Octave. έκτωκαί$€κα, eighteen, 6λβιο$, -ov, or -a, -op, happy, blest, especially with worldly goods ; rich ; irreg. sup. δλβι,στος, reg. sup. όλβίώτατος also occurs ; adv. -ίω$. #λ€θρο$, -ov, (ό), destruction, death. oXtyos, -y, -ov, of number or quan- tity, little, few, opposed to πολύ* ; of size, small, little, opposed to μέγα* ; comp. έλάσσων, sup. όλί-γισ- ros; see § 73. Eng. Oligarchy (oXiyos, άρχω). Αλλυμι, rarely όλλύω, f. όλώ (§120, 1), a. ώλβσα, pf. όλώλεκα (§ 104), 2 pf. δλωλα (§ 200, Ν. 7) ; mid. δλλνμαί, f. όλονμαι, 2 a. ώλόμψ, plupf. όλώλβιν ; act. to destroy, to lose; mid. topeiish; 2 pf. in trans. /ω ruined; in prose generally ά7ΓΟλλι;/«. #λος, -•>7, -op, wAoZe, entire, § 142, 4, N. 1. Cf. Eng. Catholic (κατά, δλοή. Όλυνθιο$, -η, -ov, Olynthian. ομαλός, -ή, -δν, smooth, level. όμαλώς, adv. evenly, regularly. δ'μνυμι, f. όμουμαι (act. meaning), a. ώμοσα, pf. όμώμοκα (§ 104), pf. pass, όμώμοσμαι, a. ώμόθψ and ώμδσθψ, impf. ώμνυν or ώμννον, to swear. ϋμοιος, -οία, -oto^, also -os, -ov, = fr&e. Lat. similis. όμολογέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, a. ώμόΧό^/ησα, pf. ώμοΧόηηκα, to confess, to ac- knowledge. όμοτρά/πΈζος, -ov (όμό$, common, τρά- ire£a, table), sitting at the same table ; subst. table-companion. ομού, adv. together. #μως, ^e£, s£i7/, nevertheless. oVcipos, -ou, (ό), and (τό) tveipov, a dream. δνομα, -ατο$, (τό), α name. Lat. nonien, Eng. Anonymous. ονομάζω, f. -άσω, &c, to name, call. ovos, -ou, (ό or ή), an ass. όξνδ, -εΓα, -υ, of impressions on the senses, sharp, keen ; of sight, keen ; of sound, sharp, shnll ; of pain, sharp ; of taste, sharp ; of motion, quick. tfirg or oVr], in what direction. 6m0€V, relat. adv. whence. o*iroi, relat. adv. whither, where; w. gen. δττοί 7?}s, where in the world. oirotos, -οία, -οίον, of what sort, kind, or quality = Lat. qualis. ottoVos, -V, -ov, rel. adj., of number, 31 OVTfa)S as many as, Lat. quot ; of space, as large as, Lat. quantus ; otwtcls €Ϊχ€ φυλακάτ, as many garrisons as he had, 1, 6. oirOTC, when, whenever, since, = Lat. quoniam ; όττοτβ τάνυ ήδνν λάβοι, wkmever he found (any) very meet, § 232, 4. δττου, relat. adv. where, w. gen. where; δτου yqt, where in the world; of time, when ; of manner, how ; ml, «/'nee. 8irws, adv. λον, /Λα/, in orcfer ίΛα/, § 21 G; 5χωϊ ότλίταί άτοβίβάσ€ΐ€ν, in order that he might land soJJ όρά*>, (d)j (stem 6ir-), f. mid. δέο- μαι (in ait. sensed, pf. (ώρακα, or (όρακα, pf. pass, (ώραμαι or ώμμαι, a. ζχρΟι,ν ; |0C 2 a. ciooi', impf. (Jjouv, to see. Eng. Γ λ (ras, ό/ίάω). *ργή» -^ ? . οργίζομαι, ί. -it/uaat, Att. -» § ISOj 3, a. ώρ^ίσθψ, to nude ;>y ; pass, to grow angry. 6p0tos, ία, -toy, «/»*/*. δρθ -'s, ;ht. Ap6/-s ./nj. therefore, then, at any rate. οΰττω, adv. not yet ; δτι οΰττω δη πολ- λού χρόνου τούτου ήδίονιοΐνψ δίπτυ- χοι, (lit., not yet up to the pi time) that not for a long time had he met with sweeter wine than this. ουρανός, -oe, (b), heaven, the shy. otfrc, adv. and not, nor; neitlier. οΰτος, αϋτη, τοΰτο, this. οϋτως, adv. of ούτοι, commonly οντω ουχ 32 παρά5ίΐσο$ before a consonant, in this manner, thus, so. ούχ, not ; see ου. οφείλω (§ 108, 4, II.), f. όφβιλήσω, a. ώφβίλησα, (pf. ώφβίληκα ?), 2 a. ώφβλον, inipf. ώφβιλον, to owe, to be indebted; in pass, ίο 6e cfoe; in wishes, itw/e? ίΛαί, § 251, 2, N. 1. ώφβλον, I ought .... of what one has woi done, hence it comes to express a wish that a thing had happened which has not ; ώφελε • • • • £ψ> would that Cyrus were alive, p. 74, 8. οφθαλμό^, -ου, (ό), an eye. Cf. Eng. Ophthalmy. o\vpos, -ά, -op, rugged, strong (easily held). 6\J/is, -ews, (ή), a sight, seeing. Cf. Eng. Optics. See όράω. Π. πάθοβ, -eos, (to), suffering, misfortune. παιανίζω, f. -ίσω, Att. -lu>, § 120, 3, cl. 4, to chant a paian. Eng. Pjean. παιδεύω (παις), f. -σω, a. έπαίδ€νσα, pf. πεπαίδβυκα, to bring up a cliild, to educate; mid. (sometimes) to cause to be educated. irats, iratSos, (όοι*ή), gen. dual παί- δοιν, gen. pi. παίδων, § 25, 3, Ν., boy, child. Eng. Pedagogue (7raFs, άγω). παίω, f. παίσω and -ψτω, a. άτακτα, pf. -πέπαικα, a. pass, έπαίσθην, to strike, to strike a person, to strike a weapon against a person, to wound. πάλαι, adv. long ago. Eng. Pale- ography (τάλαι, Ύράφω). παλαιή, -a, -6v, old, aged ; of things, ancient, venerable, also obsolete ; rb ττα\αών, adv. anciently ; reg. comp. and sup. παλαιότερος, -oraros ; more often παλαίτβρος, παλαίτατος, formed from the adv. ττάλαί. πάλιν, adv. back, backwards ; of time, again, once more. Eng. Palimp- sest (πάλιν, ψ ην, to rub). παλλακίβ, -too?, (ή), a concubine. παλτόν, -ου, (τό), a dart, javthn. παντάπασ-ι, before a vowel -σ:ν, adv. wholly. πάντη, adv. everywhere, on all sides. iravToSairos, -"η, -bv, of every kind; adv. -7τω5, in all kinds of ways. πάντοθεν, adv. from every side. πάνυ, adv. very, wholly. παρά, prep., radical sense, beside ; w. gen. from beside, from, of persons and places ; w. dat. at the side of, near, of places, things, and per- sons ; w. ace. of place, running along, beside; of motion to, to, towards, of persons ; of time, during, παρά τδν πόλεμον, during the war ; denoting opposition, con- trary to, παρά rds σπονδάί, contraiy to the treaty. In numerous com- pounds, as Paragraph. παραβαίνω (παρά, βαίνω), to trans- gress, to violate. παραγγέλλω (παρά, άγγΑλω, which see), to pass an announcemen: on-:- to another ; as a military term, to give the watchword which was jassed from man to man ; to send orders, w. dat. and infin. 1, 2, 1 ; w. dat. to command, 1, 8, 3. παραγίγνομαι (τταρά, yr, νομαι), to be pi'esent, to come. παράδίΐσ -os, -or, (c), a jxirk. Eng. Paradise. TTOfGC 33 1Γ€δίθν ταραδί8ωαι (ταρά, δίδχμι, ioer up, to give over, give out. ναρακαλέω (τα , to call to one's self, summon, exhort, encourage. iropaxtXcvouai (ταρά, (, to urge. παραλαμβάνω (τα^α, \αμβάνω), to take from another, succe* : ναραμύβοααι (αμείβομαι, f. t*> change a leave on one side, to pass to pass by, ιταραμηρί8ιο5, -op, nay over t/u ' \\\uj. sutat. armor for die hs. ναρατλά» (ταρά, τ\ίω), to sail by or aloi.;>t(l' •* taioue others, «pen .'■-» aVa» u/j 111 battle array. ναρατ\0ηαι (ταρά, τίθημι, ν | itm beside, to provide - *rn *!, a Parrhat Παρνσ-ατι$ϊ -ibos, (η), Γ iras, ιτάσ-α, irav ever τ άρτων, fan. ~ and neut. τάσι, $ tilt• X. 1. = Lat. onuiis ; τάντων 3τα<τ.; τιστ ό, he was cons• Ust of all in a! I thin 1'an ^s). Πασ-ίων, -uwoj, (6), Pasion. τάσχω, f. mid. χάσομαι, 2 pf. W- το>0α, 2 a. ίταθο*, to svf r (>" ftp «I Aral r Mose */ πατρν^ο?, -Ju. -(Jor, also -o*, -ov, τανω, f. ■ -'.ταυα, j»f. ri- πανκΛ, pf. pass, τέπανμαι, a. pass. έτανθψ or ένανσθην, to cause to cease ; mid. ίο cease, fo tfo/>. Παψλαγών, -ofof, (ό), a iraxvs ΐη^ ^om/; j>. τάσσων, ulso τταχίια•. ■:ρ. ΐΓάχ*στο$ ; ταχντ€ροτ, τα | ιτ(δίον, -or, (τό), plain, ground. PCS, ΙΑΝ. ir€£os 34 ΊΓφίοραα) •rajos, -4h -& v > on f°°t t i n plural, foot soldiers, sometimes land soldiers, ττείΰω, f. πείσω, a. ϊπεισα, pf. π4- πεικα, pf. pass, πέπεισμαι (§ 113, Ή. 4), a. έπείσθην, to persuade; pass, to be persuaded ; mid. to per- suade one's self, to comply, obey; 2 pf. πέποιθα, intrans. / trust. ιπιναω, (ώ), -ήσω, a. έπείνησα, pf. πεπείνηκα (§ 123, Ν. 2), ίο δβ hungry ; w. gen. ίο hunger after. •ΠΈΐρα, -as, (ή), ίπαΖ, attempt. τταράω, (ώ), generally πειράομαι, (ωμαή, f. mid. πειράσομαι, a. mid. έπειρασάμψ, pf. πεπείραμαι, to at- tempt, endeavor ; w. gen. of person, ίο wiaA:e inaZ o/J ίο iry ίο persuade. irewrrtos, -α, -οϊ>, ίο 6e obeyed, to be persuaded. ΠίλοίΓοννήσχοβ, -α, -ο?, Peloponne- sian ; as a subst. α Peloponnesian. Π^οττόννησ-οδ, -ου, (ή), Pelopon- nesus, the peninsula forming the southern part of Greece, now the Morea. (IIAo7ros νήσος, the island of Pelops. ) ΤΙίλται, -ων, (αϊ), Peltce. ΊΓ€λταστή$, -ου, (6), one who bears a light shield (πέλτη), a targeteer. irtkratrriKOSf -ή, -6v, belonging to a peltast; τό πελταστικόν, the bat- talion of targeteers. •ΠΈ'λτη, -ης, (ή), a small light shield without a rim, a shaft, a pole, 1, 10, 12 ; α target, a spear. πί\πτω, f. -ψω, a. -ψα, pf. πέπομφα, pf. pass, πέπεμμαι, a. pass, έπέμ- φθην, to send, to send away; of missiles, to shoot; mid. πέμεοθαί π.να, to send for one. ττ^νηδ, -ητο$, (6), a day-laborer, a poor man ; as adj. poor, w. gen. ; com p. πενέστερο*, sup. -έστατο*. •ΠΈντακόσιοι, -at, -a, five hundred. it€vt€, indeclinable, five, ΐΓ€ντ€καί8€κα, indeclinable, fifteen. ιτ€ντή κοντά, indeclinable, fifty. •nwcov, -ov, gen. -ovos, of fruit, ripe ; also soft, tender, gentle ; comp. πε- wairepos, sup. πεπαίτατος. irep, enclit. particle adding to the force of the word to which it is annexed. ιτ€ρ£, prep., radical sense, all around, about ; w. gen. of place, about, con- cerning, above; περί πλείστου or περί παντού ποιεΐσθαι, to consider (lit. to make) (a thing) of the high- est importance ; w. dat. of place, around, near, of an object of which one is contending, for; w. ace. around; of place, around; of per- sons, around; ol xe/w τίνα, those around any one, the attendants; of time, aoowi. ΐΓ€ριαγγ€λλω (περί, άγγέλλω), to an- nounce by a message; w. dat. infin. to send round orders for pe to do something, to summon. ιτφιάγω (περί, &"γω), to lead around, to lead about with one. ιτ€ριγ£γνομαι (περί, Ύί-γνομαή, to be superior, to conquer. ττ€ρί€ΐμι (περί, ειμί), to be superior, to surpass; τό rrj επιμελείς περιεΐναι. των φίλων και τ φ προθυμεΊσΟαι χαρίζεσθαι, ταύτα ξμοι'γε μά\λον δοκεΐ αγαστά είναι, that he should swpass his friends in kind atterr and in an anxious desire to oldiqe, this seems to me more woithy of ad- miration, p. 5-, 6. ΊΓ€ρΐ€ρρ€ΪΤΟ, SCC U€pipp€0>. ιτερ\.έ\<α (περί, £χω), to encompass. irepiopcui) (περί, όράω), to look a for, to overlook, to disregard ; ircpiirlTTca 35 ιτλήν to look about tefore doing a thing, to be circumspect, ώ wfpimirre• (vepl, τπττω), to fall upon I embrace. «-φιπλίω (τ(ρΙ, τλεω), to sail around. ΐΓ€ριΐΓτυ<Γ<τω, f. -£ω, to fold ar TTcptppi'w (rip/, ρ^ω, f. ρίύσομαι, pf. (ρρνηκα, 2 a. pass, (in act. Sense) ίρρύην), to flow around; pass, to 6e surrouniL• d by water ; Ttpuppelro α(τη ιτό rot• Μα*τ*ά, i/ (itself) was surrounded by the Maskas river, p. . 6. Ilc'pcnrjs, -οι-, (a), Persian. ITcpa -or, a Persian. irfrpa, -ay, (η), a rock; pi. τετράς ιτή, I torn* tray, somehow; of spa MM Amp f of spact», which way t ΤΥή» "Λ. ( Hi pL Λί springs or sources of rivers. ττηλοΥ ιτήχυ*, ^ fore-arm, I aoou/ 18 inches. Πίγρη*, -TTof, (6), Piyrrs, xnt\u>, f. -/σω, a. fr/«ra, pf. pass. ψ€τί€σμαι, cL 4, § 108, to /*%*•, Id &f oppressed. \ημι, f. τ\7)σω, pf. WtX- pass. rArXiwtai, a, ^τλ^σΑτ;»', fo yi// f w. .ι on, ίο fill full, to stit irtvu), f. πίομαι, pf. rerun, (τ lop, a, pass, ίποθηρ, pf. Wxouai, poto, En «•ίτττω (§ L τ«-σοΓαα*, τ^ττα-Ατα, (τ€σοι; to Πισι8η$, •οΠ, (ό), α Pisidian ; Γί- sidia was a province in Asia Minor. morcva), f. -βΐ'σω, ίο (mat ιτίστι$, -ewy, (τ/), ^/α//Λ, mo-TOs, -η, -ov, of ι /< a Ίτνο-τότης, -ητο*, (η), fiddity. ιτλσ /ytos, -ία, -ίον, oblique ; et$ τλά- 7ΐον, ίΐίΛ irXato-tov, -οι», ( ro), square; έν τλαισίφ id sijuare. Ίτλανάομ.αι, (•ωμαή, f. -ήσομαι, pf. τ«τ. Χάνομαι, ίο uxindtr. £ng. ιτλάσσ-ω, Att. τλάττω, f. τλάσω, pf. Wt\u*u, ρΓ. p;iss. τίνλασμαι, to ιτΜθρον, -l r 101 En -\έων, marc, and τΧαστοί, ato> up, of roXrft, ΐτλί'κω (§ 109, 5), Ι τλ^ω, a. Irr pf. τ^τΧ^χα or Wir\oxa ^τΧί'χΑτ;»', 2 a. ίτλάκην, pf. m' ■ ^uxt, ίο weave, j>ltin, irXcvpcL, -ay, ( | ιτλέω μαι or τ\ίΐ•σο ι, pf. rarXfvea, a. pass. έτΧζύσθψ, pf. y^xXiicTuai, /• ιτληγή, «fe (ή), aWow. ττλήθο?, -foy, (r ττλήθω, pf. ν4τ\ηθα, to be or I full : hi full, to ττλήν, prep, w. •πλήρη? 36 iropcvta ol τα καπηλεία έχοντες, lit. except those having inns, i. e. the innkeepers. πλήρης, -ες, >//, § 172, 1. πλησ-Ιος, -a, -ov, near; as subst. (ό) πλησίος, a neighbor ; adv. πλησίον, near, hard by ; comp. πλησιαίτερος, sup. πλησιαίτατος, also πλησιέστε- ρο*, -έστατος. πλήσσω, Att. -ττω, f. πλήξω, pf. πέπλη^α (rare), 2 a. pass, έπλήγην, but in composition έπλά~γην, pf. πέπλη^μαι, to strike. Lat. plaga. πλίνθος, -ου, (ή), α 6nc&; πλίνθοι όπταί, baked bricks; πλίνθος κέρα- μία, burnt brick. πλοΐον, -ου, (τό), α uesse/. πλόος, contr. πλους, -ου, (ό), α sailing, a voyage. πλουτέω (ώ), f. ήσω, to be rich; w. gen. to be rich, to abound in a thing. πλούτος, -ου, (ό), riches, wealth. ποδήρης, -ες, reaching to the feet. ποιέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to make, to ap- point, to do, to bring to pass, to cause ; ποιεΐν el• or κακώς, to treat well or ill, § 165, N. l, = Lat. facio, Eng. Poet ; και ποιήσειεν .... diayyel- λαι, and he would cause that they would never be able .... tJiat they had seen the army of Cyrus, p. 63, 12. ποιητ&ς, -α, ~ov, verbal adj. to be done; neut. ποιητέον, one must make or do, § 281. ποικίλος, -η, -ov, many-colored. ποιμήν, -ένος, (6), a shepherd ; ποιμην λαών, a shepherd of the people, i. e. a prince or chief. ποιος, ποία, ποιον, interrog. adj. of ivhat sort ? 7τολ€|Χ€ω, (ώ}, f. -ήσω, a. pass, έπο- λεμήθην, to wage war; w. ace. to make war upon or against, also used with προς and επί w. ace. against. πολέμιος, -Ία, -ιον, hostile; subst. an enemy ; ol πολέμιοι, the enemy. Eng. Polemic. 7τόλ€μ.ος, -ov, (ό), war. πολιορκέω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, a. -ησα, to ' hem in a city, to besiege. πόλις, -εως, (η), a city, at Athens the fortress of the city, used either ' of the place or its inhabitants or both ; when πόλις and άστυ are | joined, the former is the body of citizens ; the latter, their dwellings. ' πολίτης, -ου, (6), a citizen. πολλάκις, adv. often. πολνμαθής, -ές, having much learning ; ' adv. -θώς, in a very learned way. πολύς, πολλή, πολύ (§ 70), of num- bers, many; opposed to όλ'^ος, I few ; of the value of a thing, much ; πολλού &!jios, worth much ; of space, ' large, far, wide ; πολλής καί aya- θης ούσης, being very large and fer- ' tile, p. 71, 25 ; ol πολλοί, the many, majority ; as adv. in neut. sing, and pi. πολύ, πολλά, much, or many times ; έπι πολύ, a great distance, or of wide extent ; w. comp. and sup. intens. πολν θάττον, far quicJcer ; \ comp. πλείων, Att. πλέων, sup. πλείστος. Poly- in compounds, | as Polygon. πολυτ€λής, -ές, expensive. πονηρός, -ά, •6ν, (πονέω), causing pain, painful ; of things, bad, use- less ; in a moral sense, bad, worth- less, wicked. πορ€ύω, f. -εύσω. conmi. dep. pass. πορεύομαι, f. πορεύσομαι, pf. pass. πεπόρενμαι, a pass, επορεύθην, to bring, to carry; pass, and mid. to be carried, or to can-y one's self, to go, ιτορίζα 37 νροθυμο* to march, to proceed; Topeveadat ά>ω, to proceed up (to the interior) ; el δή Tore ropevoiTo, if at any time, whenever he should go out, p. 63, 4, From the same root (rop-) with toooj, passage. *ορίζω, f. 4*14 MjpfB, pf. pass. τ€τδρισμαι, to furnish, to procure, woppw, farther, far ; comp. -ωτέρω, sup. -αττάτω. ιτορφύρ€ο$, contr. -pods, -pa, -povv, j>U. Eng. ΓυκπίΥ ψ6οό% -η, -or, interrog. adj. how great f how much f tocos, -ή, -or, iiidt-f. adj. of any size or number. wora\LO% -ov, (ό), a river. Eng. HlFFOFO ιταμοί, Xttos). νοτί, once, ever. HOTcpos, -tpa, -too*, which of the twof whether, = Lat. uter. ιτοτόν, -ov, (to), drink. Same root as Lat. potio, Eng. P< irov, « -in litic, somewhere; ή* του, if anywhere ; τον, intorrog. adv. where Ϋ w. gen. τον yijs, where, in what jHtrt of tlie VIM irovs, iroSos, (6), dat. pi. τοσί, Lat. pea, afoot. ιτράγρα, -aros, (τό), α ίΛι'η? done, a deed; plur. affairs, difficulties. »po>fjs, -^T, tf«p. -rpaos, irpcuia, irpaor (§ 70, Β tame, gentle; comp. rpaorepos or Tpa&repot. ιτράξις, -ίυί, (ή), dVfcjt 1 , action, deed, ττράσ-σω, Alt. τράττω, f. τράξω, a. (τραξα, pf. τέτραχα (trans. / A«ir ), and τέτ pay a (in trans. / Wirpa7jLLcu, to do, to perform ; el• Tparrevr, to be fortunate; § 105, >> irp, f. τρέψω, a. erpe\f/a, to be like ; impers. τρίτα, it is becoming, w. dat. of person; impf. e*TpeTe. irpcVpvs, -i-oy and -eus, (ό), an old man; an elder; then since the elders were preferred in power, ol τρέσβ€π, elders, chiefs; amiassador ; as from an adj. eome the d< . of comparison, «.onip. τ pea (Sin- epos, sup. τρςσβύτατο*. Eng. I κν: irpCa/?re tj so as to •π-ροαισ-θάνο^αι (τρό, αισθάνομαι), ro ooaerw k TpoaiaOjpcvos τά αιτά τσίτα (τινάί) βον\€νομέ- vovs, obs ervin g bef> rtain mi saint things. ιτροβάλλω {τρό, βά\\ω), ( ward; with τά 6τ\α, to jmsmt. ιτροδίδωμΛ (τρό, δίδωμι), to give be- for eh tndon, to I» ' irpocip-i {τρό, elpu), to advance, to go before. ιτροΰπον (τρό, cItov), to say before- han i m ce. -ττροίλαυνω (τρό, c\aiW), to drive for- war nee. ΐτροθνμ^ομαΐ (οΟμαι), (ΟνμίΌμαι, f. -ήσομαι, fee.) ίο 6* OH•, ττροθνμία, -αϊ, (ή), α ιτρόΟΰμο$, -ov, ready, willing, eager; w. g /or. ιτροθύμως 38 ΤΓρθ<Γ7ΪΌΙ€θμ «προθΰμωδ, adv. willingly, eagerly; comp. -ότερον, sup. -ότατα. ιτροίστημι (πρό, ϊστημι), trans, in pres., impf., fut. and a., act. and in the mid. , to place before ; in trans, in pass, with 2 a., pf., and plupf., act. to stand before ; w. ace. person, to approach ; w. gen. to command, «ιτροκαταλαμβάνω (πρ6, κατά, λαμ- βάνω), to seize upon beforehand, to preoccupy. ττροκατακαίω, Att. •κάω {πρό, κατά, καίω), to burn down before, to lay waste. τροκηρυσοτω, Att. -ττω, f. -ξω, to proclaim by herald, to proclaim pub- licly. irpo|i€Ta)irC8u)v, -ου, (τό), a covering for the forehead, a frontlet. IIpoiJ€Vos, -ου, (ό), Proxenus, one of the Greek generals. ττροοράω, (ω), (πρό, όράω), to see before. irpos, prep. w. gen., dat., or ace, radical sense, in the presence of; w. gen. implying motion from a place ; w. dat. abiding at a place ; w. ace. motion to a place ; w. gen., after pass, verbs, as agent, by (§ 197, 1, N. 1); irpos Θεών, in presence of gods ; wpbs του Κύρου τρόπου, in keeping with the charac- ter of Cyrus ; in a hostile sense, against ; irpbs αυτόν, 1, 1, 8 ; ace. to, in respect to, against. ιτροσ-άγω (irpos, &Ύω), to lead against. ΊΓροσ•αιτ€ω, (ώ), (irpos, αίτέω), to ask in addition. ιτροοτδίδωμι (irpos, δίδωμι), to give in addition. irpocreifu (irpos, €ίμί), to be at or near at hand, to be present. ιτρόσ•€ΐμι (irpos, είμι), to go to or to- wards; έτυχε προσιών, Jiappened to be approaching; δηλos fjv προσιών, it was evident that he was advancing . •π•ρο<Γ€λαύνω (7rpos, ελαύνω), to march to. προσέρχομαι (7rpos, έρχομαι), to come to. ττρο<Γ€χω (7rpos, έχω), to hold to. •π-ροοτήκω (7rpos, ήκω), to come to. *rrpoV0€V, adv. before; πρόσθεν .... πρίν, until; els τό πρόσθεν, forward ; τό πρόσθεν, before, 1, 10, 10, and 11 ; els τό πρόσθεν οΐχονται διώκον- res, have gone (§ 200, N. 3 ) forward in pursuit, p. 69, 5. Ίτροσ-ίημι (7rpos, ΐημι), to send to, to suffer to come to ; mid. to suffer to approach, to admit ; w. in fin. to un- dertake to do. ττροσ-καλέω, (ώ), (ττρό?, καλέω), to call to. ΊτροσκννΙω (κννέω), (ω), ί. -ήσω, a. -ησα, to prostrate one f s self before, to worship, to salute, 1, 8. 21 ; oorep πρόσθεν προσεκύνουν, καΐ τότε προ- σεκύνησαν, κα'ιπερ εiδότεs, who had formerly been used to salute him, then they saluted him, although know- ing, § 277, 6, N. 1 (end), p. 42,7. ττροσ-λαμβάνω (τρόί, λαμβάνω), to take to, to take hold (to help), to lay hand to the work; άμα avrbs προ- σλάμβανεν «s rbv πηλ& έμβαίνων, at the same time he himself descending into the 7)iud laid his hand to the work, p. 61, 10. irpoVoSos, -ου, (η), a way to; revenue. ΊΓρο<Γΐτοΐ€ομσΛ, (οΰμαι), (irpos, ποιέω), to pretend ; εΐs δ£ δη είπε, προσ- πoιovμevos σπεύδει, but then one of irpoo-woXtju'ci* 39 ρίττω Otese said, pretending to be in haste, 11. »ρ<χπΓθλ«μ*ω, (6), (τρόί, τολ^ω), to ice^ trar against. ιτρο<Γτά<Γ<Γα», Att. -rru; (τρό*, τάττω), to enjoin upon, or to aire ord order to do ; άλλα μην tt ris αιτφ τροστάξ,αντι, *αλύ* ΰτηρςτή- amsp 9 but further if any one served him well when he commanded any- p, ol, 15. irpoo -τφνίβιον, -οι; (τ 6), (τρό, στέρ- νο*), a breastplate. νρ<ΧΓτί0ηρΑ (τρ6\, τίθημι), to put to, add, to bestow upon ; in a bad sense, i. to place one's self to, to agrtt . νρόσ -w, a.lv. of tim.•, fi.rwa - b\+L'e, forward, onward; Uvai τον νρόοω, part, g νροτφαίο?, -aia, -αΐον, ybrnn - προτίραίφ, so. r/jiloa, <»» A Tportpof , -//» , -ipo*, 'xmer ; wporipa Κόρον wh >rt or ear re use ;. τρωτοί), like Lat. prior; adv. wpoTtpov, before. ιτροτρΙ)ς«• (τρό, τρίχω), to run before. ττροφαίνω (πρό, φαίνω), to show l>e- fore ; mid. to appear before, to ap- pear in the distance. ιτροφασ-ι?, -eo>s, (ή), a pretext; ττρό- φασιν ττοί€Ϊσθαι, to make a pretence, 1, 2, 1. «irptirov, adv. first, at first ; το πρώ- τον, at first. irporros, -77, ~ov, first ; πρώτον, as adv. in the first place, first; sup. of τρό ; OOtnp. Tporepos. irrcpdv, -ov, (τό), a father, mostly iu \A. fathers ; icings. ιττφυξ, -i^yos, {η), a icing. ιτνλη, -77?, (τ;), comm. plur. (αί) II, a gate, a pass, an intra ιτννθάνομΛΛ, f. mid. πεύσομαι, pf. τίτνσμαι, 2 a. έπνθόμην, to learn, to inquire. irvpos, -01; (6), (from πυρ, fire, on int of its color when 1 i|>^•), wheat ; pi. grain. '//if, yrt ; οϋπω, ti Trporcpov .... πω, never ττολίω ( .•', -ήσω, to - ττώΐΓθΤ€, "/ any time, ever yet ; oiocva om τώτοτ€ άφέΊλετο, he never at any tim? too& anything (from hiia), . 18. irws, a«lv. A iclitic, somehow, in some ivay, in any way. P. P9S1OS, -/a, -c; -Ο -Oi, -op, eofv •!>• ί>4 ων ι sup. £?στοι. ρα8ίϋ»ς, ι , rtady ; comp. pa of, sup. f^ara. P9'u;v, ρφοι•, comp. oi Mow*. ^ω, f. mid. /χύσομαι, Att. βνήσομαι, a. ίρρ€νσα, pf. έρρνηκα, 2 a. p. ίρρύην, w. ict sense, to flow, run. ρίτττω, f. ρί^ω, a. ϊρρίψα, pf. ίρριφα, pf. pass, ξρρι.μμαι, a. έρρίφθψ, to \ to Λμ»7, to casi ai<;ay, w. ace. ; poos 40 σπάα ρίψαντε* rovs πορφυρού* κάνδυς, having thrown away their purple overcoats. poos, Att. contr. pods, -ov, (6), a stream, current ; κατά. τον ρουν, down the stream. ρυθμός, -ου, (ό), regular movement or time. Eng. Rhythm. ρώμη, -ψ, (τ/), bodthj strength: gen- erally strength, force ; force, i. e. army. ρώννυμι, f. ρώσω, a. ϊρρωσα, pf. pass. έρρωμαι, used as pres. a. έρρώσθην, to strengthen ; pass, to be strong. σάλιτιγξ, -Ljyos, (ή), a trumpet. σαλιτιξω, f. σαλπίζω, α. έσάλπιτγξα, later f. σαλπίσω, a. έσάλπισα, to sound the trumpet; impers. σάλπι- ζα, the trumpet sounds. Σάρδεις, -εων, (at), Sardis, capital of Lydia. σατραττενα>, -εύσω, intrans. to be a satrap ; trans, to rule as a satrap ; w. ace. or gen. σατράιτης, -ου, (ό), a satrap, a Per- sian governor of a province. Σάτυρος, -ου, (ό), Satyr us. σαφής, -is, char; comp. -έστεροτ, snp. -eVraros. σαφώς, adv. clearly ; comp. -έστερον, sup. -έστατα. σημαίνω, f. σημάνω, a. έσιημηνα or εσήμανα (§ 121, Ν. 1), to show by a sign, to signify, p. 72, 4. ση μείον, -ου, (τό), signal, mark, a standard ; το βασιλέων σημεΐον, the royal standard. σήσαμον, -ου, (τό), sesame. σιγή, -vs, (ή), silence. σίδηρος, -ου, (ό), iron, steel. Σιλανός, -ου, (ο), Silanus. σιτίον, -ου, (τό), corn ; food. σίτος, -ου, 6, corn, food. σιωπάω, (ώ), f. -ήσομαι, a. έσιώπησα, pf. σεσιώπηκα, to be silent; trans. to keep silence, to be silent. σκευάζω, f. •άσω, a. έσκεύασα, pf. pass, έσκεύασμαι, to prepare. σκεύος, -eos, (τό), the baggage of an army. σκευοφόρος, -op, carrying baggage; subt. baggage-carrier, sutlers; τα σκευοφύρα, the beasts of burden. σκηνε'ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to encamp. σκηνή, -rjs, (η), a tent ; in pi. a camp. σκηιττοΰχος, -ov, bearing a staff; as subst. a sceptre-bearer, an officer at the Persian court. σκοττε'ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω (only used in pres. and inrpf.), the other tenses, f. σκέψομαι, a. έσκεψάμην, pf. εσ- κεμμαι, being supplied by σκέπτο- μαι, to look at or after a thing, to view, to consider, observe. σκότος, -ου, (ό), darkness. Σκύθης, -ου, (ο), a Scythian. Σόλοι, -ων, (oi), Soli, a city of Ci- licia. Eng. Solecism. Σοφαινετος, -ου, (ό), Sophametus. σοφία, -as, (ή), wisdom, skill. σοφός, -ή, -όν, wise, clever, skilful. Same root as Lat. sapiens, Eng. Sage. σοφώς, adv. wisely, cleverly; comp. •ώτερον, sup. -ύπατα. σττάω, f. σπάσω, a. έσπασα, pf. <-σ- πακα, pf. pass, ίσπασμαι, a. έσ- πάσθψ, to draw. Eng. Spasm. σττί'νδα 41 συλλέγω σττένδω, f. σπείσω, a. ϊσπεισα, pf. ίσπεικα (§ 101, 3), to joour out a drink-offering; mid. ίο pour out libations one with another, and since this was the custom of making a treaty, to make a treaty ; ii τω j σπείσαιτο, if he (ever) made a treaty with any one, <ΠΓ£νδω, f. -εύσω, a. έσπευσα, pf. Μ. έσπευσμαι, to hasten, to be in fiaste. <πτολά$, -a5os, (η), a leathern corslet. σιτονδή, -rjs, (η), a libation : pi. σπονδαί, (at), a treaty or truce; παρά tols σπονδάϊ, contrary to the ity. (πτουδαιολογ^ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to con- verse earnestly with. <Γττουδή, -?}s, (ή), fiaste. στάδιον, -ου, (τό), a furlong, a Greek measure of length, (600 Greek feet), = 606J English 1 σταθμό*, -ου, (ό), a station, day's march. Lat. stabulum, Stable. στ€γασμα, -ατοί, (τό), a covering, a ring for a tent ; έδιφθέρατ, b\s ειχον στ€*γάσματα, έπίμπλασαν, the tanned skins, which they had as cover- inns (fur the tents), which they filed. στέλλω (§ 96, III., and § 109, 3), f. στελω, a. {στάλα, pf. ϊσταλκα, pf. pass, ϊσταλμαι, 2 a. p. ίστάλην, to send, equip. στ€ν05, -y, -όν, narrow. στ€ρ&ι>, (ω), στερήσω, ϊστέρησα, -κα, to deprive. στέρνο ν, -ου, (τό), the breast. στέφανο?, -ου, (ό), a crown, a wreath, garland. στίφο$, -eos, (τό), dense company. στλεγγί*, -ίδο*, (ή), flesh-scraper, comb. στολή, -rjs, (ή), robe. στάλο$, -ου, (ό), preparation, military force. στράτευμα, -ατο$, (τό), an army. στρατ€ύω, f. -εύσω, to make an expe- dition, marcli; mid. to serve as a soldier, to make an expedition ; i ά έστρατεύετο, in tJiose things for which he was making the expedition, p. 66, 20; efs, or επί, τίνα, against any one; to be engaged in militaiy operations. στρατηγώ, -ήσω Λ to be a general ; w. gen. to command. στρατηγό?, -ου, (ό), general. Eng. Stratagem. στρατιά, -ay, (η), an army. στρατιώτη?, -ου, (6), a soldier. στρατοτΓ€δ€ύω, -εύσω, to encamp ; to take up a position. στρατόττίδον, -ου, (τό), a camp, an encampment. orprnros, -ή, -6v, easily bent, twisted; subst. (ό) στρεπτ6%, a twisted collar. στρέφω, f. στρέψω, a. (στρεψα, pf. {στ ροφά (§ 109, 1), (στραμμαι, a. έστρέφθην (rare), 2 a. p. έστράφην (§ 109, 3), to twist, to turn, to face about. Eng. Catastrophe (κάτα, στρέφω). Στυμφάλιος, -ία, -ιον, Stymphalian ; subst. a Stymphalian. σν, σον (§ 79), thou Lat. tu. σνγγίγνομαι (συν, yiyvouai), to be with, to be intimate with. συγκολλώ, (ώ), (συν, καλέω), to call or summon together; mid. to call to one's self, to invite to a feast. EvMwis, -los, (ό), Syennesis, king of Cilicia. συλλαμβάνω [συν, λαμβάνω), to seize, arrest, apprehend. Eng. Syllable. συλλέγω (σύν, λέ*γω, to gather), f. συλλογή 42 σφάγιον σνΧΚέΊ-ω, a. συνέλεξα, pf. σννείΧοχα (§ 109, 1), pf. pass. συνείΧϊγμαι., 2 a. pass, συνελ^ην, to gather to- gether , to collect, assemble. συλλογή, -ης, (η), a gathering; a levy- ing of soldiers. συμβάλλω (σύν, βά\\ω), to bring together \ to contribute ; χρήματα συνε- βάλλοντο αύτφ, contributed money for him. συμβουλ€ύω (σύν, βουλεύω), to advise, counsel ; mid. to consult together. συμμαχέω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to be an ally, to be in alliance with ; to aid, to help. σύμμαχος, -op, (σύν, μάχη), in alliance with; σύμμαχο*, (ό), anally. συμμίγνυμι (σύν, μί Λ /νυμή, to mingle with, to join. σ-ύμιτας, σύμπασα, σύμιταν (σύν, πας), all together. συμ-πΈμπω, (συν, πέμπω), to send with. ο-νμπίπτω (σύν, πίπτω), to fall to- gether, to grapple with. σύμπλ€ω$, -ων, (σύν, πλέω?, πλέος), filled, w. gen. συμιτράσσω, Att. -ττω (σύν, πράσ- σω), to do with another, to help, assist, to co-operate with. σύν, prep. \v. dat. only, with, in com- pany with. συνάγω {σύν, άγω), to bring together. συναλλάττω (άλλάττω, f. -άξω, a. ijWa^a, pf. ^λλαχα, 2 a. pass. ήλλάΎψ, pf• ήΧλαΎμαι), to reconcile. συναναβαίνω (σύν, ανά, βαίνω), to go up with. συναντάω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, a. --ηντησα, to meet. συνάιτξίμι (σύν, από, εΐμή, to depart at the same time. συνάιττω (απτω, f. αψω, &c), to join with; εΐ yap τίνα άλλήλοις μάχην συνάψετε, for if you join in any con- test with one another, p. 55, Ex. 13. σύν€ΐμι (σύν, εϊμή, to go with, to ad- vance. συν€ργόε, -6v, helping in work; subst. assistant. συν€σττων, see συσπάω. σύνθημα, -aros, (το), anything agreed upon, a sign, a watchword, 1,8, 16. cruvoSos, -ου, (η), a coming together ; a meeting ,• in a hostile sense, a meeting of two armies, an engage- ment, 1, 10, 7. συνοιδα (σύν, όΐδα), see § 130. συντάττω (σύν, τάττω), to draw up (in military order) ; mid. to place one y s self in military order ; έαν δε μηδέ ηΎεμόνα δίδω, συντάττεσθαι την ταχίστην, but if he shall not give the guide, that they shall place themselves in military order most speedily, p. 57, 8. Eng. Syntax. συντίθημι (σύν, τίθημι), to place to- gether ; mid. to make an agre with. Eng. Synthesis. συντυγχάνω (σύν, τυγχάνω), to meet with, to fall in with, \v. dat. 1, 10, 8. Συρακόσιο$, -ου, (ό), a Syracusian. Συρία, -as, (η), Syria. συσκευάζομαι, -άσω, to make prepara- tions, to pack up. συσττάω, -άσω, to sew together. συσττ€ΐράομαι, pass, to be coiled up together; of soldiers, to be in close array ; σννεσπεφαμένην έχων .... τάζιν, having the eomjxiny of six hundred cavalry icith him drawn up in close array, 1, S, 21. συστρατιώτη$, -ου, (ό), a fellow-sol- dier. συχνός, -η, -or, of time, long; of. number and quantity, many, much. σφάγιον, -οι-, (τ6), a victim for sacri- σφάζα 43 τεκαήριον nsfrom the llS. ί. σφάξω, pf. σφ«ΐ$, 4a, i. pron. σφ€νδονάω, ί. -ήσω, to use the sling. <τφ€ν5ονη, -tjs, (η), a sling; that wkick is slung ; the stone σφ*ν5ονήτη$, -οι, ( .'»), ■ dinger. σφοδρό*, -ά, -<>, ejrcessii'*, pr> σφοδρά /^dcia, pre>* σχ€$όν, adv. m σχ*δό* δ' 5rt, but a f *>ul /Λ mien, 1, 10, 16 J σχεδόν oi δμοτρά- π<ζοι κάλοι '/i*roi, < were nnffnrf table-comjHinions. σχήρΑ, -arot, (ro), yorw, or iru/ice. 1 EMM, σχολή, -rjs, (η), leisure. σώζω, f. σώσω, a. Ζσωσα, pf. σέσωχα, pf. pass, σέσωσμαι, Att. σέσωμαί, a. έσώ$ψ*, to «ire, preserve. Σωκράτη*, (-eos), ovs, (c), Socrates. 1. The Athenian philosopher, B.C. An Ailuean, one of the Greek generals ; for voe., see 1. σώμα, -aros, (ro), Mf />ocfy. σώ$, σών, ice. Bing. rur, ace. pi. maac. and fern, σώ?, contr. from σώοί, -α, -οι>, safe and sound ; of things, sound, whole, βα /fe, certain. Σώσ\$, -eu>s, (ό), Setts. σωτήρ, -τ /pos, (ό), α savior, a σωτήριος, -oy, bringing safety ; subst. vuatis o/ safety. T. τάλαντον, -οι», (τό>, to/rn/, η .? 1 Ταρ,ώ*, -*\ (ο), J imoi. τάξι?, -'wt, (τ;). orcfer, rani ohort, com' τάραχο*, -οι», (ό), confusion, disorder. Ταρσοί, -ων, (al τάσσω, Att. τάττω, f. τά£ω, α. (ταξα, -<ταχα, a. paaa. έτάχθην, pf. uj ι in aritt .• των Tpos τούτο Τ€τα"γμ4νων, ι fo ίΛ/* ι/ Ί, 10 ; fo ^irei OV ταχ0ίίϊ, ώ* £0τ; cutos, ΐ'ττό τοΟ €μον άδεΧφον, but when, as he hiiu< ordered f>y kuA*T t p. | ταύτη, idr. Μ CfttJ or Mai tray or «wiincr, Zicre, f/<*re. τάφρο*, -οι», (η), a ditch, trench. ταχν*, -da, -e, s>rij}, quick ; ταχύ, as quickly, soon ; com p. θάσσων, -ττων, and ταχίων, snp. τάχισ- το*, I 7 •"'., 10 ; ώ? τάχιστα, as qm\ tible; fj αδύνατο τάχισ- τα, as quirk/y as he uns able; την ταχίστην οδδν, by the speediest way, litie conj., and, like Lat. que; τέ . . . . και, both .... and, or and in particular, as the καί is more emphatic, tcCvo (I 100, 3, N. 1), f. τενω, JO, 1) a. fcwa, (§ 121), pf. τέτακα, pf. pass, τέταμαι (§ 109, 3, X. 1), ίτάθψ (§ 109, 3), to extend; to hasten. τ€Ϊχο*, (-eos), -οι /y, (ro), α wall, for- tress. τ€καήριον, -ou, (ro), α Sf^n. Τ€λ€υτάω 44 τοσόσ -Se Τ€λ€υτάω, (ώ), -ήσω, pf. τετελεύτηκα, to end, to die. tckvov, -ου, (τό), a child. τ€λ€υτή, -ijs, (ή), end, completion. rikos, -eos, (τό), an end, result. τέμνω, f. τ€μω, pf. τέτμηκα, 2 a. era- μο»> or 'έτεμον, 2 a. mid. έτεμόμψ, pf. pass, τέτμημαι, a. έτμήθψ, to cut in battle, to wound. T&rcrapes, Att. rerrapcs, -pa (§ 77), /our. Eng. Tessellate. τ€τρακκτχΙλιοι, -at, -a, ^/our thousand. τ€τρακόσ*ιοι, -at, -a, four hundred. τετταράκοντα, forty. Τ€\νη, -7?$, (ή), s&^• Eng. Tech- nical. τήδ€, adv. in this way. τιάρα, -as, (ή), a tiara. Τίγρης, -ητος, (ό), the Tigris, a river emptying into the Euphrates. τίθημι, f. θήσω, α. Ζθηκα (§121, Ν. 2), pf. τέθηκα, 2 a. e^y, pf. pass. τέθειμαι, a. έτέθψ, to set, place, put; mid. to put, to place (for one's self), to Jix, settle; τίθβσθαι τα δπλα has three senses : (1 ) to stack or pile arms ; generally to take up a position, 1, 2, 6 ; (2) to get (sol- diers) under arms, to draw (them) up in order of battle ; (3) to lay down one's arms, to surrender; with ayQva, to appoint, 1, 2, 10 ; iv τάξει 0έσ0αι όπλα and ds τάξιν τά Οπλα τίθεσ- θαι, to place one's self in order of battle. Cf. Eng. Theme. τιμάω (ω), -ήσω, τετίμηκα (§ 123), to honor, to value. τιμή, -rjs, (η), honor. τίμιος, -a, -ov, held in honor. τιμωράω, f. -ήσω, to punish, to take vengeance upon. τις, τί (§84), inteiTog. pron. who? which? what? τΙς, t\ (§ 84), indef. pron. enclit. some one, something, any one, any- thing, a, a certain ; μελαι/ία tls, a certain blackness; χαλ /cos tls, some- thing like brass. Τισ-σ-αφέρνης, (-eos), -01s, D. -ei, A. -ψ, V. -η, (ό), Tissaphernes, satrap of Caria. τιτρώσ-κω, f. τρώσω, a. Ζτρωσα, pf. pass, τέτρωμαι, a. pass, έτρώθην, to wound. τίω, f. τίσω, impf. Ιτιον, pf. pass. τέτιμαί, to esteem. το I, enclit. particle of inference, therefore; in truth. τοίνυν (roi, νύν), therefore, then, ac- cordingly, further. toioVSc, τοιά$€, toiov$€, of such a kind, nature, quality; somewliat as follows ; generally referring to what follows. τοιούτος, τοιαντη, τοιούτο or -ov, of such kind, nature, or quality ; comm. referring to what has gone "before ; iv τοωύτφ του κινδύνου irpoibvTOS, in so much of approaching danger , i. e. in such extreme danger, p. 47, 5. ΤολμΙδης, ov, (6), Tolmtdes, the best herald in the army. τοξαιμα, -aros, (τό), an arrow. τοξβύω, f. -€ΐσω, to hit with an arrow. Cf. Eng. Intoxicate, as arrows were often poisoned. τοξότης, -ου, (ό), a bowman. T0V09, -ου, (ό), α place, region. Eng. Tone. τόσος, -77, -ov, of size, so great : of space, so wide; of time, so long; of number, so many ; cf sound, so loud ; = Lat. tantus ; answers to the relat. δσos. toowSc, -ήδε, -δνδ€ = roVos, with τόσο ντο* 45 ίητάρχω stronger demonstr. force, so great, so large ; w. in tin. so strong , so able, to do a thing ; τοσόνδ*, adv. so very, so much. too-ovtos, τοσαντη, τοσοντο, or -or, so large, such, so great, = Lat. tan- tus ; δσψ .... τοσοντφ, much the sooner . . . . by so much the more, i. e. the sooner . ... the more. tOtc, adv. then , formerly; ol rare, the men then /»- :i ; it an> Τράλλη*, -Mr, (ai), TraBm, I τραύμα, -ατοί, (r J), α wound. Tp€is, τρία, /Ar« (§ 77). Lat tree, rpAtrm, f. τρέψω, a. frpe^a, pf. W- τρο^α (§ 10.' t. (τρατορ (§ 109, 3), pf. pass, τέτραμί έτρέφΟηψ, to turn ; pass ι 6rt an absolute sovereign ; it was applied 1 made hii force, not to hereditary _ r ns. ννχη, "ffj (l\ chance, fortune. TU>8t, adv. in the following manner, as follows. νδωρ, CSaTOS, 0*6), v vios, -οΓ•, (ό), a son g. I dual, v'Ue, iUqlv ; ρΐ. ι ties, €ts, gen. :', (2•»'; dat. vUaa>, ace. in^zs, \ e?s. v\Urq>os, -a, -op, yo»/r. virapxos, -ov, (ό), as»/ υπάρχω (ύτό, άρχω), to begin, to be, νπέλαννω 46 to exist; ΤΙαρύσατιτ δη ή μήτηρ υπήρχε τφ Κύρφ, now Cyrus had his mother Parysatis (i. e. to support, to favor him), p. 51, 7. ύττελαύνω (υπό, έλαύνω), to drive un- der; intrans. (sc. ϊππον), to ride up to. vjrcp, prep. w. gen. or ace. ; w. gen. expressing that over which some- thing is ; of place, over ; of motion, over, across, or over, beyond ; from the notion of standing over to pro- tect, for, in defence of in behalf of ; w. ace. expressing that over and beyond which a thing goes ; of place, over, beyond; of measure, over; of number, above, upwards of, beyond. Eng. Hyper- in com- pounds. υπερβολή, -rjs, (η), the act of casting beyond ; the act of passing ; passage, a pass. {iircpSefjtos, -ov, above the right. ι>ΐΓηρ€Τ€ω (ω), f. -ήσω, pf. ύπηρέτηκα, to serve on board ship, to serve, to furnish. νιτηρ6τη$, -ου, (ό), properly an under- rower ; a sailor, a laborer, servant. ύΐΓίσ-χν^ομ,αι, f. mid. ύποσχήσομαι, pf. ύπέσχημαι, 2 a. mid. ύπεσχδμην, to promise ; oVi πολλά ύπισχνη νυν, that you now promise many things, §243. virvos, -ου, (δ), sleep. νπό (Lat. sub), under; w. gen. ; of place, from under ; as agents after pass, verbs, by ; w. dat. under ; w. ace. ; of place, to express motion towards and under an object ; of time, about, υπό νύκτα, towards night ; υπό την εω, about morning. υποδέχομαι (υπό, δέχομαι), to receive. ύττοζΰγιον, -ου, (τό), a beast of burden, a pack-animal. νττολαμβάνω (υπό, λαμβάνω), to re- ceive. νπολζίττω (υπό, λείπω), to leave behind. νιτολυω (υπό, λύω), to loosen, to un- bind. νΐΓθΐΓ€μΐΓ« (υπό, πέμπω), to send se- cretly, to send as a spy. ύττοτΓτευω, f. -εύσω, impf. ύττώπτευον, § 105, 1, Ν. 2, to suspect, appre- hend. {πτό Jt>t/a (| 17, 2, ~,ov, to fit* ; ol φίύ- 7orrey, the fugitivt « the pf. ■ in exile. φηαί, f. 07*7 ω, I IV.), tO *' H, tO $pcil> I φΟύνω, f. φθάσω and -ήσομαι, a. ίφθασα, pf. ϊφθακα ΐφθητ (like /^riy•'), to com* 6r/orc, α /κιΛ I ; δπωι μη φΰάσωσι μήτ€ Κνροι μήτ€ ol Ktkuctt καταλα- φθ*γγοααι, f. mid. -ζομαι, a. mid. έφθ€*γξάμηρ, to cry aloud, to shout. Eng. Diphthong (Si's, 0^07705). φθ€ίρω, f. tf>0epu> (§ 120, 1), a. €φθ € ιρα (§121), pf. Ζφθαρκα, pf. pass. ϊφθαρμαι, a. έφθάρην, to destroy. φθον€ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, to env». φθόνο*, -oi', (0), envy. φιλ€ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, pf. τ€φί\ηκα .. X.. J 128), pf. pass. Τ€φί\ημαι, a. (φίλήθην, to love. Phil- in compounds. φιλία, -ay, (7/), frumUiip. φίλιο*, -fo, -ων (φίλος), friendly. φιλόθηρο?, -of, fund if the c//<: φιλοκ€ρδ«'ω, (d), t -τ;σω, to 6e <; |0 Mat 0OM ((«jcrfy. φιλοκίνδννος, -οι/, ^/om/ o/' danger. φιλομαθή?, -ώ 0τ;μι ταύτα φλυαρίας €Ϊναί, ι that these things are fool' φοβ«ω, (ω), f. -ήσω, a. έφ6βησα, a. DUd. έφοβησάμην, a. }•ι-<. (φοβή- θ ην, to terrify ; mid. to / φόβο*, -οι•, (ό), far, fright. Eng. HyDBOPAOBLA (Οδωρ, φόβος). φοινίκ€θ*, -^α, -€ον, COntr. -ouy, -77, οιν, jntrjile. Φοινίκη, -Tjy, (7)), Phoenicia. φοινικισ-τή*, -oD, (ό), one who wrars tktpmrp >> r. φορί'ω, (ώ), f. -ήσω, a. έφόρησα, frequent, cf. <£*7>ω, to carry, to zwar. φράζω χ«Λό*3 φράζω, f. φράσω, pf. πέφρακα (§17, 2, Ν.), pf. pass, ττέφρασμαι, a. εφράσθψ, to tell, declare. Eng. Phrase. φρήν, -epos, (ή), the mind. φρόνιμος, -ov, in one's right sen&x, thoughtful, intelligent. φροντίζω, -ίσω, Att. -ιω, § 120, 3, to think, to reflect, to be anxious. φρούραρχος, -ov, (ό), α commander of a garrison or fortress. φρουρέω, (ώ), f. -ή<τω, a. έφρούρησα, to guard, to hold under guard. φρούριο v, -ov, (to), a guard, a fortress, garrison duty ; els φρούρια, for gar- rison duty, 1, 4, 15. Φρυγία, -as, (ή), Phrygia, a province of Asia Minor. Φρύξ, -vybs, (6), a Phrygian. φνγά* -άδυ$, (5), fugitive, exile. φνγή» "'/*, Wh flight- φυλακή, ~rjs, (ή), the act of guarding, a watch or guard ; a garrison , 1,1, 6 ; of time, a watch ; a place for watching and guarding; irpbs τά$ φνλσ.^, to the guard-stations. φΰλαξ, -α /cos, (ό), a guard. φυλάττω, f. -ξω, a. έφύ\αξα, pf. πέ- φύλαχα (§ 17, 2, Ν.), to guard; intrans. to keep guard ; mid. to be on one's guard. φΰω, f. φύσω, a. Ζφνσα, pf. πέφν ;a (§ 17, 2, X.), to produce. Φωκαΐ$, -tdos, (ή), « Phoeaian woman. φωνή€ΐς, -ecrtra, -ei>, sounding, gifted with speech, endowed with a voice ; contr. in neut. pi. φωναντα (Dor.). φως, φωτός, (§ 25, 3), (τό), α %fc. χαίρω, f. χαιρήσω, pf. κεχάρηκα (§ 17, 2, Ν*.), pf. pass, κεχάρημαι and κέχαρμαι, f. mid. χαρονμαι, 2 a. pass, έχάρψ, to rejoice, to be glad ; w. dat. ίο rejoice at; be delighted with, take pleasure in a thing. χαλ€ΐταίνω, f. -avQy (§ 120, 1), έχα- λέπψα (§121), to be hard; mid. to be angry. χαλ€ττός, -ή, -ov, hard to bear, grievous; difficult; of persons, hard to deal with, hostile ; τα χαλεπά, hardships; oi χαλεττώτεροι, bitterer enemies ; τα χαλεπώτατα, those things which are most cruel ; comp. -ώτερos, snp. -ώτατος. χαλ€ΐτώς, adv. with difficulty ; comp. -ώτερων, sup. -ώτατα. χάλκ€ος, -εα, -εον, contr. χαλ /coOs, -ή, •ονν, of bronze or copper, brazen. χαλκός, -ov, (6), copper, brass. χαρί€ΐς, -ίβσσα, -lev, graceful, pleas- ing. § 67, 2. χαρίζομαι, f. -ίσομαι, Att. -ιονμαι (§ 120, 3), a. έχαρισάμψ, pf. κεχά- ρισμαι, both in act. and pass. sense, to gratify ; w. dat. and ace. to gratify a person in regard to any- thing, to oblige. χάρις, -ltos, favor, gratitude; ace. χάριν. χ€ίρ, χ€ΐρός, (η), reg. but dat. pi. χερσί, the hand. χ€ΐρόω, (ώ), f. -ώσω, a. έχείρωσα, to take in hand, to overpower, to master, Xeppc νήσος, -ου, (η), the Chersonesus, a peninsula upon the Thraoian side of the Hellespont. χίλιοι, -αι, -a, a thousand. χιλός, -ov, (6), grass, forage. χιτων 49 ψνχή χιτών, -Qvos, (ό), a tunic. χόρτο*, -ου, (ό), fodder ; χάρτα κου- φοί, hay. χράομΑΐ, (ώμαί), f. mid. χρήσομαι, a. mid. ίχρησάμηρ, pf. pass. κ**- χρημΛΐ (J J), to use, to em- />/oy ; v/iiV, ώϊ μόνοα ττ€ίθομένοι*, Τίστοτάτοιΐ χρήσεται, he will employ you as the only ones who obeyed him, as most trustworthy. χράω, f. χρήσω, a. ίχρησα, pf. κ^- Xprj*:: (f 17, :nid. *χ/>τι- σάμην, a. pass, ίχρήσθηψ, pf. *e*- χρησμαι and κίχρημαι in present •env id. is ι used as I :h ]>f. ρββ. κέχρημαί in same aense (see χράω), /ο t/v uti. χρή, unpen, subjunct. xprj, optat. χρ€ίη, infin. xrfps^ Empf. I ΧΑ"/*» f• Χρή*** 1 * it i*fatrd, it is necessary . u r/ must, it is χρη^ω ν used in pree. and impf.), to wish. χρήμα, -aros, (τ 6), thing used; pi. goods, property, money, resources ; χρήματα πολλά, much money. χρήσ -tuos, -77. -o^, KM χρόνος, -οι-, (ό), time; χρόνψ συχνφ, a considerable time. Eng. Chronic. χρύο -cos, -(a., -fop, contr. χρυσού*, -ή, -ovv, golden. § 65. χρυσ -lov, -ov, (ro), piece 0/ gold, gold money (coined). χρυσός, -oO, (ό), ooW. χρυσ-οχάλΐνο$, -ο»', ιπϊΛ gold-studded bridle. χώρα, -ay, (77), a place, the place as- signed to any one, j tli τ ν -ou χώραν, to his own position, p. H, L\~> ; land, country, It Tri- ton,. χωρ^ω, (ώ), f. •ήσω, Att -ήσομαι, ft, ίχώρησα, pf. κεχώρ-ηκα, to nude room for Ed withdraw ; to n4 I. l". χωρίον, -οι•, (ro), a }>lace, poeition. χωρίς. without, ajxirt χώρος, -οι•, (ό), «pace, district. Ψ. Φάρο*, -ου, (0), Psarsus, a rn ψ<λιον, -or, (τό% fl bracelet. "ιστατοϊ. re, pf. pass. ., a. pass, έψεύσθην, to d<- ceivt : (ύσθη τού- το, in this he was deceived. Γ as a prefix in nuiu ψιλός, -?}, -OV, ftare ; uncovered, un- armortd ; ψιλην ίχων την κεφαλήν, Mi head bare, i.e. without ψιλόω, (d), f. -ώσω, pf. p*SS. ίφίλω- μαι, to strip bare, to make bald; peas, to become bald ; w. gen. to strip bare of a thi ψνχή, -is, (ή), oreatf, sou/, life. 50 ώφ€λξ'ω a ώ, interj. Ο, used in direct address. ώδ€, adv. thus, so, in this manner, in the following manner. ώνέομαι, (-ούμαι), f. -ήσομχιι, a. έωνη- σάμην, pf. έώνημαι, impf. έωνούμην, to buy, to purchase (έπριάμην is used as 2 a., for accent, see § 127, 6, N. 2). ώκΰ$, ώκ€ΐα, ώκύ, gen. ώκέος, -eias, -^os, gwicfc, swift; adv. ώ^ω? or ώκα, swiftly ; comp. and sup. ώκύ- repos, ώκύτατος ; irreg. ώκίων, ώκιστος. uivios, -α, -ov, for sale ; τα. ώνια, wares. ώρα, -as, (ή), time. as, demonstr. adv. of manner, so, thus. ώ$, relat. adv. when, as; δ δ 1 ως άπή\θ€Ρ, but when he departed, p. 63, 15; as conj. that; ώς έπιβουλεύοι, (saying) that he was plotting, 1,1. 3 ; before a partic. to express the idea of the subject of the leading \ verb, without implying that it is the idea of the speaker or writer, as if, on the ground that, with the intention of, for the purpose of, pre- tending that, that; ώς els ΙΙισίδας βουλδμενος στρατεύεσθαι, pretending that he wished to had an army against the Pisidians, 1, 1. 11 ; ώς Ιίίσίδας βουλόμενος έμβαλεΐν παντάπασιν έκ της χώρας, that he wished to expel the Pisidians wholly from the country, 1, 2, 1, § 277, 6, N. 2 ; un έτπβου- λεύοντος Τισσαφέρνους, on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting, 1,1, 6 ; ώ$ φίλον, as a friend, 1, 1, 2 ; W. sup. ώς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible; w. numerals, about; w. infin., denoting purpose or result, so that, so as, § 266, 2, N. 1 ; ώς μη άτττεσθαι της κάρφης το ϋδωρ, so that the water did not touch the hay; causal conj. because; tem- poral, when ; as prep. w. ace. used only before names of persons, to. oxnrcp, just as ; of time, as soon as ; to modify an assertion, as if as tt were ; w. partic. as, or as if, § 277, 6, N.3. ώστ€, w. infinitive, so that, so as, § 266, 1 ; on condition, § 266, 2 ; ώστ€ αύτφ μάλλον φίλους elvai τ) βασιλβΐ, so that they were more friendly to him than to the king, p. 55, 6 ; w. indicative, so that, § 237. ώτ€ΐλή, -ης, (η), a scar. ώφ€λ€, would that, that ; άφβλε τούτο Ίτοιέΐν, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought to be doing this). See 6ά*(\ω. § 251, 2, Ν. 1. ώφ€λ&>, (ώ), f. -ήσω, to assist. II. ENGLISH AXD GREEK. [For numeral*, see Grammar, § 76 ; for pronouns, § 79.] a, a certain one, rU. abandon, to, προδίδωμι. ability, δύναμα, (η); to the best of one's ability, * Is δίναμιν. able, to be, δύναμαι; able (adj.), I Kayos, -ij, «£r. about (concerning), περί w. gen.; about (around), άμφί w. ace.; about w. mu J 98, 3 ; we are about to do this, μί\\θμ€Ρ TOITO VOr above, (nrip w. gen. or ι accede, to accede to a truce, σπένδομαι (in: accomplish, to, διαπράττομαι (mi*L). accordance with, in, πρ6* w. accustomed to hunt, tfijptw, ♦\ to, ylyropai. accuse, to, αίτιάομαι; διαβά\ actuate, to, παροξύνω. admire, to, άγαμοι. advance (go forward), to, προειμι Used as t of προέρχομαι ; advance (to, towards, or against), (παμι; to advance on the run, δρόμφ θ' nce-guard, προφνλαξ (6). advise, to, σΐ'μβονλείω. after, conj. ίπεί, ίπαδή, § 207, 2 ; ]»r«j» , μ €Τ ά v. ifter these things, μετά ταιτα. afternoon, δείλη (η). afterwards, ύστερον, adv. again, (of place, back, backward; of time, once more; in narrative, on the other hand, in turn, like- ), αύ; (back again), πάλιν; (still, longer), tn. against, ε* πι or πp6s w. ι alive, to be, #ω, § 123, X. 2. all, τάί, τασα, τάν, | ; not at all, o; it all, είτα. almost, oXiyov w. δει, § 172, 2, ΗΓ. 2 (end). ally, σύμμαχο* (b). alone, μΟΜ, -η, -ov. already, ήδη, adv. also, καί. altar, βωμ6s (6). although, μ^™ ; by a partic, 7,5. always, άεί, adv. am, είμΐ. am able, δύναμαι, §127, 6, Ν. 2. ! am come, τ)κω, see § 200, Note 3. am gone, οΐχομαι, § 200, 3. ambush, to lie in, ενεδρεύω. among, μετά w. gen.; (into), els w. anciently, τό άρχαΐον. and, και ; καί oomeponds to the et ; ri (.nclitie), to Lat. que ; 6V. angry, to be, χα\επαίνομαι (mid.), w. «hit. ; to make angry, opyifa. animal, ζψον (τό) ; wild animal, θηρίον (τό). announce 52 away announce, to, αγγέλλω, or απαγ- γέλλω, § 120, 1 and § 121 ; to an- nounce publicly, προα~/ορ€ύω. annoy, to, κακω* ποιέω, § 165, Ν. 1. another, άλλο*, -η -ο. answer, to, αποκρίνομαι. anticipate, to, φθάνω, § 279, 2. anxious, to be, φροντίζω. any one, some one, any thing, τι*, τι, § 84 and § 150 ; any (other) one, another, άλλο*, -η, -ο. appear, to, mid. and pass, of φαίνω. appoint, to, άποδείκνυμι. approach, έφοδο* (ή). array, to, τάσσω; of those arrayed against the Greeks, των κατά τους "Ε\\ηνα* τεταγμένων. arise (accrue), to, ^νομαι. Aristippus, 'Αρίστιππο* (6). armed with scythes, δρεπανηφόρο*, -a, -ov. arms, 6π\α (τά). army, στράτευμα (τό) ; στρατιά (η). around, περί, w. ace. ; αμφί w. ace. arrange, to, διατάσσω. arrest, to, συλλαμβάνω. arrive (am present), to, πάρειμι; come from some place άφικνέο- jucu ; have arrived, am come, ήκω, pres. with force of pf. see § 200, N. 3. Artaxerxes, 'Αρταξέρξη* (6). as, ω*, sometimes not translated, with partic. in gen. absolute, § 277, 6, N. 2 ; just as, ώσπερ ; as if, ώ* : as quickly as possible, ώ* τάχιστα ; as much as possible, ώ$ μάλιστα, with or without the proper form of δύναμαι ; as many as possible, ώ* or 6τι πλείστοι ; as fast as he could, fj έδύνατο τάχιστα ; as follows, proper form of οδε (§148, Ν. 1) when the ob- ject of a verb ; ώδε, an adverb ; (somewhat as follows), τοώσδε, τοιάδε, τοιόνδε ; not translated after verbs signifying to appoint, &c, § 166 and N. 2. ascend, to, αναβαίνω. ashamed, to be, mid. of αίσχύνω ; so that every one was ashamed, ώστε πάσιν αισχύνην είναι. ask, αιτέω (ask a person for some- thing^, § 164 ; ερωτάω, or άνε- ρωτάω, interrogate, to inquire; {ρομαι mostly used in the aor. and fut, for the present ερωτάω is used ; δέομαι, beg, § 172, 2, N. 2. ass, ovo* (6 or ή). assemble (levy), to, αθροίζω. assembly, εκκλησία (ή). assist, ώφελέω ; ύπηρετέω w. dat. ; to assist in urging on the work, συσπουδάζω ; with one's assist- ance, μετά. assistance, βοήθεια (η). astonished, to be, Θαυμάζω. at, εΐ*, w. ace. after verbs of motion; iv, w. dat. ; έπί, w. dat. ; at full speed, ανά κράτο* ; at least, yi enclit., (Lat. quidem) ; at the same time, άμΛ ; at least, r£\os. Athenian, 'Αθηναίο*, -αία, -αΐον. attach, to, επιτίθημι. attempt, to, πειράομαι. away, ride, to, άτέλαννω ; sen4 away, άφίημι. ylon 68 by Babylon, (ή). barbarian, βάρβαρο* (ό). barbarian, βαρβαρικό*, -ή, -ό>. bare, ^ιλό*, -ή, -ό*. base, κακό*, •ή, -ο*, § 73, 2 ; basely, battle, μάχη (η) ; battle (war), (μο* (ό). bear, to, φίρω. beast, Οηρίυν (τό) ; beast of burden, Oxofirytor (τό). beat, to, xoiu;. beautiful, κα\ό*, -j, -or, § 73, 3. beauty, κά\\ο* (τό). because, ότι, partic. become, to, yi^vonai. becoiii •, Mi before, χ, ; τρόι w. gen. ; voir («onj.) § 146, 1 begin, to, Αρχω or νχάρχω, § 280 ; I begin to run, δρόμο* τίγτττα* μ (Χ. behalf nf, gen. D the rear, bxur$€P t adv. >Γ*<Η, § 1» Ι ο benefit ge, to, τυλω/κ/ω. beet, Απιστο?, -η, -ο* ; seem best, oca7u>. ι ay, to, χροδίδωμι. nd, vWp, w. acc. or gen. k, AiAas, pJXaiPa, μ4\α*. blackness, μ*\ανΙα (η). blame, to, (pass. ) 4χιτιμάω, with dat. blow, τλττντ? (ν)• boasting, με7α λ 7/7000 s, -α, -οι\ boat, τλοΐον (τό). boldly, θαρραλέω* (adv.). book, βιβλίον (τό). born, to be, yiyvop&i. both, άμφότ€ροι ; both . . . and, καΐ . . . καί ; τέ . . . καί : καί = the Lat. et: τ€ (enclitic) = Lat. que ; both . . and in particular, or partic- ularly, ri . . . και. bow, to use the, reft•* boy, ταΓ* (ό), § Η, :, Χ. bracelet, ψ ίλιον (τό). , άηαθό*, -η, -ον, §73,1; (man- άνί/χΓοί, -da, -€Ϊον. '.χτή (η). breadth, cf'pos (τό). break of day, at, άμα τ# ημίρα. break down, to, \ύω ; to break a aty, σχονδά* \v€lv. breakfast, Αριστον (τό). breastplate, θώραξ (ό). bridge, yin) by the side οζ χαρά, by the side of the road, χαρά την όδόν ; trans- . § 171, 1, and Ν.; by partic, § 277, 2. call 54 contest call (summon), to, καλέω; (name), ονομάζω. camp, σκψαί (ai) ; στρατόπεδον (τό). can, δύναμαι, § 127 β, Ν. 2. canal, αυλών (ό). captain, λοχαΎος (ό). care, to take care οζ έπιμελεομαι, § 171, 2 ; take care, care for, μέλει μοι, w. gen. carelessly, ήμελημϊνως, adv. carry on war, to, πολεμεω ; carry, φέρω. case, in, el w. the indie, or opta- tive. cast at, to, βάλλω ; to cast stones at him, βάλλειν αυτόν λίθοι*. cease, to, παύομαι (mid.). centre, μέσον (τό). certain, a, τις (enclitic). certainly, ^ μην. character, t/wos (ό) ; (disposition), φύσις (η) ; in accordance with the character of, προς του τρόπου. chariot, άρμα (τό). Chersonesus, Χερρόνησος (η). choose, to, αίρεομαι. Cilicia, Κιλικία (η). citadel, ακρόπολις (η). citizen, πολίτης (ό).- city (either the place, or its inhabi- tants, or both), πόλις (η) ; άστυ (not including the inhabitants) ; the men or those in the city, oi iv άστ€ΐ άνθρωποι, or oi h άστει, § 141, Ν. 3. Clearchus, Κλέαρχος (ό). cloud, νεφέλη (η). cohort, τάξις (η). Cold, χειμών (ό). collect (levy, assemble), to, αθροί- ζω ; collect (lead, together), συλ- λέγω. come, to, έρχομαι ; am come, ήκω, § 200, Ν. 3 ; to come together, συνέρχομαι ; to come forward, προ'ερχομΛΐ ; come back, η.<ω. command, to, προΐστημι, used in this sense only in the intransitive parts, pf., plupf., fut. pf. and 2d ao. tenses, § 171, 3 ; command (to do something), κελεύω ; com- mand (an army), στρατ-ηγέω, §171, 3 ; command (order), τάτ- τω w, ace. ; command (to act as commander), επιστατέω. commander, άρχων (ό). commit injustice, to, άδικεω. commotion, δουπος (ό). company, of infantry, τάξις ( ';) ; of horse, (λη (η) ; company with, in, σύν, w. dat. compel, to, βιάζομαι, w. ace. and inhn. conceal, to, κρύπτω. concerns, it, μέλει ; concerning, περί, w. gen. ; to be concerned, άχθομαι. confusion, τάραχος (ό). conquer, to, νικάω ; to be con- quered, ηττάομαι. conscious, I am, σύνοιδα έμαυτφ, §130, 2; §1S7. Consult together, to, συμβουλεύω. contend, to, ερίζω, § 186, X. 1 ; to contend with any one for any thing, άντιποιεΊσθαι (mid. of άντιποιέω) τινί τίνος, § 173, 1, Χ. ; § lSt>, Χ. 1. contest. ά"γών (ό). control 55 do control, to, ϊχω. convene, to, . co-operate, to, σνμτράττω. costly, τολυτϊλτρ, -4*. counsel, βούλευμα (τό). count upon, to, λογίζομαι. country (territory), χώρα (ή) ; na- tive country, rarpis (ή). cross, to, διαβαίνω; a crossing, διάβασα (ή). crown, στέφανο* (δ). cry out, to, βοάω. custom, νόμο! (ό). cut οΑζ to, έκκδτττω ; cut in pieces, κατακόττω ; cut down, έκκοντω. Cyrus, Kvpot (ό). D. danger, κίνδυνο* (6) ; incur danger, to, κι*δνι> dare, to, τολμάω. daric, δαρεικδ* (ό). Darius, Αα/χϊοί (ό). darkness, μελάνια { dart, ταλτάρ (τό). daug [η)- dawn, at, άμα δρθρφ. day, ήμίρα (η) journey or march, σταθμοί (ό). death, θάνατο* (ό) ; to put to death, άτοκτ- deceive, to, ^εόδω. declare, drfnror, 2d aor. tour deep, -€ττάρων. ited, to be, Ύτττάομαι. διατρίβω. *rate, to, βουλεύομαι (mi ip, to, ταραδΐδομαι. 10US, ηδύ*, •ύα. demand, to, άταιτέω. dense, tukvos, ~t), -or. . , to, ofl φημί. depart, to, άταμι. desert, to, αΐτομολέω ; άτέρχοααι ; many deserted from the king, χαρά βασιλίω* τολλοί άτήλθον. f O, διανοούμαι. deserve, the one deserving (it), ίτΐΤΤ)δ€10*> -OP. desire, Ιττιθυμία (η). desire, to, ΪΎίθυμέω ; xpyfa; (noun) Ι (ό). despatch, to, άτοτέμτω. destroy, to, άφαιρέω ο, άτοΰνήσκω, θνήσκω, j Γ, to, διαφέρω. difficult, ovjTopciTos, -ov ; αμήχανος, -OP. difficulty, dxopov, iioiit. of άτο, n -ηρό*, -d, -or. DionysiUS, Διονύσιο* (δ). •^d, to be, «Γ/Χ4 ; to di] άτοδ(Ικννμι. ion, in this, rw6r% idr. disgraceful, α/σχρόϊ, -d, -or. : ss, to, άφίημι. displeased, to be, αχθομαι. divinity, δαίμων (δ). do (perform, act), to, τράττω (••ithrr trans, or intr.tiis.) ; χοιέω (make, appoint), (trans.); do well or good, tu χοιέω ; should (must) be done, τοιητίο*, -ο, -or, \ 1 and 2 ; to be successful or fortunate, καλώ* τράττω; to do harm or ill to, κακώς tcoUu, §10.', N\ 1. door 56 favor door, θύρα (ή). down, down from, κατά w. gen. draw np (in military order), to, τάττω. drink, to, πίνω; (noun), ποτόν (τό). drive, to, έξελαύνω. due, to be, οφείλομαι. duty of, it is, (εστί) w. predicative genitive, § 169, 1. dwell, to, οίκέω. Ε. each, έκαστος, -η, -ov; each other, αλλήλων, § 81. eagle, αετός (ό). earth, yy (ή). easy, εΰπρακτος, -ov. eat, to, έσθίω. educate, to, παιδεύω. effect a passage, to, παρέρχομαι. either . . . or, ή ... ή. elder, πρεσβύτερος, -α, -ov. Eleian, Ήλεϊος (ό). embark, to, έμβαίνω. empire, αρχή (ή). employ, to, χράομαι, § 188, 1, Ν. 2 ; § 123, Ν. 2. encamp, to, στρατοπεδεύοριαι (mid.), end, τελευτή (ή). endure,' -to, ανέχομαι. enemy (enemy in war), πολέμιος (ό) ; personal enemy, εχθρός (ό). engaged in military operations, to be, στρατεύομαι ; to engage in war, πολεμέω. enjoy (use), to, χράομαι (mid.), § 188, 1, N. 2. enough, ικανός, -ή, -6v. enquire, to, ερωτάω. enter, to, είσέρχομ,αι ; δύνω, see § 126, 1, fine print, enterprise, πράξις (ή). entreat, to, δέομαι, w. gen. err, to, αμαρτανω. escape, to, έκφεύ^ω. Euphrates, Ευφράτης (ό), § 142, 2, Ν. 5. every, every one, πάς, πάσα, παν ; everybody, πάς τις ; everything, neut. of πάς τις, or simply τα πάντα. evident, φανερός, -ά, -όν; δήλος, -η, -ον, § 280, Ν. 1. exceedingly, ισχυρώς, adv. except, πλην, w. gen. exercise, to, -γυμνάζω. exhibit, to, άποδείκνυμι. exile, φυ^άς (ό) ; οφεύ^ων; όέκπεπ- τωκώς, § 276, 2. expedient, it seems, δοκεΐ. expedition, to make, στρατεύομαι. expel, to, έκβάλλω. expend, to, δαττα^άω. extricate, to (help to), συνεκβιβάζω. eye, οφθαλμός (ό). faithful, πιστός, fall, to, πίπτω ; to fall into, •ή, -όν. to fall upon or εμπίπτω ; to fall down, εκπίπτω. farther, του πρόσω, partitive gen., lit., (a step) of the way forward. fast, ταχύς, -ε'ια, -ύ, §73, 10; as fast as he could, $ έδύνατο τά- χιστα; the faster, δσω θάττον, § 188, 2. father, πατήρ (ό). favor, to do a, εν ποιέω, § 165, Χ. 1. favorable condition 57 furnish favorable condition, to be in, *α\<2* £*eir. fear, ψ&βο* (ο). fear, to, 2d pf. of Ο€ίδω, with ace. or with μή; (hesitate) oo& μή, §218; to be frightened, φοβίομαι; (reverence), cu5io/iat. feet, hundred feet, πλέθρο* (τό). fellow, fellow soldiers, άτό>ί orparturrat. few, OXlyoi, -at, -a. fifteen, τ«τ«α/&κα, indeel. ; fif- teen hundred, πιντακοαο*. καΐ fifty, π€*τήκο*τα, indecL fight, to, μάχομαι. find, to, dipt*™; found, to be, ί>τάρχω; if any one shall be found doing good to us, it* uirroi τϋ ήμας καΧ tl ποιώ* νπάρχη. first, wpCnot, •η 9 -or; at first, πρώτο*. ίχθύι (ο). in time, *αφός (υ). !. ; five thou- sand, «ΌτταχκΓχίλκκ, - ror τρόπο*, § 160, 2. ; on the following day, τ τ} υστ€ραία, § 189 ; on (during) the following day, § 161 ; (arriving at and ex- ding into the following day) generally rendered on the fol- io v, rcpala*. folly, ίιήθεια (ή). fond of learning, φιλομαθής, -^s. food (nourishment, support), τροφή (ή); (corn, grain), σίτος fool, μάταιο* (ό). foolish, ενήθης, -€S. foot, πους (ό). for, ->ά> conj. ; for the sake οξ ίν€κα w. gen. ; διά w. ace. ; for what, δια τι; ίπΐ w. dat. ; (in behalf of), vW/> w. gen. ; after | 104. βία (ή); force or forces, 6v- ra/us (τ)). foregoing time, in the, έν τ φ πρ6σθ€ν χρ6*ω. forget, to, ^TiXartfdro/iai. former, πρότερος, -a, -ov; the for- mer . . . the latter, ol μέν . . . silt fortified, ίρυμνος, -ή, -or. forty, τ€σσαράκοντα ; forty-five, Wrrc καί τ€σσαράκο*τα. fountain, κρή*η (ή). four, τ/τταρ<ι, § 77 ; four deep, Μ τιττάρων ; four thousand, rerpa- κισχίΧωι, -at, -a. free, i\cv$€pot, -77, -τόί, § 142, 4, Ν. 3 ; when refer- ring to the subject of their verb the gen. of the reflexive pronoun is used, §142, 4, X. 3; when not emphatic by the article, § 141, N. 2 ; also by the possessive pronoun, §147. hit, to, ακοντίζω. hold, to, έχω. home, homeward, otxade, § 61. honor, to, τιμάω; honor, τιμή (η). honorable, τίμιο*, -α, -ov. hope, 4\wis (ij). hoplite, ότΜτη* (ό). horse, Γττοι (ό); on horseback (with verbs signifying to hunt), άφ ίττον; with verbs signifying Ids, ίφ' Γττου. horseman, hnrevs (ό). hostile, τολ^ /uoj, -a, -ov. house, δόμο* (6). how, τώτ, in dii ©τω*, in indii -, 1 ; how much, τόσο*, -τ?, -ov ; how many, oVtoj, -77, -0*. however, μέντοι, adv., someti hundred, έκατ6ν, indecl. hunger, λιμό* (ό). hunt, Οηρα'ω; to hunt on horse- back, θηρνίιω άτό ίττον. hurl, to, βάλλω. Ι, W, *μο0, §144, 1. if, el, before the indicative and op- tative; tap, before the subjunc- ill, κακω* ; treat ill, κακω* τοιέω. immediately, evdvs; when used to add explicitness to parti rendered by δή. impassable 60 justice impassable, αμήχανος, •ον. in, έν, with dative ; els (after verbs of motion), w. ace. in accordance with the character, προς του τρόπου. in as much as, ώ* w. partic., § 277, 6, ST. 2. in behalf of, υπέρ w. gen. income, πρόσοδος (ή). in company with, σύν w. dat. in order that, ha, § 216. in that place, ενταύθα, adv. in the following manner, ώδε, adv. ; τόνδε τον τρόπον, § 148, Ν. 1 ; § 160, 2. in the power οζ 4πί w. dat. in the presence οζ προς w. gen. ; after verbs of motion with ace. ; those in presence of the king, ol προ βασιλέως. indeed, δέ. infantry, ίλη (ή). inferior, to be, ήττάομαι, § 175, 2. inflict punishment, to, δίκψ έπι~ τίθημι. inform, to, σημαίνω, § 121, Ν. 1 ; to give information, μψύω. inhabitants, ol ένοικουντες. injure, to άδικέω; without doing injury, άσΐνώς. injustice, to commit, άδικέω; (noun) αδικία (ή). inquire (seek), to, ζητέω. in regard to, προς w. ace. in return for, αντί w. gen. inspect, to, έπισκοπέω. instead of, αντί w. gen. insuperable, αμήχανος, -ov. intelligent, σοφός, -ή, -όν. intend, to, μέλλω, § 98, 3 ; intend- ing or with the intention οζ ως with a partic, § 277, 6, Κ 2. interpreter, έρμψεύς (ό). into, εις w. ace. ; into the presence οζ προς w. ace. Ionia, Ιωνία (ή). it, αυτός, αυτή, αυτό, § 79, Κ. 1 ; § Η5, 2. it is characteristic of, (εστί), with the predicative genitive, § 169, 1. it is necessary, δει; avdyw (ή) with (εστίν). itself, see himself. javelin, παλτόν (τό). join, to, συμμί^νυμι, § 187 ; join in a war against, συμπολεμέω προς w. ace. ; join in an expedition against, συστρατεύομαι έπί w. ace. journey, οδός (ή) ; a day's journey, σταθμός (ό). Jove, Ζευς (o). judge, κριτής (ό). Jupiter, Ζευς (ό), voc. Ζεΰ. just, δίκαιος, -a, -ov; justly, δίκαια (neut. plu. of ξίκαιος), also δικαίως. just now, δή. justice, punishment, δική (ή). keep guard 61 love keep guard, to, φυλάττω. kill, to, άποκτείνω ; (pass, αποθνήσκω). king, βασιλεύς (ό) ; am king, βασ- ιλεύω. kingdom, βασιλεία (ή). know, to, οίδα, see §200, N. 6; έπίσταμαι (§ 127, 6, Ν. 2); (per- ceive) γιγνώσκω. knowledge οξ without the, λάθρα w. gen.; or by λανθάνω with a partic., §279, 2; I should wish to depart without the knowl- edge of Cyrus, βουλοίμην αν λαθεΐν Κυρον απελθών, § 204, Ν. 2. land, yy} (ή); by land, κατά yrjv; to land, αποβιβάζω. language, in the Greek language, Έλληνικώς. large, μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα. last, *<τχατοϊ, -τ;, -ο»/, § 142, 4, Ν. 4. laughter, γέλως (ό). law, νόμος (ό). lay (down) up, to, κατατίθεμαι, mid. ; I did not lay (them) up for myself for my own private Use, οι'* ε Ις τό ίδιον κατεθέμην έμοί. lay waste, to, τέμνω. lead, to, &γω ; lead away or back, ατάγω ; lead up, άνά^ω; (com- mand), ηγέομα: w. gen. leader, ηγεμών (δ). learn, to, μανθάνω ; καταμανθάνω. learning, fond of learning, φιλο- μαθή*, -ές. leave, to, λείπω ; to leave behind, ύπολείπω. left, εΐ'ώνυμος, -ov; the left wing, τό ευώνυμον ; the left hand, ή αρισ- τερά χειρ. leisure, σχολή (ή) ; to be at leisure, σχολάζω. length, μήκος (τ6). lest, μή (after verbs of fearing), §218. let, ^άω ; by the subjunctive or the imperative, § 252 and § 253. letter, επιστολή (ή). levying (of troops), συλλογή (ή); to levy, συλλέγω. liberty, ελευθερία {ή). lie (dead), to, κεΐμαι, § 129, V. life, βίος (ό). lift up, to, αΐρω. light-armed man, γνμνήτης (ο), like, to, am pleased with, ήδομαι. little, όλί-γος, -η, -ov, § 73, 6 ; want little, OMyov δέω, § 172, 2, Ν. 2. live, to, ζάω, § 123, X. 2. loiter, to, βλακεύω. long (much), πολύς, πολλή, πολύ. longer, no, ονκέτι ; μηκέτι ; § 283 ; longer, ίτι. look, to, βλέπω. loose, to, λύω ; to let loose, άφίημι ; to cause to let forth, αφίεμαι, mid. ; the one who let loose the ass, τδν άφέντα τόν 6vov ; to let go, άφίημι. loud, πολύς, πολλή, πολύ. love, to, φιλέω. maintain 62 my Μ. maintain, to, τρέφω; (another army) was secretly maintained, τρεφόμενον έλάνθανεν. make, to, ποιέω ; make an expedi- tion, στρατεύομαι; make war, πολεμέω; to be made, yiyvop&i; make a treaty, σπένδομαι ; make an agreement, συντίθεμαι (mid.), § 187 ; to make a levy, την συλ- Xoyrjv ποιούμαι (mid. ) ; make oath, δμννμι. man, ανήρ (ό) (Lat. vir) ; άνθρωπος (ό) (Lat. homo) ; sometimes ren- dered by the predicative gen., § 169, 1 ; the men of that time, oi τότε άνθρωποι, § 141, Ν. 3. manager, οικονόμος (ό). manifest, δήλος, -η, -ov; mani- festly, § 280, Κ 1. many, πολλοί, -αί, -a; as many as possible, 8τι πλείστοι, -at, -a. march, to, πορεύομαι (of either the general or the army) ; έξελαύνω (of the general) ; στρατεύω (of the army). march, 686s (η) ; a day's march, σταθμός (ό) ; πορεία (η). market-place, ay ορά (η); market, to furnish a market, dyopav παρέχειν. Marsyas, Μαρσύας (ό) master of, iy κρατάς (ό). meat, κρέα (τά), § 56, 1. meet (to fall in with), to, «rtry- χάνω; (to go out to meet), απαντάω. Men of Greece, Ο, ω άνδρες "Ελληνες. Menon, Μένων (ό). mention, to, λέγω. ' mercenary, ξένος, -η, -ov. message, aVyeXfa (η). messenger, άγγελος (ό). middle, μέσος, -η, •ον, §142, 4, Ν. 4. Miletus, Μίλητος (η). mina, μνα (η). mind, νους (ό). mingle, to, κεράνννμι. moderately, μετρίως, money, χρήματα (τά). month, μ-ην (ό). more, μάλλον; more than, μάλλον ή; more (in number), comp. of πολύς. morning, έως (η) ; the following morning, η επιοϋσα έως. most, the very, ότι πλείστοι. mother, μήτηρ (η). mountain, δρος (τό). much, πολύς, -η, -ύ ; how much, πόσος ; δσος, as much. mud, πηλός (ό). multitude, πλήθος (τό) must, δεΐ, § 184, 2, Κ 1 ; by the verbal in -τέος, § 281, 1 and 2 ; we must do this, ταύτα ημΧν (or ήμας, § 188, 4) ποιητεον εστίν, or ταύτα 'ημάς δεΐ ποιησαι, § 184, 2, Ν. 1. my, εμός, --ή, -όν, or the personal pronoun, § 147, when not emphatic by the article, and § 141, N. 2; my own, the reflexive pronoun, §80; §142, 4, Ν 3; myself when intensive, the proper form of αυτός, -ή, •ό, §145; myself reflexive, εμαυτοΰ, έμαντης, § 146. name 63 often Ν. name, όνομα (τό) ; named, see § 160, 1 ; named Cydnus, Κύδνο* όνομα. narrow, στενός, -ή, -όν. narrowly, μακρόν, adv. nation, (θνο* ( - native land, ττατρίτ (ή). near, iyyvs w. gen., § 182, 2, fine print ; (tcl w. gen. dat. ; ταρά (by the side of), irpos (in tL of), w. dat. ; τλησίοι, -η, -of, for comparison see vo< necessary, it is, χρή ; to be neces- sary, δέομαι, § 173 ind X. 1. necessity, ανάγκη (η) ; nnless there was some necessity for it, tl ao) τ l avay καιον c^, p. 65, 11»; it li necessary, (lit., there is a ne- cessity to me), ανάγκη μοι. neck, τράχηλο* (6). necklace, στραττό* am in, Μ ι , to, δ(ω ; there is need of, ou, § 1 72 and X. J; to be in need, δέομαι. negligently, ήμ(\ημένωΐ. neighbor, ^ίτων (6) ; as an adj., neighboring to or adjacent to, w. gen. ο: neither . . . nor, otfre . . . ofrre ; μήτ€ never, οΰποτς; μήποτ€• 9 ουκ en; see § 2S3. nevertheless, δ4 with a correspond- ing μέν. next, έχ6μενο%, -η, >ov ; Proxenus being next, Ι1ρ6ξ€ΐ>ος επόμενο* ; next to, *τ>όϊ w. dat. night, νύξ (ή) ; about midnight, Tepi /tiVas vi/cras. no (not), ού ; no, nor, αλλ* ov&; no longer, oiWrt ; μηκέτι ; § no one, nobody, oJSa'j; μηδείς; ris with re ; § 283. noise, θόρνβο* (6). nonsense, φΧναρία (ή), north, άρκτο* (ό). not, οι» ; οι : κ before the smooth breathing ; ονχ before the rough breathing; in interrogative Ben- pecta an affirmative /«} a negitiw answer. For the use of ou and μ ή, § 283. nothing, ονδέν, μηδέν ; § 283. now (at this time) , νυν ; even now, ήδη (already), nowhere, ονδαμον. number, αριθμό* (6); τλήθο* (τό). Ο. Ο, followed by the vocative, ω; Ο that, the optative, either with or without cMe or d yap, § 251, 1. obey, to, τύθομαι; to (must) be obeyed, ττίστέο*, -α, -ov w. dat. obliquely, els wXdyiov. observe, to, κατανοίω. obtain, to, διαπράττομαι (mid. ) ; having obtained (his request) from the king that it should be granted, δta^Γ€πpayμέvos παρά /3α- σιλέως δοθηναι. occupy, to, (χω. often, τολλά /u*. old 64 permit old, πρεσβυς, adj. ; to be (so many) years old, ειμί w. gen., those who are thirty years old, oi τριά- κοντα (τη yey ovOTes, § 200, N. 6. on (situated on), επί w. dat., or gen. ; on account of, 'ένεκα w. gen., διά w. ace. ; on the plain of Castolus, έν Καστωλοΰ πεδίψ, with verbs of rest ; with verbs of motion, εις . . . πεδίον ; on the sup- position that, ώς with a partic., § 277, 6, N. 2 ; to advance on the run, δρδμφ θεΐν ; on condition that, έφ φ, § 267 ; on all sides, πάνττ), adv. : on you, ets υμάς. one, e?s, μία, εν; one of the oppo- site party, άντιστασιώτης (6) : one is translated by the gen. after verbs to name, to appoint, etc., § 169, 2. once, άπαξ, (on a certain time), ποτέ ; at once, now, 'ήδη. only, μόνος, -η, -ov. oppose, to, κωλύω. opposed to, or opposite to, κατά w. ace. opposite to, καταντιπέρας, w. gen. or, η. order, to (bid, urge), κελεύω; to arrange in order, τάσσω ; (to tell, direct) φράζω. order (law), νόμος (δ); (military) order, τάξις (η); in order of battle, έν τάξει ; in order that, fro, § 216. originate from, to, yiyvopai. ornament, κόσμος (ό). Orontes, Όρόντης (ο). other, άλλος, -η, -ο ; (of two), έτε- ρος, a. ov. otherwise, άλλως. ought, χρή; δεΐ. our, by the gen. of personal pronoun, or by the possessive, § 142, 4, N. 3 ; § 147, when not emphatic by the article, § 141, N. 2. out of, έκ w. gen. over, υπέρ w. ace. or gen. overcome, to, νικάω. overpower, to, βιάζομαι. owe, to, οφείλω. own, my own, your own, etc., gen. of reflexive pronoun, § 142, 4, X. 3. ox, βοΰς (ό). P. pack up one's baggage, to, συσκευ- άζομαι. palace, βασίλεια (τά). palm-tree, φοίνιξ (ό). park, παράδεισος (ό). particularly, both . . . and particu- larly, τέ . . . καΐ. Parysatis, Υίαρύσατις (η). Pasion, ΙΙασίων (ό). pass or passage, υπερβολή (η) ; πύ- λαι (al). paternal, πατρφος, -α, -ον. pay, μισθός (ό) ; to pay attention, έπιμελέομαι. people, δήμος (ό) ; the people of the city, or in the city, oi έν άστει. perceive, to, αισθάνομαι. perhaps, ίσως. perish, to, άπόλλυμαι (mid.) ; απο- θνήσκω (used as the passive of άποκτείνω, to kill). permit, to, έάω ; it is permitted, ϊξεστιν. perplexed 65 put perplexed, to be, άτορέω. Persian, ΙΙίρσητ (ό). persuade, πίθω. phalanx, πο- λαμβάνω; to take counsel, βου- λεύομαι ; to take command, ττγέο- μαι; to take (seize), αϊρέω or άφαιρέω; (to receive) δέχομαι; take part in the work, προσλαμ- βάνω. talent, τάλαντον (τδ). tame, πράος. tamely, πράως. targeteer, πελταστής (ό). teach, to, παιδεύω; διδάσκω. ν tell 69 treat ill tell, to, λέ^ω; (report) άπαγ/έλλω; elxov, 2 aor., see § 260, 1, X. 1. temple, νέως (ό). ten, δέκα ; ten thousand, μύριοι, •αι, .α, § 77, 1, Ν. 3. tender, άτταλό*, -ή, -όν. tent, σκηνή (ή). terrified, to be, εκπλήττομαι, territory, χώρα (ή). Thales, θα\ψ (ό). than, ή. Thapsacus, θάψακος (η). that, pronoun, hmrot; after verbs of saying when the infinitive U not used, 6tl or ώϊ, § 243; in order that, lva y δπως, § S verbs υ( fairing μή, § 218 ; at that time, Tore ; I by Um article, § 1 Π, Ν. Γ> ; some- times by an adverb, § 141, the men of that time, oi r&rt άνθρωποι; before an inlin. η ourse, see | when the iut'iii. is not used, άτι or ώί, § the, ό, η, τ6; the men in the city, ol iv &στ€ΐ άνθρωποι ; the men of that time, ol τ6τ€ αρθρωτοί ; the affairs of the state, τά rrjs πό~ λεως; see §141, ami EfotB•; the . . . and, μέν . . . δέ ; the foil ι >r the more . . . so much the more, δσω with comp. followed by another comp. with τοσούτφ, § 1S8, 2. then, τδτ€, άρα-, τοίνυν (continua- tive). thence, έντ€νθ€ν. there, έντανθα ; έκεΐ; there is, εστίν. thing, Trpayfia (τό) ; or by neut. a«ij. or pronoun. think, to, (consider, suppose), νομίζω; (believe), ττγέομαι; (sup- pose, believe), οΐομαι ; to think one's self worthy, άξώω. third, τρίτος, -η, -ov; on the third day, ry τρίτη, § 189 (end), thirty-seven, επτά και τριάκοντα. this, οΰτος; 6oV, §148; this one who, often the article andpartie., § 276, 2. those, see this ; those in the city, oi iv &στ€ΐ,§ 141, N. 3; those who, often by artie. withpartie., § 276, 9 ami § 148, N. 3. those, σν, § 144, 1. though, μέν with a corresponding δέ. thousand, χίλιοι, -at, -a. Thracian, θρ$ξ (ό). through, διά w. gen. throw, to, Χημι, § 129, III. ; βάλλω. thus, οντω (as above mentioned) ; ώδ€ (as follows). till, (στ€, (ως, § 239; πριν, § 240, 1. time, χρόνοι (ό) ; soim-times l.y UM I.•, with an adverb, § 142, N. he men of that time, ol τότε άνθρωποι. Tiseaphernes, Τισσαφέρνης (ό). η <>f «latiw ; when expr by a imposition; eis, with names of places ; ώ*, with persons only ; προς (into the j | ) or τταρά (to the side of) with ]>ersons or to the region where, μέχρις οδ. Tolmides, Ίολμίδης (6). towards (with verbs of motion), έπ{ xepl w. ace. town, πδλις (η). track, ΐχνιον (τό). transact, to, ποιέω. treachery, without, άδόλω*, adv. treat ill or well, to, κακώς or eu ποιέω, § 165, Ν. 1; to be well or ill treated, ev, or κακώς πάσχ^ιν. treaty 70 voyage treaty, σπονδαί (αί); to make a treaty, σπονδάς πουείθαι ; to break a treaty, σπονδάς λύε&. trench, τάφρο* (ή). tribute, δασμός (ό). trouble, to give, πρά*/ματα παρέχω ; troubled, to be, άνιάομαι. truce, σπονδαί (at) ; to make a truce, σπένδομαι (mid), true, αληθινός, -ή> -όν. trumpet sounds, σαλπίζει (imper). trust, to, πιστεύω. truth, αλήθεια (ή). tunic, χιτων (ό). turn, in your, α 5, adv. turn about, to, αναστρέφω. turned into, to be, Ίί-γνομαι. twenty, είκοσι, indecl. ; twenty- five, πέντε καΐ είκοσι. two by two, κατά δύο. U. unarmed, άοπλος, -ov. unattended with gratitude, to be, άχαρίστως έχειν, w. dat. uncovered, ψιλός, -ή, -όν. under, ύπό w. gen. dat., or ace. uneducated, απαίδευτο?, -ov. unexpected gain, εΰρημα (τό); I made it for myself an unex- pected gain, εύρημα έποιησάμην. unjust, άδικος, η, -ov. unless (if not), ει μή, § 219, 3. unobserved, έλανθάνω w. the partic. § 279, 2 and § 204, N. 2. unprepared, απαράσκευος, -a, -ov; as unprepared as possible, oVt απ αρασ κευότατος } -η, -ov. unrewarded, αχάριστος, -ov. until, ϊως, έστε, άχρι, § 239, πριν, § 240, 1. unwillingly, άκων, -ov. up, ανά, w. ace.; adv. άνω; to go up, αναβαίνω ; up to, μέχρι with genitive used of either place or time. upon, έπί with gen. (after verbs of rest) ; w. the ace. after verbs of motion ; by the dat. upward, άνω. urge on the work, to, σπουδάζω. use, to, χράομαι, § 188, 1, Ν. 2. useful, χρήσιμος, -η, ov. V. value, to, τιμάομαι. vengeance upon, to take, τιμωρέο- μαι (mid.) w. ace. very, μάλα; (altogether), πάνυ; the very person who, δσπερ, 'ήσερ, Βπερ; in very truth, ή μψ. vessel, vavs (ή)> victory, νίκη (η). village, κώμη (η). vine, άμπελος (ή). virtue, αρετή (ή). visible, to be, καταφαίνομαι. voyage, πλους (ό). wage war 71 withdraw W. wage war, to, τοΧεμέω. wagon, άμαξα (ή) ; wagon road, όθο$ αμαξιτοί. wait, to, Τ€ρίμένω. wall, τίίχοι (τό). want (ask), to, δέομαι, generally with the gen, § 172, 2 ; but it takes neut. pronouns and sometimes neut. ail; want a little, OXiyov ό7ω. war, τό\€μο$ (ό). waste in pleasure, to, καθηδνταθίω. water, ίδωρ (τό); to water, αρδω. way, όδόί (η); to be on one's way, χορεύομαι ; by the speediest way, r)p ταχίστψ odor; in any way, τώί, audit ; in other wa\ άλ\α. weak, άσθ£νήι, -ί%. wealth, vXoOrot (6). wealthy, tXoi'ntios, -la, -*■?; filef /xu;r, -or. weep, to, δακρό*. well, etf; to be well, *a\i2n /χ*ιτ; 11 watered, ίτίρρινο*, -or; Π -armed, ίΓοτλοτ, -or. well disposed, fflroot, -or ; see § 71, what, W*, W, § 149, 1 and 2; in in- 'ϊ+,&τι ; for what, W. whatever, £ re when (after), ^Tf ί ; interrog., τηνίκα ; by ■ \ku Γ. 1. whenever, ototc, § whence, from whence, Wer ; ^fr. where, oe; Intemg., το; with verbs of motion, vol; ft I ail v., tv6a. wherever, fc^witfa verbs of motion ; δτον with verbs of whether, e/ ; whether ... or, τό- τερον . . . -η. while (when), txd ; (in that time), *r φ; or rendered by the partie. white, \cvk6s, -ή, -or. who, τί*, interrogative ; o$, relative ; 5στι$ often in dependent questions, \% and §149, 2. whoever, δστιι. whole, ray, τάσα, Tar; S\os, •η, -ο*; see §142, 4, N. 1. why, τί ; διά τί. width, evpos (τό) ; about twenty- five feet wide, ώ* €Ϊκοσι τοδών τό OS. wild, a7piot, -/α, -ων\ wild animal, . olroi (ό). wing (of an army), κ4ρα* (τό). σοφοί, -τ), -ov y wisely, σοφως, § 74, ι. wisdom, σοφία (ή). wish, to, βονΧομαι. with (in company with, with the help of), +. Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide I Treatment Date: Jury 2006 PreservationTechnoloqiei A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERvXtIo! TOnson Park Drive -^erry Townshj), PA 16066